Search icon CANCEL
Subscription
0
Cart icon
Your Cart (0 item)
Close icon
You have no products in your basket yet
Arrow left icon
Explore Products
Best Sellers
New Releases
Books
Videos
Audiobooks
Learning Hub
Free Learning
Arrow right icon
Hands-On Motion Graphics with Adobe After Effects CC
Hands-On Motion Graphics with Adobe After Effects CC

Hands-On Motion Graphics with Adobe After Effects CC: Develop your skills as a visual effects and motion graphics artist

eBook
$27.98 $39.99
Paperback
$48.99
Subscription
Free Trial
Renews at $19.99p/m

What do you get with eBook?

Product feature icon Instant access to your Digital eBook purchase
Product feature icon Download this book in EPUB and PDF formats
Product feature icon Access this title in our online reader with advanced features
Product feature icon DRM FREE - Read whenever, wherever and however you want
Product feature icon AI Assistant (beta) to help accelerate your learning
OR
Modal Close icon
Payment Processing...
tick Completed

Billing Address

Table of content icon View table of contents Preview book icon Preview Book

Hands-On Motion Graphics with Adobe After Effects CC

Part I. Section 1: Text, Layers, Characters, Animation

In this section, you will learn where the main tools and menus are. The focus is on shape and text layers, animating position, scale, rotation, opacity, and masks.

The following chapters are included in this section:

  • Chapter 1, Getting Started with After Effects
  • Chapter 2, Creating a Lower Third for a Television Show
  • Chapter 3, Using Shape Layers to Create an Animated Lyric Video
  • Chapter 4, Creating an Infographic with Character Animation
  • Chapter 5, Producing a Film Title Project Using Text Animator

Chapter 1. Getting Started with After Effects

Welcome to this exciting journey into After Effects! In this chapter, I will give you a grand tour of this powerful program.

You will learn to navigate using After Effects and to locate your tools and effects. You will be introduced to the layer panel, the timeline, and key frames, and you will learn to import files. You will also learn to create, animate, and mask your layers.

We'll begin the chapter with the program's interface, to help you understand how to navigate. By the end of this chapter, you will know how to create a simple animated slideshow. The concepts we'll learn in this chapter are simple; however, the tools that we'll learn to use will be crucial to future projects (Illustration, photography, and all artistic content by David Dodds).

This chapter will cover the following topics:

  • The After Effects interface
  • Masking layers
  • Creating a project
  • Introducing layer properties
  • Basic animation
  • Creating an animation slideshow

Technical requirements

To use this book, you will need Photoshop, Illustrator, Character Animator, and After Effects CC. You need to have a good understanding of standard menus and commands. Some of the lessons in this book use Adobe-Character Animator, Adobe Bridge, Adobe Media Encoder, Adobe Illustrator, and Adobe Photoshop. You must install these applications from Adobe Cloud. Some knowledge of Adobe Photoshop and Illustrator will be helpful for performing the projects in this book.

Computer requirements

After Effects requires a minimum of 8 GB of RAM.

Exploring the interface

Now, let's take a look at the After Effects interface. When you first open After Effects, you will see a Start menu. Close this by clicking the red X in the upper right-hand top corner:

Exploring the interface

Start menu

This menu can be helpful if you need to locate a recently opened project. I find it best to close this and locate what we need in the program itself.

Resetting the layout

Your workspace is where all your panels and tools are located. This is the heart of the program. Your workspace can be configured in different ways; let's make sure it's set to the default state.

Go to Window | Workspace | Reset "Standard" to Saved Layout. This is the standard workspace:

Resetting the layout

Resetting the workspace

This way, everything is where it's supposed to be in our interface; nothing is out of place.

Saving your project

Saving a project is always a good practice. Let's start our project by creating a new file by saving it:

  1. Go up to the top-left tab, File. Choose Save As | Save As... and name the file test.
  2. Navigate to where you want to save your After Effect project. It's a good idea to number your projects. Let's name ours projects_01.

We have started saving our first project. It's important to start saving things right away.

The project panel

The project panel is where you bring in all your assets. After Effects is often used in post-production. You are usually working from many different asset types. Your project can get very disorganized quickly. This is where you keep all your assets tidy. You will be very happy when your project gets more difficult and you have taken the time to keep things organized. It is easier to find things when you have a tidy project. It also helps you to work faster. The project panel has icons at the bottom of the panel. Choose the one called folder:

The project panel

Creating a new folder

Let's learn how to create folders in our project panel by following these steps to create one:

  1. Click on the folder icon
  2. Name this new comp-main comp

When you bring media into After Effects, be sure to organize all your media into the appropriate folders.

You can create the following folders:

  • MAIN
  • AUDIO
  • PRECOMP
  • Images
  • Footage

You should have five folders. Right-click on the folder to rename them.

The projects in this book will use these five folders. We have created them to organize everything properly.

Importing images

Let's import a large image (at least 1,920 x 1,080) by double-clicking the open area. This brings up your media folders. You can click anywhere in the area where I'm standing in the next screenshot:

Importing images

Project panel

Drag and move this image into the Images folder. You can rename your images by right-clicking on the layer.

After Effect references material. It doesn't actually keep anything in the project; it references things. You should never rename a file outside After Effects. When you import images into a Photoshop document, it saves a copy with the document. However, After Effects links to the assets you import into your project. You should always leave the name unchanged because After Effects will not be able to find the new name for its referencing, and you will receive an error message.

Rather than renaming or removing your files from After Effects, it's better to create a copy or not to move it. If you need to replace a file, you have to right-click on the layer and choose to replace or reload the footage:

Importing images

Replace footage

Practice renaming and relinking your files a couple times, just to make sure you understand that concept.

If you need to delete anything, drag it into the trashcan; this is highlighted in the following screenshot:

Importing images

Trashcan

Preferences – Autosave

Now we will turn our attention to setting Auto-Save... for your projects. It's important to get that set up so your project will automatically save, even if you forget to do this. The following steps will show you how to set up autosave:

  1. Go to Edit | Preferences | Auto-Save....
  2. Set autosave at 20-minute intervals.
  3. You can adjust the maximum number of versions of your project to autosave. The default number is 5:
    Preferences – Autosave

    Autosaving projects

Setting up autosave can save your life. If your project crashes, you will be happy that you have a back-up copy saved in the autosave folder. This is located wherever you save your project.

Creating compositions

After Effects uses compositions to place and arrange your elements. Remember to consider design principles that help create a strong composition when you arrange your elements. In After Effects, these compositions are referred to as comps. I am going to create a comp by hitting the new composition icon. If you look closely at the icon, you will see that it looks like a composition symbol with shapes:

Creating compositions

New composition

Leave all these settings as they are, but make the comp size 1,920 x 1,080, and make the time duration 0;04;00;00. Name the comp MAIN:

Creating compositions

Composition settings

Drag the main comp into the MAIN comp folder:

Creating compositions

Organizing a project

The timelines and the toolbar

Look at the lower-third of the screen. This is called the timeline panel. The timeline is the works space where you create key frames. This is where you make your layers animate across time. You also organize your layer-stacking order. This stacking order is similar to Photoshop. Layers at the top will appear on top of other layers:

The timelines and the toolbar

Timeline panel

After briefly learning about the timeline panel, let's discuss how to bring layers into your composition.

Bringing layers into your composition

Bringing layers into your composition is easy. Layers are the basic building blocks for creating a movie. A layer can be an image, video footage, or an audio file.

Follow these steps:

  1. Go into the IMAGE folder.
  2. Drag the image on to the timeline.
  3. If the image is 1,920 x 1,080, it will fit perfectly and fill up the screen. It will come into the comp centered:
Bringing layers into your composition

Bringing an image into the timeline

Tool panel

Let's go over our tools! The tool panel is where you find all your tools to edit your layers. Here, you can find tools to move your layers and navigate around your composition:

  • Selection Tool (V): Go to the top left side of the screen. This is called the tool bar:
    Tool panel

    Selection Tool

    The arrow icon on the far left is called the Selection Tool.

  • Hand Tool (H): The hand tool is to the right of the arrow tool. This tool lets you move around in your composition:
    Tool panel

    Hand Tool

    Now select the hand tool or use the keyboard shortcut H. You can use the hand tool to move around in your view or navigate around in the comp.

  • Zoom Tool (Z): The zoom tool is next to the hand tool. This tool will magnify your image in the composition. Select the zoom tool, or use the keyboard shortcut Z, and click on the image in the comp a few times:
    Tool panel

    Zoom Tool

  • Rotate Tool (W): The rotate tool is the circular tool next to the zoom tool:
    Tool panel

    Rotate Tool

    Let's explore how to use the rotate tool. The center of the screen where your image is displayed is called the composition window. At the bottom left is an icon called the Magnification ratio popup. Choose fit to 100%. This will zoom out so we can see what's happening:

    Tool panel

    Magnifying

    Select the rotate tool, or use the keyboard shortcut W, and adjust the image:

    Tool panel

    Rotate

    To undo an action, go to the top-left corner and choose Edit | Undo Rotate Object:

    Tool panel

    Undo

  • Pan Behind (Anchor Point) Tool (Y): I'll skip the camera tool for now. Next to the camera tool is the pan behind tool. Use this to move your anchor point. Things animate along the anchor point in After Effects. It's useful to know how to move the anchor point around, as it gives you control over how things animate:
    Tool panel

    Pan behind tool

  • Masking Tool: To the right are our masking tools. The first shape in the list is the rectangle tool. With these masking tools, you can click and drag to create a shape. Click on the triangle icon on the bottom-left of this tool's button. You will find the rounded Rectangle Tool, the Eclipse Tool, and the Star Tool:
    Tool panel

    Masking tool

  • Pen Tool (G): Next to the rectangle tool is the pen tool. It is used to make custom shapes in After Effects.
  • Type tool: To the right of the pen tool is the type tool.
  • Brush tool: The next icon with the brush icon is the brush tool.
  • Stamp tool: The icon with the stamp icon is the clone stamp tool.

We will go over more of these tools later.

Hopefully, you are starting to get used to the interface in After Effects. Poke around and experiment with these tools, to get comfortable with them. A little triangle next to a tool's button means you can access more options for that tool. If a tool is grayed out, just click on your comp and it will become active.

Preview panel

Let's go over the preview panel. This is located in the upper-right corner of your screen:

Preview panel

Preview panel

This preview panel gives you options such as moving through your movie. A project is made up of frames, just like in real video footage. In After Effects, moving within a project is referred to as moving down the timeline. This timeline is represented in units, such as frames, seconds, and minutes. This preview panel allows you to move forward or backward frame by frame. Pressing the play button lets you preview your project. You can also use the ram review, which gives you the ability to watch the project at a faster speed. You can also hit the space bar to preview your animation.

Composition window

At the bottom of the composition window, there are a few options. Let's go over some of them.

The icon in the lower right-hand corner of the composition is where you will find your guide options. These guide options are used to arrange your layers and to create compositionally strong images. However, these guides are not rendered; they are only for preview purposes:

  • Guides: These are used for aligning and arranging layers. To remove guides, choose View | Clear guides.
  • Title/Action Safe: These are video-safe zones, for standard video monitors.
  • Rulers: This is used to drag guides to the composition to align and arrange layers to.
  • Grid: This is a modular grid that helps you organize your layers and create strong compositions:
Composition window

Guides

A little further over to the right is the resolution button. You can reduce the quality down to Quarter. This gives you the ability to look at it and play it back even faster, but at a lower quality:

Composition window

Resolution

Next, we will go over our Effects & Presets panel. The effects panel is a major toolbox full of effects to make your video look amazing! This panel gives you access to hundreds of effects that can help you create animation, correct the color, or fix any number of problems with video or images.

Effects panel

The effects panel is located to the far-right, below the preview panel. A lot of these effects are the same as those used in Photoshop. You may be familiar with Brightness, Contrast, Curves, and so on. Make sure your layer is selected in the timeline, before clicking on an effect.

You can add an effect to a layer by doing the following:

  1. Twirl the category name dow
  2. Click on the effect with the layer selected, or you can type in the name of the effect
  3. Double-click on the effect, while your layer is selected

Let's type the effect (auto levels) into the search bar. Double-click the effect to add to our layer:

Effects panel

Effects & Presets

You can adjust this effects in the effects control panel. This panel is nested right next to your main project panel:

Effects panel

Auto levels

The main difference between these effects and Photoshop is that you can animate them across the timeline, which we will get into in the next sections. You can also add multiple effects to a layer, to create complex visual images.

Resetting the layout

Your workspace is where all your panels and tools are located. This is the heart of the program. Your workspace can be configured in different ways; let's make sure it's set to the default state.

Go to Window | Workspace | Reset "Standard" to Saved Layout. This is the standard workspace:

Resetting the layout

Resetting the workspace

This way, everything is where it's supposed to be in our interface; nothing is out of place.

Saving your project

Saving a project is always a good practice. Let's start our project by creating a new file by saving it:

  1. Go up to the top-left tab, File. Choose Save As | Save As... and name the file test.
  2. Navigate to where you want to save your After Effect project. It's a good idea to number your projects. Let's name ours projects_01.

We have started saving our first project. It's important to start saving things right away.

The project panel

The project panel is where you bring in all your assets. After Effects is often used in post-production. You are usually working from many different asset types. Your project can get very disorganized quickly. This is where you keep all your assets tidy. You will be very happy when your project gets more difficult and you have taken the time to keep things organized. It is easier to find things when you have a tidy project. It also helps you to work faster. The project panel has icons at the bottom of the panel. Choose the one called folder:

The project panel

Creating a new folder

Let's learn how to create folders in our project panel by following these steps to create one:

  1. Click on the folder icon
  2. Name this new comp-main comp

When you bring media into After Effects, be sure to organize all your media into the appropriate folders.

You can create the following folders:

  • MAIN
  • AUDIO
  • PRECOMP
  • Images
  • Footage

You should have five folders. Right-click on the folder to rename them.

The projects in this book will use these five folders. We have created them to organize everything properly.

Importing images

Let's import a large image (at least 1,920 x 1,080) by double-clicking the open area. This brings up your media folders. You can click anywhere in the area where I'm standing in the next screenshot:

Importing images

Project panel

Drag and move this image into the Images folder. You can rename your images by right-clicking on the layer.

After Effect references material. It doesn't actually keep anything in the project; it references things. You should never rename a file outside After Effects. When you import images into a Photoshop document, it saves a copy with the document. However, After Effects links to the assets you import into your project. You should always leave the name unchanged because After Effects will not be able to find the new name for its referencing, and you will receive an error message.

Rather than renaming or removing your files from After Effects, it's better to create a copy or not to move it. If you need to replace a file, you have to right-click on the layer and choose to replace or reload the footage:

Importing images

Replace footage

Practice renaming and relinking your files a couple times, just to make sure you understand that concept.

If you need to delete anything, drag it into the trashcan; this is highlighted in the following screenshot:

Importing images

Trashcan

Preferences – Autosave

Now we will turn our attention to setting Auto-Save... for your projects. It's important to get that set up so your project will automatically save, even if you forget to do this. The following steps will show you how to set up autosave:

  1. Go to Edit | Preferences | Auto-Save....
  2. Set autosave at 20-minute intervals.
  3. You can adjust the maximum number of versions of your project to autosave. The default number is 5:
    Preferences – Autosave

    Autosaving projects

Setting up autosave can save your life. If your project crashes, you will be happy that you have a back-up copy saved in the autosave folder. This is located wherever you save your project.

Creating compositions

After Effects uses compositions to place and arrange your elements. Remember to consider design principles that help create a strong composition when you arrange your elements. In After Effects, these compositions are referred to as comps. I am going to create a comp by hitting the new composition icon. If you look closely at the icon, you will see that it looks like a composition symbol with shapes:

Creating compositions

New composition

Leave all these settings as they are, but make the comp size 1,920 x 1,080, and make the time duration 0;04;00;00. Name the comp MAIN:

Creating compositions

Composition settings

Drag the main comp into the MAIN comp folder:

Creating compositions

Organizing a project

The timelines and the toolbar

Look at the lower-third of the screen. This is called the timeline panel. The timeline is the works space where you create key frames. This is where you make your layers animate across time. You also organize your layer-stacking order. This stacking order is similar to Photoshop. Layers at the top will appear on top of other layers:

The timelines and the toolbar

Timeline panel

After briefly learning about the timeline panel, let's discuss how to bring layers into your composition.

Bringing layers into your composition

Bringing layers into your composition is easy. Layers are the basic building blocks for creating a movie. A layer can be an image, video footage, or an audio file.

Follow these steps:

  1. Go into the IMAGE folder.
  2. Drag the image on to the timeline.
  3. If the image is 1,920 x 1,080, it will fit perfectly and fill up the screen. It will come into the comp centered:
Bringing layers into your composition

Bringing an image into the timeline

Tool panel

Let's go over our tools! The tool panel is where you find all your tools to edit your layers. Here, you can find tools to move your layers and navigate around your composition:

  • Selection Tool (V): Go to the top left side of the screen. This is called the tool bar:
    Tool panel

    Selection Tool

    The arrow icon on the far left is called the Selection Tool.

  • Hand Tool (H): The hand tool is to the right of the arrow tool. This tool lets you move around in your composition:
    Tool panel

    Hand Tool

    Now select the hand tool or use the keyboard shortcut H. You can use the hand tool to move around in your view or navigate around in the comp.

  • Zoom Tool (Z): The zoom tool is next to the hand tool. This tool will magnify your image in the composition. Select the zoom tool, or use the keyboard shortcut Z, and click on the image in the comp a few times:
    Tool panel

    Zoom Tool

  • Rotate Tool (W): The rotate tool is the circular tool next to the zoom tool:
    Tool panel

    Rotate Tool

    Let's explore how to use the rotate tool. The center of the screen where your image is displayed is called the composition window. At the bottom left is an icon called the Magnification ratio popup. Choose fit to 100%. This will zoom out so we can see what's happening:

    Tool panel

    Magnifying

    Select the rotate tool, or use the keyboard shortcut W, and adjust the image:

    Tool panel

    Rotate

    To undo an action, go to the top-left corner and choose Edit | Undo Rotate Object:

    Tool panel

    Undo

  • Pan Behind (Anchor Point) Tool (Y): I'll skip the camera tool for now. Next to the camera tool is the pan behind tool. Use this to move your anchor point. Things animate along the anchor point in After Effects. It's useful to know how to move the anchor point around, as it gives you control over how things animate:
    Tool panel

    Pan behind tool

  • Masking Tool: To the right are our masking tools. The first shape in the list is the rectangle tool. With these masking tools, you can click and drag to create a shape. Click on the triangle icon on the bottom-left of this tool's button. You will find the rounded Rectangle Tool, the Eclipse Tool, and the Star Tool:
    Tool panel

    Masking tool

  • Pen Tool (G): Next to the rectangle tool is the pen tool. It is used to make custom shapes in After Effects.
  • Type tool: To the right of the pen tool is the type tool.
  • Brush tool: The next icon with the brush icon is the brush tool.
  • Stamp tool: The icon with the stamp icon is the clone stamp tool.

We will go over more of these tools later.

Hopefully, you are starting to get used to the interface in After Effects. Poke around and experiment with these tools, to get comfortable with them. A little triangle next to a tool's button means you can access more options for that tool. If a tool is grayed out, just click on your comp and it will become active.

Preview panel

Let's go over the preview panel. This is located in the upper-right corner of your screen:

Preview panel

Preview panel

This preview panel gives you options such as moving through your movie. A project is made up of frames, just like in real video footage. In After Effects, moving within a project is referred to as moving down the timeline. This timeline is represented in units, such as frames, seconds, and minutes. This preview panel allows you to move forward or backward frame by frame. Pressing the play button lets you preview your project. You can also use the ram review, which gives you the ability to watch the project at a faster speed. You can also hit the space bar to preview your animation.

Composition window

At the bottom of the composition window, there are a few options. Let's go over some of them.

The icon in the lower right-hand corner of the composition is where you will find your guide options. These guide options are used to arrange your layers and to create compositionally strong images. However, these guides are not rendered; they are only for preview purposes:

  • Guides: These are used for aligning and arranging layers. To remove guides, choose View | Clear guides.
  • Title/Action Safe: These are video-safe zones, for standard video monitors.
  • Rulers: This is used to drag guides to the composition to align and arrange layers to.
  • Grid: This is a modular grid that helps you organize your layers and create strong compositions:
Composition window

Guides

A little further over to the right is the resolution button. You can reduce the quality down to Quarter. This gives you the ability to look at it and play it back even faster, but at a lower quality:

Composition window

Resolution

Next, we will go over our Effects & Presets panel. The effects panel is a major toolbox full of effects to make your video look amazing! This panel gives you access to hundreds of effects that can help you create animation, correct the color, or fix any number of problems with video or images.

Effects panel

The effects panel is located to the far-right, below the preview panel. A lot of these effects are the same as those used in Photoshop. You may be familiar with Brightness, Contrast, Curves, and so on. Make sure your layer is selected in the timeline, before clicking on an effect.

You can add an effect to a layer by doing the following:

  1. Twirl the category name dow
  2. Click on the effect with the layer selected, or you can type in the name of the effect
  3. Double-click on the effect, while your layer is selected

Let's type the effect (auto levels) into the search bar. Double-click the effect to add to our layer:

Effects panel

Effects & Presets

You can adjust this effects in the effects control panel. This panel is nested right next to your main project panel:

Effects panel

Auto levels

The main difference between these effects and Photoshop is that you can animate them across the timeline, which we will get into in the next sections. You can also add multiple effects to a layer, to create complex visual images.

Saving your project

Saving a project is always a good practice. Let's start our project by creating a new file by saving it:

  1. Go up to the top-left tab, File. Choose Save As | Save As... and name the file test.
  2. Navigate to where you want to save your After Effect project. It's a good idea to number your projects. Let's name ours projects_01.

We have started saving our first project. It's important to start saving things right away.

The project panel

The project panel is where you bring in all your assets. After Effects is often used in post-production. You are usually working from many different asset types. Your project can get very disorganized quickly. This is where you keep all your assets tidy. You will be very happy when your project gets more difficult and you have taken the time to keep things organized. It is easier to find things when you have a tidy project. It also helps you to work faster. The project panel has icons at the bottom of the panel. Choose the one called folder:

The project panel

Creating a new folder

Let's learn how to create folders in our project panel by following these steps to create one:

  1. Click on the folder icon
  2. Name this new comp-main comp

When you bring media into After Effects, be sure to organize all your media into the appropriate folders.

You can create the following folders:

  • MAIN
  • AUDIO
  • PRECOMP
  • Images
  • Footage

You should have five folders. Right-click on the folder to rename them.

The projects in this book will use these five folders. We have created them to organize everything properly.

Importing images

Let's import a large image (at least 1,920 x 1,080) by double-clicking the open area. This brings up your media folders. You can click anywhere in the area where I'm standing in the next screenshot:

Importing images

Project panel

Drag and move this image into the Images folder. You can rename your images by right-clicking on the layer.

After Effect references material. It doesn't actually keep anything in the project; it references things. You should never rename a file outside After Effects. When you import images into a Photoshop document, it saves a copy with the document. However, After Effects links to the assets you import into your project. You should always leave the name unchanged because After Effects will not be able to find the new name for its referencing, and you will receive an error message.

Rather than renaming or removing your files from After Effects, it's better to create a copy or not to move it. If you need to replace a file, you have to right-click on the layer and choose to replace or reload the footage:

Importing images

Replace footage

Practice renaming and relinking your files a couple times, just to make sure you understand that concept.

If you need to delete anything, drag it into the trashcan; this is highlighted in the following screenshot:

Importing images

Trashcan

Preferences – Autosave

Now we will turn our attention to setting Auto-Save... for your projects. It's important to get that set up so your project will automatically save, even if you forget to do this. The following steps will show you how to set up autosave:

  1. Go to Edit | Preferences | Auto-Save....
  2. Set autosave at 20-minute intervals.
  3. You can adjust the maximum number of versions of your project to autosave. The default number is 5:
    Preferences – Autosave

    Autosaving projects

Setting up autosave can save your life. If your project crashes, you will be happy that you have a back-up copy saved in the autosave folder. This is located wherever you save your project.

Creating compositions

After Effects uses compositions to place and arrange your elements. Remember to consider design principles that help create a strong composition when you arrange your elements. In After Effects, these compositions are referred to as comps. I am going to create a comp by hitting the new composition icon. If you look closely at the icon, you will see that it looks like a composition symbol with shapes:

Creating compositions

New composition

Leave all these settings as they are, but make the comp size 1,920 x 1,080, and make the time duration 0;04;00;00. Name the comp MAIN:

Creating compositions

Composition settings

Drag the main comp into the MAIN comp folder:

Creating compositions

Organizing a project

The timelines and the toolbar

Look at the lower-third of the screen. This is called the timeline panel. The timeline is the works space where you create key frames. This is where you make your layers animate across time. You also organize your layer-stacking order. This stacking order is similar to Photoshop. Layers at the top will appear on top of other layers:

The timelines and the toolbar

Timeline panel

After briefly learning about the timeline panel, let's discuss how to bring layers into your composition.

Bringing layers into your composition

Bringing layers into your composition is easy. Layers are the basic building blocks for creating a movie. A layer can be an image, video footage, or an audio file.

Follow these steps:

  1. Go into the IMAGE folder.
  2. Drag the image on to the timeline.
  3. If the image is 1,920 x 1,080, it will fit perfectly and fill up the screen. It will come into the comp centered:
Bringing layers into your composition

Bringing an image into the timeline

Tool panel

Let's go over our tools! The tool panel is where you find all your tools to edit your layers. Here, you can find tools to move your layers and navigate around your composition:

  • Selection Tool (V): Go to the top left side of the screen. This is called the tool bar:
    Tool panel

    Selection Tool

    The arrow icon on the far left is called the Selection Tool.

  • Hand Tool (H): The hand tool is to the right of the arrow tool. This tool lets you move around in your composition:
    Tool panel

    Hand Tool

    Now select the hand tool or use the keyboard shortcut H. You can use the hand tool to move around in your view or navigate around in the comp.

  • Zoom Tool (Z): The zoom tool is next to the hand tool. This tool will magnify your image in the composition. Select the zoom tool, or use the keyboard shortcut Z, and click on the image in the comp a few times:
    Tool panel

    Zoom Tool

  • Rotate Tool (W): The rotate tool is the circular tool next to the zoom tool:
    Tool panel

    Rotate Tool

    Let's explore how to use the rotate tool. The center of the screen where your image is displayed is called the composition window. At the bottom left is an icon called the Magnification ratio popup. Choose fit to 100%. This will zoom out so we can see what's happening:

    Tool panel

    Magnifying

    Select the rotate tool, or use the keyboard shortcut W, and adjust the image:

    Tool panel

    Rotate

    To undo an action, go to the top-left corner and choose Edit | Undo Rotate Object:

    Tool panel

    Undo

  • Pan Behind (Anchor Point) Tool (Y): I'll skip the camera tool for now. Next to the camera tool is the pan behind tool. Use this to move your anchor point. Things animate along the anchor point in After Effects. It's useful to know how to move the anchor point around, as it gives you control over how things animate:
    Tool panel

    Pan behind tool

  • Masking Tool: To the right are our masking tools. The first shape in the list is the rectangle tool. With these masking tools, you can click and drag to create a shape. Click on the triangle icon on the bottom-left of this tool's button. You will find the rounded Rectangle Tool, the Eclipse Tool, and the Star Tool:
    Tool panel

    Masking tool

  • Pen Tool (G): Next to the rectangle tool is the pen tool. It is used to make custom shapes in After Effects.
  • Type tool: To the right of the pen tool is the type tool.
  • Brush tool: The next icon with the brush icon is the brush tool.
  • Stamp tool: The icon with the stamp icon is the clone stamp tool.

We will go over more of these tools later.

Hopefully, you are starting to get used to the interface in After Effects. Poke around and experiment with these tools, to get comfortable with them. A little triangle next to a tool's button means you can access more options for that tool. If a tool is grayed out, just click on your comp and it will become active.

Preview panel

Let's go over the preview panel. This is located in the upper-right corner of your screen:

Preview panel

Preview panel

This preview panel gives you options such as moving through your movie. A project is made up of frames, just like in real video footage. In After Effects, moving within a project is referred to as moving down the timeline. This timeline is represented in units, such as frames, seconds, and minutes. This preview panel allows you to move forward or backward frame by frame. Pressing the play button lets you preview your project. You can also use the ram review, which gives you the ability to watch the project at a faster speed. You can also hit the space bar to preview your animation.

Composition window

At the bottom of the composition window, there are a few options. Let's go over some of them.

The icon in the lower right-hand corner of the composition is where you will find your guide options. These guide options are used to arrange your layers and to create compositionally strong images. However, these guides are not rendered; they are only for preview purposes:

  • Guides: These are used for aligning and arranging layers. To remove guides, choose View | Clear guides.
  • Title/Action Safe: These are video-safe zones, for standard video monitors.
  • Rulers: This is used to drag guides to the composition to align and arrange layers to.
  • Grid: This is a modular grid that helps you organize your layers and create strong compositions:
Composition window

Guides

A little further over to the right is the resolution button. You can reduce the quality down to Quarter. This gives you the ability to look at it and play it back even faster, but at a lower quality:

Composition window

Resolution

Next, we will go over our Effects & Presets panel. The effects panel is a major toolbox full of effects to make your video look amazing! This panel gives you access to hundreds of effects that can help you create animation, correct the color, or fix any number of problems with video or images.

Effects panel

The effects panel is located to the far-right, below the preview panel. A lot of these effects are the same as those used in Photoshop. You may be familiar with Brightness, Contrast, Curves, and so on. Make sure your layer is selected in the timeline, before clicking on an effect.

You can add an effect to a layer by doing the following:

  1. Twirl the category name dow
  2. Click on the effect with the layer selected, or you can type in the name of the effect
  3. Double-click on the effect, while your layer is selected

Let's type the effect (auto levels) into the search bar. Double-click the effect to add to our layer:

Effects panel

Effects & Presets

You can adjust this effects in the effects control panel. This panel is nested right next to your main project panel:

Effects panel

Auto levels

The main difference between these effects and Photoshop is that you can animate them across the timeline, which we will get into in the next sections. You can also add multiple effects to a layer, to create complex visual images.

The project panel

The project panel is where you bring in all your assets. After Effects is often used in post-production. You are usually working from many different asset types. Your project can get very disorganized quickly. This is where you keep all your assets tidy. You will be very happy when your project gets more difficult and you have taken the time to keep things organized. It is easier to find things when you have a tidy project. It also helps you to work faster. The project panel has icons at the bottom of the panel. Choose the one called folder:

The project panel

Creating a new folder

Let's learn how to create folders in our project panel by following these steps to create one:

  1. Click on the folder icon
  2. Name this new comp-main comp

When you bring media into After Effects, be sure to organize all your media into the appropriate folders.

You can create the following folders:

  • MAIN
  • AUDIO
  • PRECOMP
  • Images
  • Footage

You should have five folders. Right-click on the folder to rename them.

The projects in this book will use these five folders. We have created them to organize everything properly.

Importing images

Let's import a large image (at least 1,920 x 1,080) by double-clicking the open area. This brings up your media folders. You can click anywhere in the area where I'm standing in the next screenshot:

Importing images

Project panel

Drag and move this image into the Images folder. You can rename your images by right-clicking on the layer.

After Effect references material. It doesn't actually keep anything in the project; it references things. You should never rename a file outside After Effects. When you import images into a Photoshop document, it saves a copy with the document. However, After Effects links to the assets you import into your project. You should always leave the name unchanged because After Effects will not be able to find the new name for its referencing, and you will receive an error message.

Rather than renaming or removing your files from After Effects, it's better to create a copy or not to move it. If you need to replace a file, you have to right-click on the layer and choose to replace or reload the footage:

Importing images

Replace footage

Practice renaming and relinking your files a couple times, just to make sure you understand that concept.

If you need to delete anything, drag it into the trashcan; this is highlighted in the following screenshot:

Importing images

Trashcan

Preferences – Autosave

Now we will turn our attention to setting Auto-Save... for your projects. It's important to get that set up so your project will automatically save, even if you forget to do this. The following steps will show you how to set up autosave:

  1. Go to Edit | Preferences | Auto-Save....
  2. Set autosave at 20-minute intervals.
  3. You can adjust the maximum number of versions of your project to autosave. The default number is 5:
    Preferences – Autosave

    Autosaving projects

Setting up autosave can save your life. If your project crashes, you will be happy that you have a back-up copy saved in the autosave folder. This is located wherever you save your project.

Creating compositions

After Effects uses compositions to place and arrange your elements. Remember to consider design principles that help create a strong composition when you arrange your elements. In After Effects, these compositions are referred to as comps. I am going to create a comp by hitting the new composition icon. If you look closely at the icon, you will see that it looks like a composition symbol with shapes:

Creating compositions

New composition

Leave all these settings as they are, but make the comp size 1,920 x 1,080, and make the time duration 0;04;00;00. Name the comp MAIN:

Creating compositions

Composition settings

Drag the main comp into the MAIN comp folder:

Creating compositions

Organizing a project

The timelines and the toolbar

Look at the lower-third of the screen. This is called the timeline panel. The timeline is the works space where you create key frames. This is where you make your layers animate across time. You also organize your layer-stacking order. This stacking order is similar to Photoshop. Layers at the top will appear on top of other layers:

The timelines and the toolbar

Timeline panel

After briefly learning about the timeline panel, let's discuss how to bring layers into your composition.

Bringing layers into your composition

Bringing layers into your composition is easy. Layers are the basic building blocks for creating a movie. A layer can be an image, video footage, or an audio file.

Follow these steps:

  1. Go into the IMAGE folder.
  2. Drag the image on to the timeline.
  3. If the image is 1,920 x 1,080, it will fit perfectly and fill up the screen. It will come into the comp centered:
Bringing layers into your composition

Bringing an image into the timeline

Tool panel

Let's go over our tools! The tool panel is where you find all your tools to edit your layers. Here, you can find tools to move your layers and navigate around your composition:

  • Selection Tool (V): Go to the top left side of the screen. This is called the tool bar:
    Tool panel

    Selection Tool

    The arrow icon on the far left is called the Selection Tool.

  • Hand Tool (H): The hand tool is to the right of the arrow tool. This tool lets you move around in your composition:
    Tool panel

    Hand Tool

    Now select the hand tool or use the keyboard shortcut H. You can use the hand tool to move around in your view or navigate around in the comp.

  • Zoom Tool (Z): The zoom tool is next to the hand tool. This tool will magnify your image in the composition. Select the zoom tool, or use the keyboard shortcut Z, and click on the image in the comp a few times:
    Tool panel

    Zoom Tool

  • Rotate Tool (W): The rotate tool is the circular tool next to the zoom tool:
    Tool panel

    Rotate Tool

    Let's explore how to use the rotate tool. The center of the screen where your image is displayed is called the composition window. At the bottom left is an icon called the Magnification ratio popup. Choose fit to 100%. This will zoom out so we can see what's happening:

    Tool panel

    Magnifying

    Select the rotate tool, or use the keyboard shortcut W, and adjust the image:

    Tool panel

    Rotate

    To undo an action, go to the top-left corner and choose Edit | Undo Rotate Object:

    Tool panel

    Undo

  • Pan Behind (Anchor Point) Tool (Y): I'll skip the camera tool for now. Next to the camera tool is the pan behind tool. Use this to move your anchor point. Things animate along the anchor point in After Effects. It's useful to know how to move the anchor point around, as it gives you control over how things animate:
    Tool panel

    Pan behind tool

  • Masking Tool: To the right are our masking tools. The first shape in the list is the rectangle tool. With these masking tools, you can click and drag to create a shape. Click on the triangle icon on the bottom-left of this tool's button. You will find the rounded Rectangle Tool, the Eclipse Tool, and the Star Tool:
    Tool panel

    Masking tool

  • Pen Tool (G): Next to the rectangle tool is the pen tool. It is used to make custom shapes in After Effects.
  • Type tool: To the right of the pen tool is the type tool.
  • Brush tool: The next icon with the brush icon is the brush tool.
  • Stamp tool: The icon with the stamp icon is the clone stamp tool.

We will go over more of these tools later.

Hopefully, you are starting to get used to the interface in After Effects. Poke around and experiment with these tools, to get comfortable with them. A little triangle next to a tool's button means you can access more options for that tool. If a tool is grayed out, just click on your comp and it will become active.

Preview panel

Let's go over the preview panel. This is located in the upper-right corner of your screen:

Preview panel

Preview panel

This preview panel gives you options such as moving through your movie. A project is made up of frames, just like in real video footage. In After Effects, moving within a project is referred to as moving down the timeline. This timeline is represented in units, such as frames, seconds, and minutes. This preview panel allows you to move forward or backward frame by frame. Pressing the play button lets you preview your project. You can also use the ram review, which gives you the ability to watch the project at a faster speed. You can also hit the space bar to preview your animation.

Composition window

At the bottom of the composition window, there are a few options. Let's go over some of them.

The icon in the lower right-hand corner of the composition is where you will find your guide options. These guide options are used to arrange your layers and to create compositionally strong images. However, these guides are not rendered; they are only for preview purposes:

  • Guides: These are used for aligning and arranging layers. To remove guides, choose View | Clear guides.
  • Title/Action Safe: These are video-safe zones, for standard video monitors.
  • Rulers: This is used to drag guides to the composition to align and arrange layers to.
  • Grid: This is a modular grid that helps you organize your layers and create strong compositions:
Composition window

Guides

A little further over to the right is the resolution button. You can reduce the quality down to Quarter. This gives you the ability to look at it and play it back even faster, but at a lower quality:

Composition window

Resolution

Next, we will go over our Effects & Presets panel. The effects panel is a major toolbox full of effects to make your video look amazing! This panel gives you access to hundreds of effects that can help you create animation, correct the color, or fix any number of problems with video or images.

Effects panel

The effects panel is located to the far-right, below the preview panel. A lot of these effects are the same as those used in Photoshop. You may be familiar with Brightness, Contrast, Curves, and so on. Make sure your layer is selected in the timeline, before clicking on an effect.

You can add an effect to a layer by doing the following:

  1. Twirl the category name dow
  2. Click on the effect with the layer selected, or you can type in the name of the effect
  3. Double-click on the effect, while your layer is selected

Let's type the effect (auto levels) into the search bar. Double-click the effect to add to our layer:

Effects panel

Effects & Presets

You can adjust this effects in the effects control panel. This panel is nested right next to your main project panel:

Effects panel

Auto levels

The main difference between these effects and Photoshop is that you can animate them across the timeline, which we will get into in the next sections. You can also add multiple effects to a layer, to create complex visual images.

Importing images

Let's import a large image (at least 1,920 x 1,080) by double-clicking the open area. This brings up your media folders. You can click anywhere in the area where I'm standing in the next screenshot:

Importing images

Project panel

Drag and move this image into the Images folder. You can rename your images by right-clicking on the layer.

After Effect references material. It doesn't actually keep anything in the project; it references things. You should never rename a file outside After Effects. When you import images into a Photoshop document, it saves a copy with the document. However, After Effects links to the assets you import into your project. You should always leave the name unchanged because After Effects will not be able to find the new name for its referencing, and you will receive an error message.

Rather than renaming or removing your files from After Effects, it's better to create a copy or not to move it. If you need to replace a file, you have to right-click on the layer and choose to replace or reload the footage:

Importing images

Replace footage

Practice renaming and relinking your files a couple times, just to make sure you understand that concept.

If you need to delete anything, drag it into the trashcan; this is highlighted in the following screenshot:

Importing images

Trashcan

Preferences – Autosave

Now we will turn our attention to setting Auto-Save... for your projects. It's important to get that set up so your project will automatically save, even if you forget to do this. The following steps will show you how to set up autosave:

  1. Go to Edit | Preferences | Auto-Save....
  2. Set autosave at 20-minute intervals.
  3. You can adjust the maximum number of versions of your project to autosave. The default number is 5:
    Preferences – Autosave

    Autosaving projects

Setting up autosave can save your life. If your project crashes, you will be happy that you have a back-up copy saved in the autosave folder. This is located wherever you save your project.

Creating compositions

After Effects uses compositions to place and arrange your elements. Remember to consider design principles that help create a strong composition when you arrange your elements. In After Effects, these compositions are referred to as comps. I am going to create a comp by hitting the new composition icon. If you look closely at the icon, you will see that it looks like a composition symbol with shapes:

Creating compositions

New composition

Leave all these settings as they are, but make the comp size 1,920 x 1,080, and make the time duration 0;04;00;00. Name the comp MAIN:

Creating compositions

Composition settings

Drag the main comp into the MAIN comp folder:

Creating compositions

Organizing a project

The timelines and the toolbar

Look at the lower-third of the screen. This is called the timeline panel. The timeline is the works space where you create key frames. This is where you make your layers animate across time. You also organize your layer-stacking order. This stacking order is similar to Photoshop. Layers at the top will appear on top of other layers:

The timelines and the toolbar

Timeline panel

After briefly learning about the timeline panel, let's discuss how to bring layers into your composition.

Bringing layers into your composition

Bringing layers into your composition is easy. Layers are the basic building blocks for creating a movie. A layer can be an image, video footage, or an audio file.

Follow these steps:

  1. Go into the IMAGE folder.
  2. Drag the image on to the timeline.
  3. If the image is 1,920 x 1,080, it will fit perfectly and fill up the screen. It will come into the comp centered:
Bringing layers into your composition

Bringing an image into the timeline

Tool panel

Let's go over our tools! The tool panel is where you find all your tools to edit your layers. Here, you can find tools to move your layers and navigate around your composition:

  • Selection Tool (V): Go to the top left side of the screen. This is called the tool bar:
    Tool panel

    Selection Tool

    The arrow icon on the far left is called the Selection Tool.

  • Hand Tool (H): The hand tool is to the right of the arrow tool. This tool lets you move around in your composition:
    Tool panel

    Hand Tool

    Now select the hand tool or use the keyboard shortcut H. You can use the hand tool to move around in your view or navigate around in the comp.

  • Zoom Tool (Z): The zoom tool is next to the hand tool. This tool will magnify your image in the composition. Select the zoom tool, or use the keyboard shortcut Z, and click on the image in the comp a few times:
    Tool panel

    Zoom Tool

  • Rotate Tool (W): The rotate tool is the circular tool next to the zoom tool:
    Tool panel

    Rotate Tool

    Let's explore how to use the rotate tool. The center of the screen where your image is displayed is called the composition window. At the bottom left is an icon called the Magnification ratio popup. Choose fit to 100%. This will zoom out so we can see what's happening:

    Tool panel

    Magnifying

    Select the rotate tool, or use the keyboard shortcut W, and adjust the image:

    Tool panel

    Rotate

    To undo an action, go to the top-left corner and choose Edit | Undo Rotate Object:

    Tool panel

    Undo

  • Pan Behind (Anchor Point) Tool (Y): I'll skip the camera tool for now. Next to the camera tool is the pan behind tool. Use this to move your anchor point. Things animate along the anchor point in After Effects. It's useful to know how to move the anchor point around, as it gives you control over how things animate:
    Tool panel

    Pan behind tool

  • Masking Tool: To the right are our masking tools. The first shape in the list is the rectangle tool. With these masking tools, you can click and drag to create a shape. Click on the triangle icon on the bottom-left of this tool's button. You will find the rounded Rectangle Tool, the Eclipse Tool, and the Star Tool:
    Tool panel

    Masking tool

  • Pen Tool (G): Next to the rectangle tool is the pen tool. It is used to make custom shapes in After Effects.
  • Type tool: To the right of the pen tool is the type tool.
  • Brush tool: The next icon with the brush icon is the brush tool.
  • Stamp tool: The icon with the stamp icon is the clone stamp tool.

We will go over more of these tools later.

Hopefully, you are starting to get used to the interface in After Effects. Poke around and experiment with these tools, to get comfortable with them. A little triangle next to a tool's button means you can access more options for that tool. If a tool is grayed out, just click on your comp and it will become active.

Preview panel

Let's go over the preview panel. This is located in the upper-right corner of your screen:

Preview panel

Preview panel

This preview panel gives you options such as moving through your movie. A project is made up of frames, just like in real video footage. In After Effects, moving within a project is referred to as moving down the timeline. This timeline is represented in units, such as frames, seconds, and minutes. This preview panel allows you to move forward or backward frame by frame. Pressing the play button lets you preview your project. You can also use the ram review, which gives you the ability to watch the project at a faster speed. You can also hit the space bar to preview your animation.

Composition window

At the bottom of the composition window, there are a few options. Let's go over some of them.

The icon in the lower right-hand corner of the composition is where you will find your guide options. These guide options are used to arrange your layers and to create compositionally strong images. However, these guides are not rendered; they are only for preview purposes:

  • Guides: These are used for aligning and arranging layers. To remove guides, choose View | Clear guides.
  • Title/Action Safe: These are video-safe zones, for standard video monitors.
  • Rulers: This is used to drag guides to the composition to align and arrange layers to.
  • Grid: This is a modular grid that helps you organize your layers and create strong compositions:
Composition window

Guides

A little further over to the right is the resolution button. You can reduce the quality down to Quarter. This gives you the ability to look at it and play it back even faster, but at a lower quality:

Composition window

Resolution

Next, we will go over our Effects & Presets panel. The effects panel is a major toolbox full of effects to make your video look amazing! This panel gives you access to hundreds of effects that can help you create animation, correct the color, or fix any number of problems with video or images.

Effects panel

The effects panel is located to the far-right, below the preview panel. A lot of these effects are the same as those used in Photoshop. You may be familiar with Brightness, Contrast, Curves, and so on. Make sure your layer is selected in the timeline, before clicking on an effect.

You can add an effect to a layer by doing the following:

  1. Twirl the category name dow
  2. Click on the effect with the layer selected, or you can type in the name of the effect
  3. Double-click on the effect, while your layer is selected

Let's type the effect (auto levels) into the search bar. Double-click the effect to add to our layer:

Effects panel

Effects & Presets

You can adjust this effects in the effects control panel. This panel is nested right next to your main project panel:

Effects panel

Auto levels

The main difference between these effects and Photoshop is that you can animate them across the timeline, which we will get into in the next sections. You can also add multiple effects to a layer, to create complex visual images.

Preferences – Autosave

Now we will turn our attention to setting Auto-Save... for your projects. It's important to get that set up so your project will automatically save, even if you forget to do this. The following steps will show you how to set up autosave:

  1. Go to Edit | Preferences | Auto-Save....
  2. Set autosave at 20-minute intervals.
  3. You can adjust the maximum number of versions of your project to autosave. The default number is 5:
    Preferences – Autosave

    Autosaving projects

Setting up autosave can save your life. If your project crashes, you will be happy that you have a back-up copy saved in the autosave folder. This is located wherever you save your project.

Creating compositions

After Effects uses compositions to place and arrange your elements. Remember to consider design principles that help create a strong composition when you arrange your elements. In After Effects, these compositions are referred to as comps. I am going to create a comp by hitting the new composition icon. If you look closely at the icon, you will see that it looks like a composition symbol with shapes:

Creating compositions

New composition

Leave all these settings as they are, but make the comp size 1,920 x 1,080, and make the time duration 0;04;00;00. Name the comp MAIN:

Creating compositions

Composition settings

Drag the main comp into the MAIN comp folder:

Creating compositions

Organizing a project

The timelines and the toolbar

Look at the lower-third of the screen. This is called the timeline panel. The timeline is the works space where you create key frames. This is where you make your layers animate across time. You also organize your layer-stacking order. This stacking order is similar to Photoshop. Layers at the top will appear on top of other layers:

The timelines and the toolbar

Timeline panel

After briefly learning about the timeline panel, let's discuss how to bring layers into your composition.

Bringing layers into your composition

Bringing layers into your composition is easy. Layers are the basic building blocks for creating a movie. A layer can be an image, video footage, or an audio file.

Follow these steps:

  1. Go into the IMAGE folder.
  2. Drag the image on to the timeline.
  3. If the image is 1,920 x 1,080, it will fit perfectly and fill up the screen. It will come into the comp centered:
Bringing layers into your composition

Bringing an image into the timeline

Tool panel

Let's go over our tools! The tool panel is where you find all your tools to edit your layers. Here, you can find tools to move your layers and navigate around your composition:

  • Selection Tool (V): Go to the top left side of the screen. This is called the tool bar:
    Tool panel

    Selection Tool

    The arrow icon on the far left is called the Selection Tool.

  • Hand Tool (H): The hand tool is to the right of the arrow tool. This tool lets you move around in your composition:
    Tool panel

    Hand Tool

    Now select the hand tool or use the keyboard shortcut H. You can use the hand tool to move around in your view or navigate around in the comp.

  • Zoom Tool (Z): The zoom tool is next to the hand tool. This tool will magnify your image in the composition. Select the zoom tool, or use the keyboard shortcut Z, and click on the image in the comp a few times:
    Tool panel

    Zoom Tool

  • Rotate Tool (W): The rotate tool is the circular tool next to the zoom tool:
    Tool panel

    Rotate Tool

    Let's explore how to use the rotate tool. The center of the screen where your image is displayed is called the composition window. At the bottom left is an icon called the Magnification ratio popup. Choose fit to 100%. This will zoom out so we can see what's happening:

    Tool panel

    Magnifying

    Select the rotate tool, or use the keyboard shortcut W, and adjust the image:

    Tool panel

    Rotate

    To undo an action, go to the top-left corner and choose Edit | Undo Rotate Object:

    Tool panel

    Undo

  • Pan Behind (Anchor Point) Tool (Y): I'll skip the camera tool for now. Next to the camera tool is the pan behind tool. Use this to move your anchor point. Things animate along the anchor point in After Effects. It's useful to know how to move the anchor point around, as it gives you control over how things animate:
    Tool panel

    Pan behind tool

  • Masking Tool: To the right are our masking tools. The first shape in the list is the rectangle tool. With these masking tools, you can click and drag to create a shape. Click on the triangle icon on the bottom-left of this tool's button. You will find the rounded Rectangle Tool, the Eclipse Tool, and the Star Tool:
    Tool panel

    Masking tool

  • Pen Tool (G): Next to the rectangle tool is the pen tool. It is used to make custom shapes in After Effects.
  • Type tool: To the right of the pen tool is the type tool.
  • Brush tool: The next icon with the brush icon is the brush tool.
  • Stamp tool: The icon with the stamp icon is the clone stamp tool.

We will go over more of these tools later.

Hopefully, you are starting to get used to the interface in After Effects. Poke around and experiment with these tools, to get comfortable with them. A little triangle next to a tool's button means you can access more options for that tool. If a tool is grayed out, just click on your comp and it will become active.

Preview panel

Let's go over the preview panel. This is located in the upper-right corner of your screen:

Preview panel

Preview panel

This preview panel gives you options such as moving through your movie. A project is made up of frames, just like in real video footage. In After Effects, moving within a project is referred to as moving down the timeline. This timeline is represented in units, such as frames, seconds, and minutes. This preview panel allows you to move forward or backward frame by frame. Pressing the play button lets you preview your project. You can also use the ram review, which gives you the ability to watch the project at a faster speed. You can also hit the space bar to preview your animation.

Composition window

At the bottom of the composition window, there are a few options. Let's go over some of them.

The icon in the lower right-hand corner of the composition is where you will find your guide options. These guide options are used to arrange your layers and to create compositionally strong images. However, these guides are not rendered; they are only for preview purposes:

  • Guides: These are used for aligning and arranging layers. To remove guides, choose View | Clear guides.
  • Title/Action Safe: These are video-safe zones, for standard video monitors.
  • Rulers: This is used to drag guides to the composition to align and arrange layers to.
  • Grid: This is a modular grid that helps you organize your layers and create strong compositions:
Composition window

Guides

A little further over to the right is the resolution button. You can reduce the quality down to Quarter. This gives you the ability to look at it and play it back even faster, but at a lower quality:

Composition window

Resolution

Next, we will go over our Effects & Presets panel. The effects panel is a major toolbox full of effects to make your video look amazing! This panel gives you access to hundreds of effects that can help you create animation, correct the color, or fix any number of problems with video or images.

Effects panel

The effects panel is located to the far-right, below the preview panel. A lot of these effects are the same as those used in Photoshop. You may be familiar with Brightness, Contrast, Curves, and so on. Make sure your layer is selected in the timeline, before clicking on an effect.

You can add an effect to a layer by doing the following:

  1. Twirl the category name dow
  2. Click on the effect with the layer selected, or you can type in the name of the effect
  3. Double-click on the effect, while your layer is selected

Let's type the effect (auto levels) into the search bar. Double-click the effect to add to our layer:

Effects panel

Effects & Presets

You can adjust this effects in the effects control panel. This panel is nested right next to your main project panel:

Effects panel

Auto levels

The main difference between these effects and Photoshop is that you can animate them across the timeline, which we will get into in the next sections. You can also add multiple effects to a layer, to create complex visual images.

Creating compositions

After Effects uses compositions to place and arrange your elements. Remember to consider design principles that help create a strong composition when you arrange your elements. In After Effects, these compositions are referred to as comps. I am going to create a comp by hitting the new composition icon. If you look closely at the icon, you will see that it looks like a composition symbol with shapes:

Creating compositions

New composition

Leave all these settings as they are, but make the comp size 1,920 x 1,080, and make the time duration 0;04;00;00. Name the comp MAIN:

Creating compositions

Composition settings

Drag the main comp into the MAIN comp folder:

Creating compositions

Organizing a project

The timelines and the toolbar

Look at the lower-third of the screen. This is called the timeline panel. The timeline is the works space where you create key frames. This is where you make your layers animate across time. You also organize your layer-stacking order. This stacking order is similar to Photoshop. Layers at the top will appear on top of other layers:

The timelines and the toolbar

Timeline panel

After briefly learning about the timeline panel, let's discuss how to bring layers into your composition.

Bringing layers into your composition

Bringing layers into your composition is easy. Layers are the basic building blocks for creating a movie. A layer can be an image, video footage, or an audio file.

Follow these steps:

  1. Go into the IMAGE folder.
  2. Drag the image on to the timeline.
  3. If the image is 1,920 x 1,080, it will fit perfectly and fill up the screen. It will come into the comp centered:
Bringing layers into your composition

Bringing an image into the timeline

Tool panel

Let's go over our tools! The tool panel is where you find all your tools to edit your layers. Here, you can find tools to move your layers and navigate around your composition:

  • Selection Tool (V): Go to the top left side of the screen. This is called the tool bar:
    Tool panel

    Selection Tool

    The arrow icon on the far left is called the Selection Tool.

  • Hand Tool (H): The hand tool is to the right of the arrow tool. This tool lets you move around in your composition:
    Tool panel

    Hand Tool

    Now select the hand tool or use the keyboard shortcut H. You can use the hand tool to move around in your view or navigate around in the comp.

  • Zoom Tool (Z): The zoom tool is next to the hand tool. This tool will magnify your image in the composition. Select the zoom tool, or use the keyboard shortcut Z, and click on the image in the comp a few times:
    Tool panel

    Zoom Tool

  • Rotate Tool (W): The rotate tool is the circular tool next to the zoom tool:
    Tool panel

    Rotate Tool

    Let's explore how to use the rotate tool. The center of the screen where your image is displayed is called the composition window. At the bottom left is an icon called the Magnification ratio popup. Choose fit to 100%. This will zoom out so we can see what's happening:

    Tool panel

    Magnifying

    Select the rotate tool, or use the keyboard shortcut W, and adjust the image:

    Tool panel

    Rotate

    To undo an action, go to the top-left corner and choose Edit | Undo Rotate Object:

    Tool panel

    Undo

  • Pan Behind (Anchor Point) Tool (Y): I'll skip the camera tool for now. Next to the camera tool is the pan behind tool. Use this to move your anchor point. Things animate along the anchor point in After Effects. It's useful to know how to move the anchor point around, as it gives you control over how things animate:
    Tool panel

    Pan behind tool

  • Masking Tool: To the right are our masking tools. The first shape in the list is the rectangle tool. With these masking tools, you can click and drag to create a shape. Click on the triangle icon on the bottom-left of this tool's button. You will find the rounded Rectangle Tool, the Eclipse Tool, and the Star Tool:
    Tool panel

    Masking tool

  • Pen Tool (G): Next to the rectangle tool is the pen tool. It is used to make custom shapes in After Effects.
  • Type tool: To the right of the pen tool is the type tool.
  • Brush tool: The next icon with the brush icon is the brush tool.
  • Stamp tool: The icon with the stamp icon is the clone stamp tool.

We will go over more of these tools later.

Hopefully, you are starting to get used to the interface in After Effects. Poke around and experiment with these tools, to get comfortable with them. A little triangle next to a tool's button means you can access more options for that tool. If a tool is grayed out, just click on your comp and it will become active.

Preview panel

Let's go over the preview panel. This is located in the upper-right corner of your screen:

Preview panel

Preview panel

This preview panel gives you options such as moving through your movie. A project is made up of frames, just like in real video footage. In After Effects, moving within a project is referred to as moving down the timeline. This timeline is represented in units, such as frames, seconds, and minutes. This preview panel allows you to move forward or backward frame by frame. Pressing the play button lets you preview your project. You can also use the ram review, which gives you the ability to watch the project at a faster speed. You can also hit the space bar to preview your animation.

Composition window

At the bottom of the composition window, there are a few options. Let's go over some of them.

The icon in the lower right-hand corner of the composition is where you will find your guide options. These guide options are used to arrange your layers and to create compositionally strong images. However, these guides are not rendered; they are only for preview purposes:

  • Guides: These are used for aligning and arranging layers. To remove guides, choose View | Clear guides.
  • Title/Action Safe: These are video-safe zones, for standard video monitors.
  • Rulers: This is used to drag guides to the composition to align and arrange layers to.
  • Grid: This is a modular grid that helps you organize your layers and create strong compositions:
Composition window

Guides

A little further over to the right is the resolution button. You can reduce the quality down to Quarter. This gives you the ability to look at it and play it back even faster, but at a lower quality:

Composition window

Resolution

Next, we will go over our Effects & Presets panel. The effects panel is a major toolbox full of effects to make your video look amazing! This panel gives you access to hundreds of effects that can help you create animation, correct the color, or fix any number of problems with video or images.

Effects panel

The effects panel is located to the far-right, below the preview panel. A lot of these effects are the same as those used in Photoshop. You may be familiar with Brightness, Contrast, Curves, and so on. Make sure your layer is selected in the timeline, before clicking on an effect.

You can add an effect to a layer by doing the following:

  1. Twirl the category name dow
  2. Click on the effect with the layer selected, or you can type in the name of the effect
  3. Double-click on the effect, while your layer is selected

Let's type the effect (auto levels) into the search bar. Double-click the effect to add to our layer:

Effects panel

Effects & Presets

You can adjust this effects in the effects control panel. This panel is nested right next to your main project panel:

Effects panel

Auto levels

The main difference between these effects and Photoshop is that you can animate them across the timeline, which we will get into in the next sections. You can also add multiple effects to a layer, to create complex visual images.

The timelines and the toolbar

Look at the lower-third of the screen. This is called the timeline panel. The timeline is the works space where you create key frames. This is where you make your layers animate across time. You also organize your layer-stacking order. This stacking order is similar to Photoshop. Layers at the top will appear on top of other layers:

The timelines and the toolbar

Timeline panel

After briefly learning about the timeline panel, let's discuss how to bring layers into your composition.

Bringing layers into your composition

Bringing layers into your composition is easy. Layers are the basic building blocks for creating a movie. A layer can be an image, video footage, or an audio file.

Follow these steps:

  1. Go into the IMAGE folder.
  2. Drag the image on to the timeline.
  3. If the image is 1,920 x 1,080, it will fit perfectly and fill up the screen. It will come into the comp centered:
Bringing layers into your composition

Bringing an image into the timeline

Tool panel

Let's go over our tools! The tool panel is where you find all your tools to edit your layers. Here, you can find tools to move your layers and navigate around your composition:

  • Selection Tool (V): Go to the top left side of the screen. This is called the tool bar:
    Tool panel

    Selection Tool

    The arrow icon on the far left is called the Selection Tool.

  • Hand Tool (H): The hand tool is to the right of the arrow tool. This tool lets you move around in your composition:
    Tool panel

    Hand Tool

    Now select the hand tool or use the keyboard shortcut H. You can use the hand tool to move around in your view or navigate around in the comp.

  • Zoom Tool (Z): The zoom tool is next to the hand tool. This tool will magnify your image in the composition. Select the zoom tool, or use the keyboard shortcut Z, and click on the image in the comp a few times:
    Tool panel

    Zoom Tool

  • Rotate Tool (W): The rotate tool is the circular tool next to the zoom tool:
    Tool panel

    Rotate Tool

    Let's explore how to use the rotate tool. The center of the screen where your image is displayed is called the composition window. At the bottom left is an icon called the Magnification ratio popup. Choose fit to 100%. This will zoom out so we can see what's happening:

    Tool panel

    Magnifying

    Select the rotate tool, or use the keyboard shortcut W, and adjust the image:

    Tool panel

    Rotate

    To undo an action, go to the top-left corner and choose Edit | Undo Rotate Object:

    Tool panel

    Undo

  • Pan Behind (Anchor Point) Tool (Y): I'll skip the camera tool for now. Next to the camera tool is the pan behind tool. Use this to move your anchor point. Things animate along the anchor point in After Effects. It's useful to know how to move the anchor point around, as it gives you control over how things animate:
    Tool panel

    Pan behind tool

  • Masking Tool: To the right are our masking tools. The first shape in the list is the rectangle tool. With these masking tools, you can click and drag to create a shape. Click on the triangle icon on the bottom-left of this tool's button. You will find the rounded Rectangle Tool, the Eclipse Tool, and the Star Tool:
    Tool panel

    Masking tool

  • Pen Tool (G): Next to the rectangle tool is the pen tool. It is used to make custom shapes in After Effects.
  • Type tool: To the right of the pen tool is the type tool.
  • Brush tool: The next icon with the brush icon is the brush tool.
  • Stamp tool: The icon with the stamp icon is the clone stamp tool.

We will go over more of these tools later.

Hopefully, you are starting to get used to the interface in After Effects. Poke around and experiment with these tools, to get comfortable with them. A little triangle next to a tool's button means you can access more options for that tool. If a tool is grayed out, just click on your comp and it will become active.

Preview panel

Let's go over the preview panel. This is located in the upper-right corner of your screen:

Preview panel

Preview panel

This preview panel gives you options such as moving through your movie. A project is made up of frames, just like in real video footage. In After Effects, moving within a project is referred to as moving down the timeline. This timeline is represented in units, such as frames, seconds, and minutes. This preview panel allows you to move forward or backward frame by frame. Pressing the play button lets you preview your project. You can also use the ram review, which gives you the ability to watch the project at a faster speed. You can also hit the space bar to preview your animation.

Composition window

At the bottom of the composition window, there are a few options. Let's go over some of them.

The icon in the lower right-hand corner of the composition is where you will find your guide options. These guide options are used to arrange your layers and to create compositionally strong images. However, these guides are not rendered; they are only for preview purposes:

  • Guides: These are used for aligning and arranging layers. To remove guides, choose View | Clear guides.
  • Title/Action Safe: These are video-safe zones, for standard video monitors.
  • Rulers: This is used to drag guides to the composition to align and arrange layers to.
  • Grid: This is a modular grid that helps you organize your layers and create strong compositions:
Composition window

Guides

A little further over to the right is the resolution button. You can reduce the quality down to Quarter. This gives you the ability to look at it and play it back even faster, but at a lower quality:

Composition window

Resolution

Next, we will go over our Effects & Presets panel. The effects panel is a major toolbox full of effects to make your video look amazing! This panel gives you access to hundreds of effects that can help you create animation, correct the color, or fix any number of problems with video or images.

Effects panel

The effects panel is located to the far-right, below the preview panel. A lot of these effects are the same as those used in Photoshop. You may be familiar with Brightness, Contrast, Curves, and so on. Make sure your layer is selected in the timeline, before clicking on an effect.

You can add an effect to a layer by doing the following:

  1. Twirl the category name dow
  2. Click on the effect with the layer selected, or you can type in the name of the effect
  3. Double-click on the effect, while your layer is selected

Let's type the effect (auto levels) into the search bar. Double-click the effect to add to our layer:

Effects panel

Effects & Presets

You can adjust this effects in the effects control panel. This panel is nested right next to your main project panel:

Effects panel

Auto levels

The main difference between these effects and Photoshop is that you can animate them across the timeline, which we will get into in the next sections. You can also add multiple effects to a layer, to create complex visual images.

Bringing layers into your composition

Bringing layers into your composition is easy. Layers are the basic building blocks for creating a movie. A layer can be an image, video footage, or an audio file.

Follow these steps:

  1. Go into the IMAGE folder.
  2. Drag the image on to the timeline.
  3. If the image is 1,920 x 1,080, it will fit perfectly and fill up the screen. It will come into the comp centered:
Bringing layers into your composition

Bringing an image into the timeline

Tool panel

Let's go over our tools! The tool panel is where you find all your tools to edit your layers. Here, you can find tools to move your layers and navigate around your composition:

  • Selection Tool (V): Go to the top left side of the screen. This is called the tool bar:
    Tool panel

    Selection Tool

    The arrow icon on the far left is called the Selection Tool.

  • Hand Tool (H): The hand tool is to the right of the arrow tool. This tool lets you move around in your composition:
    Tool panel

    Hand Tool

    Now select the hand tool or use the keyboard shortcut H. You can use the hand tool to move around in your view or navigate around in the comp.

  • Zoom Tool (Z): The zoom tool is next to the hand tool. This tool will magnify your image in the composition. Select the zoom tool, or use the keyboard shortcut Z, and click on the image in the comp a few times:
    Tool panel

    Zoom Tool

  • Rotate Tool (W): The rotate tool is the circular tool next to the zoom tool:
    Tool panel

    Rotate Tool

    Let's explore how to use the rotate tool. The center of the screen where your image is displayed is called the composition window. At the bottom left is an icon called the Magnification ratio popup. Choose fit to 100%. This will zoom out so we can see what's happening:

    Tool panel

    Magnifying

    Select the rotate tool, or use the keyboard shortcut W, and adjust the image:

    Tool panel

    Rotate

    To undo an action, go to the top-left corner and choose Edit | Undo Rotate Object:

    Tool panel

    Undo

  • Pan Behind (Anchor Point) Tool (Y): I'll skip the camera tool for now. Next to the camera tool is the pan behind tool. Use this to move your anchor point. Things animate along the anchor point in After Effects. It's useful to know how to move the anchor point around, as it gives you control over how things animate:
    Tool panel

    Pan behind tool

  • Masking Tool: To the right are our masking tools. The first shape in the list is the rectangle tool. With these masking tools, you can click and drag to create a shape. Click on the triangle icon on the bottom-left of this tool's button. You will find the rounded Rectangle Tool, the Eclipse Tool, and the Star Tool:
    Tool panel

    Masking tool

  • Pen Tool (G): Next to the rectangle tool is the pen tool. It is used to make custom shapes in After Effects.
  • Type tool: To the right of the pen tool is the type tool.
  • Brush tool: The next icon with the brush icon is the brush tool.
  • Stamp tool: The icon with the stamp icon is the clone stamp tool.

We will go over more of these tools later.

Hopefully, you are starting to get used to the interface in After Effects. Poke around and experiment with these tools, to get comfortable with them. A little triangle next to a tool's button means you can access more options for that tool. If a tool is grayed out, just click on your comp and it will become active.

Preview panel

Let's go over the preview panel. This is located in the upper-right corner of your screen:

Preview panel

Preview panel

This preview panel gives you options such as moving through your movie. A project is made up of frames, just like in real video footage. In After Effects, moving within a project is referred to as moving down the timeline. This timeline is represented in units, such as frames, seconds, and minutes. This preview panel allows you to move forward or backward frame by frame. Pressing the play button lets you preview your project. You can also use the ram review, which gives you the ability to watch the project at a faster speed. You can also hit the space bar to preview your animation.

Composition window

At the bottom of the composition window, there are a few options. Let's go over some of them.

The icon in the lower right-hand corner of the composition is where you will find your guide options. These guide options are used to arrange your layers and to create compositionally strong images. However, these guides are not rendered; they are only for preview purposes:

  • Guides: These are used for aligning and arranging layers. To remove guides, choose View | Clear guides.
  • Title/Action Safe: These are video-safe zones, for standard video monitors.
  • Rulers: This is used to drag guides to the composition to align and arrange layers to.
  • Grid: This is a modular grid that helps you organize your layers and create strong compositions:
Composition window

Guides

A little further over to the right is the resolution button. You can reduce the quality down to Quarter. This gives you the ability to look at it and play it back even faster, but at a lower quality:

Composition window

Resolution

Next, we will go over our Effects & Presets panel. The effects panel is a major toolbox full of effects to make your video look amazing! This panel gives you access to hundreds of effects that can help you create animation, correct the color, or fix any number of problems with video or images.

Effects panel

The effects panel is located to the far-right, below the preview panel. A lot of these effects are the same as those used in Photoshop. You may be familiar with Brightness, Contrast, Curves, and so on. Make sure your layer is selected in the timeline, before clicking on an effect.

You can add an effect to a layer by doing the following:

  1. Twirl the category name dow
  2. Click on the effect with the layer selected, or you can type in the name of the effect
  3. Double-click on the effect, while your layer is selected

Let's type the effect (auto levels) into the search bar. Double-click the effect to add to our layer:

Effects panel

Effects & Presets

You can adjust this effects in the effects control panel. This panel is nested right next to your main project panel:

Effects panel

Auto levels

The main difference between these effects and Photoshop is that you can animate them across the timeline, which we will get into in the next sections. You can also add multiple effects to a layer, to create complex visual images.

Tool panel

Let's go over our tools! The tool panel is where you find all your tools to edit your layers. Here, you can find tools to move your layers and navigate around your composition:

  • Selection Tool (V): Go to the top left side of the screen. This is called the tool bar:
    Tool panel

    Selection Tool

    The arrow icon on the far left is called the Selection Tool.

  • Hand Tool (H): The hand tool is to the right of the arrow tool. This tool lets you move around in your composition:
    Tool panel

    Hand Tool

    Now select the hand tool or use the keyboard shortcut H. You can use the hand tool to move around in your view or navigate around in the comp.

  • Zoom Tool (Z): The zoom tool is next to the hand tool. This tool will magnify your image in the composition. Select the zoom tool, or use the keyboard shortcut Z, and click on the image in the comp a few times:
    Tool panel

    Zoom Tool

  • Rotate Tool (W): The rotate tool is the circular tool next to the zoom tool:
    Tool panel

    Rotate Tool

    Let's explore how to use the rotate tool. The center of the screen where your image is displayed is called the composition window. At the bottom left is an icon called the Magnification ratio popup. Choose fit to 100%. This will zoom out so we can see what's happening:

    Tool panel

    Magnifying

    Select the rotate tool, or use the keyboard shortcut W, and adjust the image:

    Tool panel

    Rotate

    To undo an action, go to the top-left corner and choose Edit | Undo Rotate Object:

    Tool panel

    Undo

  • Pan Behind (Anchor Point) Tool (Y): I'll skip the camera tool for now. Next to the camera tool is the pan behind tool. Use this to move your anchor point. Things animate along the anchor point in After Effects. It's useful to know how to move the anchor point around, as it gives you control over how things animate:
    Tool panel

    Pan behind tool

  • Masking Tool: To the right are our masking tools. The first shape in the list is the rectangle tool. With these masking tools, you can click and drag to create a shape. Click on the triangle icon on the bottom-left of this tool's button. You will find the rounded Rectangle Tool, the Eclipse Tool, and the Star Tool:
    Tool panel

    Masking tool

  • Pen Tool (G): Next to the rectangle tool is the pen tool. It is used to make custom shapes in After Effects.
  • Type tool: To the right of the pen tool is the type tool.
  • Brush tool: The next icon with the brush icon is the brush tool.
  • Stamp tool: The icon with the stamp icon is the clone stamp tool.

We will go over more of these tools later.

Hopefully, you are starting to get used to the interface in After Effects. Poke around and experiment with these tools, to get comfortable with them. A little triangle next to a tool's button means you can access more options for that tool. If a tool is grayed out, just click on your comp and it will become active.

Preview panel

Let's go over the preview panel. This is located in the upper-right corner of your screen:

Preview panel

Preview panel

This preview panel gives you options such as moving through your movie. A project is made up of frames, just like in real video footage. In After Effects, moving within a project is referred to as moving down the timeline. This timeline is represented in units, such as frames, seconds, and minutes. This preview panel allows you to move forward or backward frame by frame. Pressing the play button lets you preview your project. You can also use the ram review, which gives you the ability to watch the project at a faster speed. You can also hit the space bar to preview your animation.

Composition window

At the bottom of the composition window, there are a few options. Let's go over some of them.

The icon in the lower right-hand corner of the composition is where you will find your guide options. These guide options are used to arrange your layers and to create compositionally strong images. However, these guides are not rendered; they are only for preview purposes:

  • Guides: These are used for aligning and arranging layers. To remove guides, choose View | Clear guides.
  • Title/Action Safe: These are video-safe zones, for standard video monitors.
  • Rulers: This is used to drag guides to the composition to align and arrange layers to.
  • Grid: This is a modular grid that helps you organize your layers and create strong compositions:
Composition window

Guides

A little further over to the right is the resolution button. You can reduce the quality down to Quarter. This gives you the ability to look at it and play it back even faster, but at a lower quality:

Composition window

Resolution

Next, we will go over our Effects & Presets panel. The effects panel is a major toolbox full of effects to make your video look amazing! This panel gives you access to hundreds of effects that can help you create animation, correct the color, or fix any number of problems with video or images.

Effects panel

The effects panel is located to the far-right, below the preview panel. A lot of these effects are the same as those used in Photoshop. You may be familiar with Brightness, Contrast, Curves, and so on. Make sure your layer is selected in the timeline, before clicking on an effect.

You can add an effect to a layer by doing the following:

  1. Twirl the category name dow
  2. Click on the effect with the layer selected, or you can type in the name of the effect
  3. Double-click on the effect, while your layer is selected

Let's type the effect (auto levels) into the search bar. Double-click the effect to add to our layer:

Effects panel

Effects & Presets

You can adjust this effects in the effects control panel. This panel is nested right next to your main project panel:

Effects panel

Auto levels

The main difference between these effects and Photoshop is that you can animate them across the timeline, which we will get into in the next sections. You can also add multiple effects to a layer, to create complex visual images.

Preview panel

Let's go over the preview panel. This is located in the upper-right corner of your screen:

Preview panel

Preview panel

This preview panel gives you options such as moving through your movie. A project is made up of frames, just like in real video footage. In After Effects, moving within a project is referred to as moving down the timeline. This timeline is represented in units, such as frames, seconds, and minutes. This preview panel allows you to move forward or backward frame by frame. Pressing the play button lets you preview your project. You can also use the ram review, which gives you the ability to watch the project at a faster speed. You can also hit the space bar to preview your animation.

Composition window

At the bottom of the composition window, there are a few options. Let's go over some of them.

The icon in the lower right-hand corner of the composition is where you will find your guide options. These guide options are used to arrange your layers and to create compositionally strong images. However, these guides are not rendered; they are only for preview purposes:

  • Guides: These are used for aligning and arranging layers. To remove guides, choose View | Clear guides.
  • Title/Action Safe: These are video-safe zones, for standard video monitors.
  • Rulers: This is used to drag guides to the composition to align and arrange layers to.
  • Grid: This is a modular grid that helps you organize your layers and create strong compositions:
Composition window

Guides

A little further over to the right is the resolution button. You can reduce the quality down to Quarter. This gives you the ability to look at it and play it back even faster, but at a lower quality:

Composition window

Resolution

Next, we will go over our Effects & Presets panel. The effects panel is a major toolbox full of effects to make your video look amazing! This panel gives you access to hundreds of effects that can help you create animation, correct the color, or fix any number of problems with video or images.

Effects panel

The effects panel is located to the far-right, below the preview panel. A lot of these effects are the same as those used in Photoshop. You may be familiar with Brightness, Contrast, Curves, and so on. Make sure your layer is selected in the timeline, before clicking on an effect.

You can add an effect to a layer by doing the following:

  1. Twirl the category name dow
  2. Click on the effect with the layer selected, or you can type in the name of the effect
  3. Double-click on the effect, while your layer is selected

Let's type the effect (auto levels) into the search bar. Double-click the effect to add to our layer:

Effects panel

Effects & Presets

You can adjust this effects in the effects control panel. This panel is nested right next to your main project panel:

Effects panel

Auto levels

The main difference between these effects and Photoshop is that you can animate them across the timeline, which we will get into in the next sections. You can also add multiple effects to a layer, to create complex visual images.

Composition window

At the bottom of the composition window, there are a few options. Let's go over some of them.

The icon in the lower right-hand corner of the composition is where you will find your guide options. These guide options are used to arrange your layers and to create compositionally strong images. However, these guides are not rendered; they are only for preview purposes:

  • Guides: These are used for aligning and arranging layers. To remove guides, choose View | Clear guides.
  • Title/Action Safe: These are video-safe zones, for standard video monitors.
  • Rulers: This is used to drag guides to the composition to align and arrange layers to.
  • Grid: This is a modular grid that helps you organize your layers and create strong compositions:
Composition window

Guides

A little further over to the right is the resolution button. You can reduce the quality down to Quarter. This gives you the ability to look at it and play it back even faster, but at a lower quality:

Composition window

Resolution

Next, we will go over our Effects & Presets panel. The effects panel is a major toolbox full of effects to make your video look amazing! This panel gives you access to hundreds of effects that can help you create animation, correct the color, or fix any number of problems with video or images.

Effects panel

The effects panel is located to the far-right, below the preview panel. A lot of these effects are the same as those used in Photoshop. You may be familiar with Brightness, Contrast, Curves, and so on. Make sure your layer is selected in the timeline, before clicking on an effect.

You can add an effect to a layer by doing the following:

  1. Twirl the category name dow
  2. Click on the effect with the layer selected, or you can type in the name of the effect
  3. Double-click on the effect, while your layer is selected

Let's type the effect (auto levels) into the search bar. Double-click the effect to add to our layer:

Effects panel

Effects & Presets

You can adjust this effects in the effects control panel. This panel is nested right next to your main project panel:

Effects panel

Auto levels

The main difference between these effects and Photoshop is that you can animate them across the timeline, which we will get into in the next sections. You can also add multiple effects to a layer, to create complex visual images.

Effects panel

The effects panel is located to the far-right, below the preview panel. A lot of these effects are the same as those used in Photoshop. You may be familiar with Brightness, Contrast, Curves, and so on. Make sure your layer is selected in the timeline, before clicking on an effect.

You can add an effect to a layer by doing the following:

  1. Twirl the category name dow
  2. Click on the effect with the layer selected, or you can type in the name of the effect
  3. Double-click on the effect, while your layer is selected

Let's type the effect (auto levels) into the search bar. Double-click the effect to add to our layer:

Effects panel

Effects & Presets

You can adjust this effects in the effects control panel. This panel is nested right next to your main project panel:

Effects panel

Auto levels

The main difference between these effects and Photoshop is that you can animate them across the timeline, which we will get into in the next sections. You can also add multiple effects to a layer, to create complex visual images.

Introducing layer properties

Duplicating layers is an essential tool that you need to master very quickly. This is helpful because you can reuse layers in your project:

  1. Select your layer.
  2. You can either hit Ctrl + D/command + D on Windows or macOS, respectively, or just choose Edit | Duplicate from the menu:
    Introducing layer properties

    Duplicating an image

When you follow this process, your layer is duplicated. This duplicated layer is an exact copy of the layer. Look closely at your layer and find the triangle to the far right. Click on this triangle. This is called twirling down:

Introducing layer properties

Twirling down properties

Twirling down your layer will reveal the Transform properties. Twirl down the triangle icon to the left of the word Transform. You will see the Transform properties: Scale, Rotation, Opacity, and Position. All of these have shortcuts.

Here are the shortcuts for your layer transform properties:

  • The shortcut for the scale is S
  • The shortcut for rotation is R
  • For opacity, the shortcut is T
  • For position, the shortcut is.. yep, you guessed it, P

These shortcuts are easy to remember. The only shortcut that's not self-explanatory is T for opacity. An easy way to remember that is to think of T for transparency, or that T is the last syllable of opacity (opaci-T):

Introducing layer properties

Transform properties

To select anything in After Effects, you need to have the selection tool selected. Navigate to that tool in the upper left-hand corner of your screen in the tool bar. Choose the top layer of the timeline:

Introducing layer properties

Selecting the top layer

With this layer selected, we are going to select our scale property. To use the shortcut, simply hit the letter S. You will see that this reveals the scale property only. Let's adjust the scale parameter. To the far right of the word scale, you will see two numbers. Scrub either one of those parameters to the left. This will shrink this layer down in size:

Introducing layer properties

Scaling down the image

As you can see, this layer scales down in the center of the screen.

Layer panel

Now I will talk to you about our layers and our timeline. It's very important to know your way around this part of the interface. This layer panel is how you control the way your images move. This is where you can see, at a glance, what's going on in your movie. This panel is similar to Photoshop's layer panel. Each one of these icons to the right of the layer has an important function. If you hover your selection arrow over any of these icons, a description will appear on the screen:

Layer panel

Layer panel

Let's take a closer look some of the buttons and switches of the layer panel:

  1. The animation stopwatch
  2. The shy button
  3. The continuously rasterized button
  4. The visual effects button
  5. Motion blur
  6. The 3D button
  7. The hide switch
  8. The audio switch
  9. The solo button
  10. The lock switch
  11. The parenting pick whip
  12. The shy switch
  13. Motion blur
  14. Graph editor
  15. Current time editor
  16. The zoom-in timeline
  17. Workspace

Looking at all these buttons and switches can be overwhelming. Let's look at handful of switches that you will find helpful for organizing your layers:

  • #7 The eyeball switch: This is to the far right of your layer. Turning off the eyeball next to the layer determines whether that layer is seen.
  • #9 The solo switch: The circle icon to the far right of your layer is called the solo switch. The solo switch will isolate a layer that has that solo turned on.
  • #10 The lock switch: This is for locking your layers.
  • #12 The shy switch: If this is turned on in both of these locations, you will not see that layer.
  • #13 The motion blur switch: This also needs to be activated in both of these locations (#5 and #13); this will enable motion blur.

The footage panel

The footage panel is used for previewing your footage. There are also some tools that work only in the footage panel.

To access the footage panel, double-click on the layer. However, this panel is often accessed by accident. It's accessed when double-clicking on a layer. You can tell you're in this panel when you see the white bar at the bottom. There are specific things you can do in this layer, but we usually don't need to be in this panel. Here is a screenshot of the footage panel:

The footage panel

Footage panel

You will find this is a mistake that happens frequently. To get out of this panel, go to the top of that panel and choose the name of your main comp. Or you can reset the workspace area back to the saved layout:

The footage panel

Resetting layout

Resetting this will not change anything in your project. It simply restores your workspace area to the default standard layout.

The timeline panel

Let's talk about time. The timeline panel is one of the main things that differentiates After Effects from Photoshop. Unlike Photoshop, After Effects has the ability to make things happen across time. Another big difference between After Effects and Photoshop is 3D space. You can create compositions with 3D depth. After Effect movies are comprised of frames, just like real films.

The timeline lifespan

Think of the timeline like a lifespan. The beginning is the timeline's birth and at the end of your work area, that's considered the death or the end of the lifespan.

Zooming into the timeline

You can zoom into any point of the timeline with the button at the lower-center of the timeline. Or you can zoom into your timeline by moving the slider. If you look closely, you can you can see (F), which stands for frames:

Zooming into the timeline

Zooming into the slider

The timeline is measured with time codes. The F next to the numbers on the timeline stands for frames.

Navigating in the timeline

The timeline is always moving from left to right:

  • Use the Page Up key as a shortcut to navigate forward in the timeline, frame by frame, and Page Down to navigate backward in the timeline, frame by frame.
  • A shortcut for moving down one frame in the timeline is Page Down or Ctrl + the right arrow (on a PC) or Page Down or command + the right arrow (on macOS). You can also use the arrows in the preview panel:
    Navigating in the timeline

    Preview panel

The f on the timeline stands for frames; the numbers represent the number of frames:

Navigating in the timeline

Frames

Go to the beginning of the timeline. The shortcut is for this is pressing the home button on the numeric keypad.

Current time indicator

This guitar pick-shaped object highlighted in the following screenshot is called the current time indicator icon. Moving this time indicator is another way to navigate through the timeline:

Current time indicator

Current time indicator

The workspace area

The timeline is the entire length of your composition. Your workspace area is the length of your movie. This is also called the rendering area. When I hit the play button for previewing my movie, it happens within that space. This can be trimmed and edited. To trim your workspace area, perform the following steps:

  1. Move your time indicator to the desired spot on the timeline
  2. Press the letter N to activate the shortcut to trim the work area

There is usually more than one way to do something in After Effects. To manually trim your workspace, perform the following steps:

  1. Move your mouse to the beginning the timeline and hover over the blue bar. This is the start of your workspace area.
  2. Drag this bar to the right, to trim your work area.

You can drag either the start or the end or the workspace area. Trimming this shortens the duration of the comp. This is useful for previewing your movie or previewing a small section of your movie. Remember when you export or render your movie, this workspace needs to be trimmed, to reflect exactly what you want exported. The duration of the workspace is the only thing that will be exported or rendered:

The workspace area

Trimming the workspace area

Trimming layers

You can edit the duration of your layers by trimming them. Trimming your layers will give you control when your layers appear in your movie:

Trimming layers

Trimming layers

To trim your layer, perform the following steps:

  1. Move your time indicator to the desired spot on the timeline
  2. Press Alt + [ or Option + [ on macOS to activate the shortcut to trim your layer

To manually trim your layer, perform the following steps:

  1. Move your time indicator to the desired spot on the timeline.
  2. Bring your selection tool to the very beginning of the layer and hover over the start of the layer. You will see the trim layer icon represented by two arrows. (You must see this or your dragging you're layers, which is different to trimming them.) Use this to drag and trim your layer.

You can trim any type of layer using the preceding methods. This layer will be trimmed exactly where the time indicator is. Move your time indicator back and forth in the timeline across this trimmed layer. See how the layer appears where the image is trimmed to? This is how layers can appear across time.

Creating composition markers on your timeline

You can further organize your timeline by adding information to the timeline. You can also create markers, notes, and metadata on your timeline. These markers can also be used to align layers to a point in the timeline. The following are the steps for creating a composition marker:

  1. Hit Shift and a number.
  2. Double-click that number to enter a note:
Creating composition markers on your timeline

Composition markers

These markers and notes can be particularly helpful when organizing your project and writing notes from clients and team members.

Animating a property

Animating a property is essentially marking a parameter in time and adjusting that property further down the timeline. We create animation by creating at least two key frames. The steps to animate a property are simple. But you need to be sure you follow these steps each time. When you want to animate any property, you need to perform the following steps:

  1. First hit the stopwatch, which will automatically create a key frame for you.
  2. Move down the timeline, and change the Transform property to whatever you want it to be. That will automatically create a blue diamond key frame for you. But you have to be sure and press the stopwatch first.

After you have created key frames, you're free to move and adjust those key frames. Later, I will get into a lot more detail regarding adjusting key frames.

Animating scale

You can animate your scale parameter to make your layer change in scale over time. Follow these steps to begin your animation journey:

  1. Press the keyboard shortcut S for the scale parameter to come up.
  2. Indicate in the timeline where you want the animation to begin.
  3. Hit the stopwatch for scale.
  4. Page down to the right, getting closer to the end of this animation.
  5. Scrub the scale parameter. This will automatically create a blue diamond key frame.

Let's preview that. If I want to give my layer a little bit of blur, I'll hit the blur icon. Look in the timeline:

Animating scale

Motion blur

This is an effect that has to be turned on in two places. It has to be turned on in the timeline, just above the timeline. If you hit the preview button, you will see how it gives it a nice blur. That's how things move in real life. There is always some sort of blur when things move fast.

Layer panel

Now I will talk to you about our layers and our timeline. It's very important to know your way around this part of the interface. This layer panel is how you control the way your images move. This is where you can see, at a glance, what's going on in your movie. This panel is similar to Photoshop's layer panel. Each one of these icons to the right of the layer has an important function. If you hover your selection arrow over any of these icons, a description will appear on the screen:

Layer panel

Layer panel

Let's take a closer look some of the buttons and switches of the layer panel:

  1. The animation stopwatch
  2. The shy button
  3. The continuously rasterized button
  4. The visual effects button
  5. Motion blur
  6. The 3D button
  7. The hide switch
  8. The audio switch
  9. The solo button
  10. The lock switch
  11. The parenting pick whip
  12. The shy switch
  13. Motion blur
  14. Graph editor
  15. Current time editor
  16. The zoom-in timeline
  17. Workspace

Looking at all these buttons and switches can be overwhelming. Let's look at handful of switches that you will find helpful for organizing your layers:

  • #7 The eyeball switch: This is to the far right of your layer. Turning off the eyeball next to the layer determines whether that layer is seen.
  • #9 The solo switch: The circle icon to the far right of your layer is called the solo switch. The solo switch will isolate a layer that has that solo turned on.
  • #10 The lock switch: This is for locking your layers.
  • #12 The shy switch: If this is turned on in both of these locations, you will not see that layer.
  • #13 The motion blur switch: This also needs to be activated in both of these locations (#5 and #13); this will enable motion blur.

The footage panel

The footage panel is used for previewing your footage. There are also some tools that work only in the footage panel.

To access the footage panel, double-click on the layer. However, this panel is often accessed by accident. It's accessed when double-clicking on a layer. You can tell you're in this panel when you see the white bar at the bottom. There are specific things you can do in this layer, but we usually don't need to be in this panel. Here is a screenshot of the footage panel:

The footage panel

Footage panel

You will find this is a mistake that happens frequently. To get out of this panel, go to the top of that panel and choose the name of your main comp. Or you can reset the workspace area back to the saved layout:

The footage panel

Resetting layout

Resetting this will not change anything in your project. It simply restores your workspace area to the default standard layout.

The timeline panel

Let's talk about time. The timeline panel is one of the main things that differentiates After Effects from Photoshop. Unlike Photoshop, After Effects has the ability to make things happen across time. Another big difference between After Effects and Photoshop is 3D space. You can create compositions with 3D depth. After Effect movies are comprised of frames, just like real films.

The timeline lifespan

Think of the timeline like a lifespan. The beginning is the timeline's birth and at the end of your work area, that's considered the death or the end of the lifespan.

Zooming into the timeline

You can zoom into any point of the timeline with the button at the lower-center of the timeline. Or you can zoom into your timeline by moving the slider. If you look closely, you can you can see (F), which stands for frames:

Zooming into the timeline

Zooming into the slider

The timeline is measured with time codes. The F next to the numbers on the timeline stands for frames.

Navigating in the timeline

The timeline is always moving from left to right:

  • Use the Page Up key as a shortcut to navigate forward in the timeline, frame by frame, and Page Down to navigate backward in the timeline, frame by frame.
  • A shortcut for moving down one frame in the timeline is Page Down or Ctrl + the right arrow (on a PC) or Page Down or command + the right arrow (on macOS). You can also use the arrows in the preview panel:
    Navigating in the timeline

    Preview panel

The f on the timeline stands for frames; the numbers represent the number of frames:

Navigating in the timeline

Frames

Go to the beginning of the timeline. The shortcut is for this is pressing the home button on the numeric keypad.

Current time indicator

This guitar pick-shaped object highlighted in the following screenshot is called the current time indicator icon. Moving this time indicator is another way to navigate through the timeline:

Current time indicator

Current time indicator

The workspace area

The timeline is the entire length of your composition. Your workspace area is the length of your movie. This is also called the rendering area. When I hit the play button for previewing my movie, it happens within that space. This can be trimmed and edited. To trim your workspace area, perform the following steps:

  1. Move your time indicator to the desired spot on the timeline
  2. Press the letter N to activate the shortcut to trim the work area

There is usually more than one way to do something in After Effects. To manually trim your workspace, perform the following steps:

  1. Move your mouse to the beginning the timeline and hover over the blue bar. This is the start of your workspace area.
  2. Drag this bar to the right, to trim your work area.

You can drag either the start or the end or the workspace area. Trimming this shortens the duration of the comp. This is useful for previewing your movie or previewing a small section of your movie. Remember when you export or render your movie, this workspace needs to be trimmed, to reflect exactly what you want exported. The duration of the workspace is the only thing that will be exported or rendered:

The workspace area

Trimming the workspace area

Trimming layers

You can edit the duration of your layers by trimming them. Trimming your layers will give you control when your layers appear in your movie:

Trimming layers

Trimming layers

To trim your layer, perform the following steps:

  1. Move your time indicator to the desired spot on the timeline
  2. Press Alt + [ or Option + [ on macOS to activate the shortcut to trim your layer

To manually trim your layer, perform the following steps:

  1. Move your time indicator to the desired spot on the timeline.
  2. Bring your selection tool to the very beginning of the layer and hover over the start of the layer. You will see the trim layer icon represented by two arrows. (You must see this or your dragging you're layers, which is different to trimming them.) Use this to drag and trim your layer.

You can trim any type of layer using the preceding methods. This layer will be trimmed exactly where the time indicator is. Move your time indicator back and forth in the timeline across this trimmed layer. See how the layer appears where the image is trimmed to? This is how layers can appear across time.

Creating composition markers on your timeline

You can further organize your timeline by adding information to the timeline. You can also create markers, notes, and metadata on your timeline. These markers can also be used to align layers to a point in the timeline. The following are the steps for creating a composition marker:

  1. Hit Shift and a number.
  2. Double-click that number to enter a note:
Creating composition markers on your timeline

Composition markers

These markers and notes can be particularly helpful when organizing your project and writing notes from clients and team members.

Animating a property

Animating a property is essentially marking a parameter in time and adjusting that property further down the timeline. We create animation by creating at least two key frames. The steps to animate a property are simple. But you need to be sure you follow these steps each time. When you want to animate any property, you need to perform the following steps:

  1. First hit the stopwatch, which will automatically create a key frame for you.
  2. Move down the timeline, and change the Transform property to whatever you want it to be. That will automatically create a blue diamond key frame for you. But you have to be sure and press the stopwatch first.

After you have created key frames, you're free to move and adjust those key frames. Later, I will get into a lot more detail regarding adjusting key frames.

Animating scale

You can animate your scale parameter to make your layer change in scale over time. Follow these steps to begin your animation journey:

  1. Press the keyboard shortcut S for the scale parameter to come up.
  2. Indicate in the timeline where you want the animation to begin.
  3. Hit the stopwatch for scale.
  4. Page down to the right, getting closer to the end of this animation.
  5. Scrub the scale parameter. This will automatically create a blue diamond key frame.

Let's preview that. If I want to give my layer a little bit of blur, I'll hit the blur icon. Look in the timeline:

Animating scale

Motion blur

This is an effect that has to be turned on in two places. It has to be turned on in the timeline, just above the timeline. If you hit the preview button, you will see how it gives it a nice blur. That's how things move in real life. There is always some sort of blur when things move fast.

The footage panel

The footage panel is used for previewing your footage. There are also some tools that work only in the footage panel.

To access the footage panel, double-click on the layer. However, this panel is often accessed by accident. It's accessed when double-clicking on a layer. You can tell you're in this panel when you see the white bar at the bottom. There are specific things you can do in this layer, but we usually don't need to be in this panel. Here is a screenshot of the footage panel:

The footage panel

Footage panel

You will find this is a mistake that happens frequently. To get out of this panel, go to the top of that panel and choose the name of your main comp. Or you can reset the workspace area back to the saved layout:

The footage panel

Resetting layout

Resetting this will not change anything in your project. It simply restores your workspace area to the default standard layout.

The timeline panel

Let's talk about time. The timeline panel is one of the main things that differentiates After Effects from Photoshop. Unlike Photoshop, After Effects has the ability to make things happen across time. Another big difference between After Effects and Photoshop is 3D space. You can create compositions with 3D depth. After Effect movies are comprised of frames, just like real films.

The timeline lifespan

Think of the timeline like a lifespan. The beginning is the timeline's birth and at the end of your work area, that's considered the death or the end of the lifespan.

Zooming into the timeline

You can zoom into any point of the timeline with the button at the lower-center of the timeline. Or you can zoom into your timeline by moving the slider. If you look closely, you can you can see (F), which stands for frames:

Zooming into the timeline

Zooming into the slider

The timeline is measured with time codes. The F next to the numbers on the timeline stands for frames.

Navigating in the timeline

The timeline is always moving from left to right:

  • Use the Page Up key as a shortcut to navigate forward in the timeline, frame by frame, and Page Down to navigate backward in the timeline, frame by frame.
  • A shortcut for moving down one frame in the timeline is Page Down or Ctrl + the right arrow (on a PC) or Page Down or command + the right arrow (on macOS). You can also use the arrows in the preview panel:
    Navigating in the timeline

    Preview panel

The f on the timeline stands for frames; the numbers represent the number of frames:

Navigating in the timeline

Frames

Go to the beginning of the timeline. The shortcut is for this is pressing the home button on the numeric keypad.

Current time indicator

This guitar pick-shaped object highlighted in the following screenshot is called the current time indicator icon. Moving this time indicator is another way to navigate through the timeline:

Current time indicator

Current time indicator

The workspace area

The timeline is the entire length of your composition. Your workspace area is the length of your movie. This is also called the rendering area. When I hit the play button for previewing my movie, it happens within that space. This can be trimmed and edited. To trim your workspace area, perform the following steps:

  1. Move your time indicator to the desired spot on the timeline
  2. Press the letter N to activate the shortcut to trim the work area

There is usually more than one way to do something in After Effects. To manually trim your workspace, perform the following steps:

  1. Move your mouse to the beginning the timeline and hover over the blue bar. This is the start of your workspace area.
  2. Drag this bar to the right, to trim your work area.

You can drag either the start or the end or the workspace area. Trimming this shortens the duration of the comp. This is useful for previewing your movie or previewing a small section of your movie. Remember when you export or render your movie, this workspace needs to be trimmed, to reflect exactly what you want exported. The duration of the workspace is the only thing that will be exported or rendered:

The workspace area

Trimming the workspace area

Trimming layers

You can edit the duration of your layers by trimming them. Trimming your layers will give you control when your layers appear in your movie:

Trimming layers

Trimming layers

To trim your layer, perform the following steps:

  1. Move your time indicator to the desired spot on the timeline
  2. Press Alt + [ or Option + [ on macOS to activate the shortcut to trim your layer

To manually trim your layer, perform the following steps:

  1. Move your time indicator to the desired spot on the timeline.
  2. Bring your selection tool to the very beginning of the layer and hover over the start of the layer. You will see the trim layer icon represented by two arrows. (You must see this or your dragging you're layers, which is different to trimming them.) Use this to drag and trim your layer.

You can trim any type of layer using the preceding methods. This layer will be trimmed exactly where the time indicator is. Move your time indicator back and forth in the timeline across this trimmed layer. See how the layer appears where the image is trimmed to? This is how layers can appear across time.

Creating composition markers on your timeline

You can further organize your timeline by adding information to the timeline. You can also create markers, notes, and metadata on your timeline. These markers can also be used to align layers to a point in the timeline. The following are the steps for creating a composition marker:

  1. Hit Shift and a number.
  2. Double-click that number to enter a note:
Creating composition markers on your timeline

Composition markers

These markers and notes can be particularly helpful when organizing your project and writing notes from clients and team members.

Animating a property

Animating a property is essentially marking a parameter in time and adjusting that property further down the timeline. We create animation by creating at least two key frames. The steps to animate a property are simple. But you need to be sure you follow these steps each time. When you want to animate any property, you need to perform the following steps:

  1. First hit the stopwatch, which will automatically create a key frame for you.
  2. Move down the timeline, and change the Transform property to whatever you want it to be. That will automatically create a blue diamond key frame for you. But you have to be sure and press the stopwatch first.

After you have created key frames, you're free to move and adjust those key frames. Later, I will get into a lot more detail regarding adjusting key frames.

Animating scale

You can animate your scale parameter to make your layer change in scale over time. Follow these steps to begin your animation journey:

  1. Press the keyboard shortcut S for the scale parameter to come up.
  2. Indicate in the timeline where you want the animation to begin.
  3. Hit the stopwatch for scale.
  4. Page down to the right, getting closer to the end of this animation.
  5. Scrub the scale parameter. This will automatically create a blue diamond key frame.

Let's preview that. If I want to give my layer a little bit of blur, I'll hit the blur icon. Look in the timeline:

Animating scale

Motion blur

This is an effect that has to be turned on in two places. It has to be turned on in the timeline, just above the timeline. If you hit the preview button, you will see how it gives it a nice blur. That's how things move in real life. There is always some sort of blur when things move fast.

The timeline panel

Let's talk about time. The timeline panel is one of the main things that differentiates After Effects from Photoshop. Unlike Photoshop, After Effects has the ability to make things happen across time. Another big difference between After Effects and Photoshop is 3D space. You can create compositions with 3D depth. After Effect movies are comprised of frames, just like real films.

The timeline lifespan

Think of the timeline like a lifespan. The beginning is the timeline's birth and at the end of your work area, that's considered the death or the end of the lifespan.

Zooming into the timeline

You can zoom into any point of the timeline with the button at the lower-center of the timeline. Or you can zoom into your timeline by moving the slider. If you look closely, you can you can see (F), which stands for frames:

Zooming into the timeline

Zooming into the slider

The timeline is measured with time codes. The F next to the numbers on the timeline stands for frames.

Navigating in the timeline

The timeline is always moving from left to right:

  • Use the Page Up key as a shortcut to navigate forward in the timeline, frame by frame, and Page Down to navigate backward in the timeline, frame by frame.
  • A shortcut for moving down one frame in the timeline is Page Down or Ctrl + the right arrow (on a PC) or Page Down or command + the right arrow (on macOS). You can also use the arrows in the preview panel:
    Navigating in the timeline

    Preview panel

The f on the timeline stands for frames; the numbers represent the number of frames:

Navigating in the timeline

Frames

Go to the beginning of the timeline. The shortcut is for this is pressing the home button on the numeric keypad.

Current time indicator

This guitar pick-shaped object highlighted in the following screenshot is called the current time indicator icon. Moving this time indicator is another way to navigate through the timeline:

Current time indicator

Current time indicator

The workspace area

The timeline is the entire length of your composition. Your workspace area is the length of your movie. This is also called the rendering area. When I hit the play button for previewing my movie, it happens within that space. This can be trimmed and edited. To trim your workspace area, perform the following steps:

  1. Move your time indicator to the desired spot on the timeline
  2. Press the letter N to activate the shortcut to trim the work area

There is usually more than one way to do something in After Effects. To manually trim your workspace, perform the following steps:

  1. Move your mouse to the beginning the timeline and hover over the blue bar. This is the start of your workspace area.
  2. Drag this bar to the right, to trim your work area.

You can drag either the start or the end or the workspace area. Trimming this shortens the duration of the comp. This is useful for previewing your movie or previewing a small section of your movie. Remember when you export or render your movie, this workspace needs to be trimmed, to reflect exactly what you want exported. The duration of the workspace is the only thing that will be exported or rendered:

The workspace area

Trimming the workspace area

Trimming layers

You can edit the duration of your layers by trimming them. Trimming your layers will give you control when your layers appear in your movie:

Trimming layers

Trimming layers

To trim your layer, perform the following steps:

  1. Move your time indicator to the desired spot on the timeline
  2. Press Alt + [ or Option + [ on macOS to activate the shortcut to trim your layer

To manually trim your layer, perform the following steps:

  1. Move your time indicator to the desired spot on the timeline.
  2. Bring your selection tool to the very beginning of the layer and hover over the start of the layer. You will see the trim layer icon represented by two arrows. (You must see this or your dragging you're layers, which is different to trimming them.) Use this to drag and trim your layer.

You can trim any type of layer using the preceding methods. This layer will be trimmed exactly where the time indicator is. Move your time indicator back and forth in the timeline across this trimmed layer. See how the layer appears where the image is trimmed to? This is how layers can appear across time.

Creating composition markers on your timeline

You can further organize your timeline by adding information to the timeline. You can also create markers, notes, and metadata on your timeline. These markers can also be used to align layers to a point in the timeline. The following are the steps for creating a composition marker:

  1. Hit Shift and a number.
  2. Double-click that number to enter a note:
Creating composition markers on your timeline

Composition markers

These markers and notes can be particularly helpful when organizing your project and writing notes from clients and team members.

Animating a property

Animating a property is essentially marking a parameter in time and adjusting that property further down the timeline. We create animation by creating at least two key frames. The steps to animate a property are simple. But you need to be sure you follow these steps each time. When you want to animate any property, you need to perform the following steps:

  1. First hit the stopwatch, which will automatically create a key frame for you.
  2. Move down the timeline, and change the Transform property to whatever you want it to be. That will automatically create a blue diamond key frame for you. But you have to be sure and press the stopwatch first.

After you have created key frames, you're free to move and adjust those key frames. Later, I will get into a lot more detail regarding adjusting key frames.

Animating scale

You can animate your scale parameter to make your layer change in scale over time. Follow these steps to begin your animation journey:

  1. Press the keyboard shortcut S for the scale parameter to come up.
  2. Indicate in the timeline where you want the animation to begin.
  3. Hit the stopwatch for scale.
  4. Page down to the right, getting closer to the end of this animation.
  5. Scrub the scale parameter. This will automatically create a blue diamond key frame.

Let's preview that. If I want to give my layer a little bit of blur, I'll hit the blur icon. Look in the timeline:

Animating scale

Motion blur

This is an effect that has to be turned on in two places. It has to be turned on in the timeline, just above the timeline. If you hit the preview button, you will see how it gives it a nice blur. That's how things move in real life. There is always some sort of blur when things move fast.

The timeline lifespan

Think of the timeline like a lifespan. The beginning is the timeline's birth and at the end of your work area, that's considered the death or the end of the lifespan.

Zooming into the timeline

You can zoom into any point of the timeline with the button at the lower-center of the timeline. Or you can zoom into your timeline by moving the slider. If you look closely, you can you can see (F), which stands for frames:

Zooming into the timeline

Zooming into the slider

The timeline is measured with time codes. The F next to the numbers on the timeline stands for frames.

Navigating in the timeline

The timeline is always moving from left to right:

  • Use the Page Up key as a shortcut to navigate forward in the timeline, frame by frame, and Page Down to navigate backward in the timeline, frame by frame.
  • A shortcut for moving down one frame in the timeline is Page Down or Ctrl + the right arrow (on a PC) or Page Down or command + the right arrow (on macOS). You can also use the arrows in the preview panel:
    Navigating in the timeline

    Preview panel

The f on the timeline stands for frames; the numbers represent the number of frames:

Navigating in the timeline

Frames

Go to the beginning of the timeline. The shortcut is for this is pressing the home button on the numeric keypad.

Current time indicator

This guitar pick-shaped object highlighted in the following screenshot is called the current time indicator icon. Moving this time indicator is another way to navigate through the timeline:

Current time indicator

Current time indicator

The workspace area

The timeline is the entire length of your composition. Your workspace area is the length of your movie. This is also called the rendering area. When I hit the play button for previewing my movie, it happens within that space. This can be trimmed and edited. To trim your workspace area, perform the following steps:

  1. Move your time indicator to the desired spot on the timeline
  2. Press the letter N to activate the shortcut to trim the work area

There is usually more than one way to do something in After Effects. To manually trim your workspace, perform the following steps:

  1. Move your mouse to the beginning the timeline and hover over the blue bar. This is the start of your workspace area.
  2. Drag this bar to the right, to trim your work area.

You can drag either the start or the end or the workspace area. Trimming this shortens the duration of the comp. This is useful for previewing your movie or previewing a small section of your movie. Remember when you export or render your movie, this workspace needs to be trimmed, to reflect exactly what you want exported. The duration of the workspace is the only thing that will be exported or rendered:

The workspace area

Trimming the workspace area

Trimming layers

You can edit the duration of your layers by trimming them. Trimming your layers will give you control when your layers appear in your movie:

Trimming layers

Trimming layers

To trim your layer, perform the following steps:

  1. Move your time indicator to the desired spot on the timeline
  2. Press Alt + [ or Option + [ on macOS to activate the shortcut to trim your layer

To manually trim your layer, perform the following steps:

  1. Move your time indicator to the desired spot on the timeline.
  2. Bring your selection tool to the very beginning of the layer and hover over the start of the layer. You will see the trim layer icon represented by two arrows. (You must see this or your dragging you're layers, which is different to trimming them.) Use this to drag and trim your layer.

You can trim any type of layer using the preceding methods. This layer will be trimmed exactly where the time indicator is. Move your time indicator back and forth in the timeline across this trimmed layer. See how the layer appears where the image is trimmed to? This is how layers can appear across time.

Creating composition markers on your timeline

You can further organize your timeline by adding information to the timeline. You can also create markers, notes, and metadata on your timeline. These markers can also be used to align layers to a point in the timeline. The following are the steps for creating a composition marker:

  1. Hit Shift and a number.
  2. Double-click that number to enter a note:
Creating composition markers on your timeline

Composition markers

These markers and notes can be particularly helpful when organizing your project and writing notes from clients and team members.

Animating a property

Animating a property is essentially marking a parameter in time and adjusting that property further down the timeline. We create animation by creating at least two key frames. The steps to animate a property are simple. But you need to be sure you follow these steps each time. When you want to animate any property, you need to perform the following steps:

  1. First hit the stopwatch, which will automatically create a key frame for you.
  2. Move down the timeline, and change the Transform property to whatever you want it to be. That will automatically create a blue diamond key frame for you. But you have to be sure and press the stopwatch first.

After you have created key frames, you're free to move and adjust those key frames. Later, I will get into a lot more detail regarding adjusting key frames.

Animating scale

You can animate your scale parameter to make your layer change in scale over time. Follow these steps to begin your animation journey:

  1. Press the keyboard shortcut S for the scale parameter to come up.
  2. Indicate in the timeline where you want the animation to begin.
  3. Hit the stopwatch for scale.
  4. Page down to the right, getting closer to the end of this animation.
  5. Scrub the scale parameter. This will automatically create a blue diamond key frame.

Let's preview that. If I want to give my layer a little bit of blur, I'll hit the blur icon. Look in the timeline:

Animating scale

Motion blur

This is an effect that has to be turned on in two places. It has to be turned on in the timeline, just above the timeline. If you hit the preview button, you will see how it gives it a nice blur. That's how things move in real life. There is always some sort of blur when things move fast.

Zooming into the timeline

You can zoom into any point of the timeline with the button at the lower-center of the timeline. Or you can zoom into your timeline by moving the slider. If you look closely, you can you can see (F), which stands for frames:

Zooming into the timeline

Zooming into the slider

The timeline is measured with time codes. The F next to the numbers on the timeline stands for frames.

Navigating in the timeline

The timeline is always moving from left to right:

  • Use the Page Up key as a shortcut to navigate forward in the timeline, frame by frame, and Page Down to navigate backward in the timeline, frame by frame.
  • A shortcut for moving down one frame in the timeline is Page Down or Ctrl + the right arrow (on a PC) or Page Down or command + the right arrow (on macOS). You can also use the arrows in the preview panel:
    Navigating in the timeline

    Preview panel

The f on the timeline stands for frames; the numbers represent the number of frames:

Navigating in the timeline

Frames

Go to the beginning of the timeline. The shortcut is for this is pressing the home button on the numeric keypad.

Current time indicator

This guitar pick-shaped object highlighted in the following screenshot is called the current time indicator icon. Moving this time indicator is another way to navigate through the timeline:

Current time indicator

Current time indicator

The workspace area

The timeline is the entire length of your composition. Your workspace area is the length of your movie. This is also called the rendering area. When I hit the play button for previewing my movie, it happens within that space. This can be trimmed and edited. To trim your workspace area, perform the following steps:

  1. Move your time indicator to the desired spot on the timeline
  2. Press the letter N to activate the shortcut to trim the work area

There is usually more than one way to do something in After Effects. To manually trim your workspace, perform the following steps:

  1. Move your mouse to the beginning the timeline and hover over the blue bar. This is the start of your workspace area.
  2. Drag this bar to the right, to trim your work area.

You can drag either the start or the end or the workspace area. Trimming this shortens the duration of the comp. This is useful for previewing your movie or previewing a small section of your movie. Remember when you export or render your movie, this workspace needs to be trimmed, to reflect exactly what you want exported. The duration of the workspace is the only thing that will be exported or rendered:

The workspace area

Trimming the workspace area

Trimming layers

You can edit the duration of your layers by trimming them. Trimming your layers will give you control when your layers appear in your movie:

Trimming layers

Trimming layers

To trim your layer, perform the following steps:

  1. Move your time indicator to the desired spot on the timeline
  2. Press Alt + [ or Option + [ on macOS to activate the shortcut to trim your layer

To manually trim your layer, perform the following steps:

  1. Move your time indicator to the desired spot on the timeline.
  2. Bring your selection tool to the very beginning of the layer and hover over the start of the layer. You will see the trim layer icon represented by two arrows. (You must see this or your dragging you're layers, which is different to trimming them.) Use this to drag and trim your layer.

You can trim any type of layer using the preceding methods. This layer will be trimmed exactly where the time indicator is. Move your time indicator back and forth in the timeline across this trimmed layer. See how the layer appears where the image is trimmed to? This is how layers can appear across time.

Creating composition markers on your timeline

You can further organize your timeline by adding information to the timeline. You can also create markers, notes, and metadata on your timeline. These markers can also be used to align layers to a point in the timeline. The following are the steps for creating a composition marker:

  1. Hit Shift and a number.
  2. Double-click that number to enter a note:
Creating composition markers on your timeline

Composition markers

These markers and notes can be particularly helpful when organizing your project and writing notes from clients and team members.

Animating a property

Animating a property is essentially marking a parameter in time and adjusting that property further down the timeline. We create animation by creating at least two key frames. The steps to animate a property are simple. But you need to be sure you follow these steps each time. When you want to animate any property, you need to perform the following steps:

  1. First hit the stopwatch, which will automatically create a key frame for you.
  2. Move down the timeline, and change the Transform property to whatever you want it to be. That will automatically create a blue diamond key frame for you. But you have to be sure and press the stopwatch first.

After you have created key frames, you're free to move and adjust those key frames. Later, I will get into a lot more detail regarding adjusting key frames.

Animating scale

You can animate your scale parameter to make your layer change in scale over time. Follow these steps to begin your animation journey:

  1. Press the keyboard shortcut S for the scale parameter to come up.
  2. Indicate in the timeline where you want the animation to begin.
  3. Hit the stopwatch for scale.
  4. Page down to the right, getting closer to the end of this animation.
  5. Scrub the scale parameter. This will automatically create a blue diamond key frame.

Let's preview that. If I want to give my layer a little bit of blur, I'll hit the blur icon. Look in the timeline:

Animating scale

Motion blur

This is an effect that has to be turned on in two places. It has to be turned on in the timeline, just above the timeline. If you hit the preview button, you will see how it gives it a nice blur. That's how things move in real life. There is always some sort of blur when things move fast.

Navigating in the timeline

The timeline is always moving from left to right:

  • Use the Page Up key as a shortcut to navigate forward in the timeline, frame by frame, and Page Down to navigate backward in the timeline, frame by frame.
  • A shortcut for moving down one frame in the timeline is Page Down or Ctrl + the right arrow (on a PC) or Page Down or command + the right arrow (on macOS). You can also use the arrows in the preview panel:
    Navigating in the timeline

    Preview panel

The f on the timeline stands for frames; the numbers represent the number of frames:

Navigating in the timeline

Frames

Go to the beginning of the timeline. The shortcut is for this is pressing the home button on the numeric keypad.

Current time indicator

This guitar pick-shaped object highlighted in the following screenshot is called the current time indicator icon. Moving this time indicator is another way to navigate through the timeline:

Current time indicator

Current time indicator

The workspace area

The timeline is the entire length of your composition. Your workspace area is the length of your movie. This is also called the rendering area. When I hit the play button for previewing my movie, it happens within that space. This can be trimmed and edited. To trim your workspace area, perform the following steps:

  1. Move your time indicator to the desired spot on the timeline
  2. Press the letter N to activate the shortcut to trim the work area

There is usually more than one way to do something in After Effects. To manually trim your workspace, perform the following steps:

  1. Move your mouse to the beginning the timeline and hover over the blue bar. This is the start of your workspace area.
  2. Drag this bar to the right, to trim your work area.

You can drag either the start or the end or the workspace area. Trimming this shortens the duration of the comp. This is useful for previewing your movie or previewing a small section of your movie. Remember when you export or render your movie, this workspace needs to be trimmed, to reflect exactly what you want exported. The duration of the workspace is the only thing that will be exported or rendered:

The workspace area

Trimming the workspace area

Trimming layers

You can edit the duration of your layers by trimming them. Trimming your layers will give you control when your layers appear in your movie:

Trimming layers

Trimming layers

To trim your layer, perform the following steps:

  1. Move your time indicator to the desired spot on the timeline
  2. Press Alt + [ or Option + [ on macOS to activate the shortcut to trim your layer

To manually trim your layer, perform the following steps:

  1. Move your time indicator to the desired spot on the timeline.
  2. Bring your selection tool to the very beginning of the layer and hover over the start of the layer. You will see the trim layer icon represented by two arrows. (You must see this or your dragging you're layers, which is different to trimming them.) Use this to drag and trim your layer.

You can trim any type of layer using the preceding methods. This layer will be trimmed exactly where the time indicator is. Move your time indicator back and forth in the timeline across this trimmed layer. See how the layer appears where the image is trimmed to? This is how layers can appear across time.

Creating composition markers on your timeline

You can further organize your timeline by adding information to the timeline. You can also create markers, notes, and metadata on your timeline. These markers can also be used to align layers to a point in the timeline. The following are the steps for creating a composition marker:

  1. Hit Shift and a number.
  2. Double-click that number to enter a note:
Creating composition markers on your timeline

Composition markers

These markers and notes can be particularly helpful when organizing your project and writing notes from clients and team members.

Animating a property

Animating a property is essentially marking a parameter in time and adjusting that property further down the timeline. We create animation by creating at least two key frames. The steps to animate a property are simple. But you need to be sure you follow these steps each time. When you want to animate any property, you need to perform the following steps:

  1. First hit the stopwatch, which will automatically create a key frame for you.
  2. Move down the timeline, and change the Transform property to whatever you want it to be. That will automatically create a blue diamond key frame for you. But you have to be sure and press the stopwatch first.

After you have created key frames, you're free to move and adjust those key frames. Later, I will get into a lot more detail regarding adjusting key frames.

Animating scale

You can animate your scale parameter to make your layer change in scale over time. Follow these steps to begin your animation journey:

  1. Press the keyboard shortcut S for the scale parameter to come up.
  2. Indicate in the timeline where you want the animation to begin.
  3. Hit the stopwatch for scale.
  4. Page down to the right, getting closer to the end of this animation.
  5. Scrub the scale parameter. This will automatically create a blue diamond key frame.

Let's preview that. If I want to give my layer a little bit of blur, I'll hit the blur icon. Look in the timeline:

Animating scale

Motion blur

This is an effect that has to be turned on in two places. It has to be turned on in the timeline, just above the timeline. If you hit the preview button, you will see how it gives it a nice blur. That's how things move in real life. There is always some sort of blur when things move fast.

Current time indicator

This guitar pick-shaped object highlighted in the following screenshot is called the current time indicator icon. Moving this time indicator is another way to navigate through the timeline:

Current time indicator

Current time indicator

The workspace area

The timeline is the entire length of your composition. Your workspace area is the length of your movie. This is also called the rendering area. When I hit the play button for previewing my movie, it happens within that space. This can be trimmed and edited. To trim your workspace area, perform the following steps:

  1. Move your time indicator to the desired spot on the timeline
  2. Press the letter N to activate the shortcut to trim the work area

There is usually more than one way to do something in After Effects. To manually trim your workspace, perform the following steps:

  1. Move your mouse to the beginning the timeline and hover over the blue bar. This is the start of your workspace area.
  2. Drag this bar to the right, to trim your work area.

You can drag either the start or the end or the workspace area. Trimming this shortens the duration of the comp. This is useful for previewing your movie or previewing a small section of your movie. Remember when you export or render your movie, this workspace needs to be trimmed, to reflect exactly what you want exported. The duration of the workspace is the only thing that will be exported or rendered:

The workspace area

Trimming the workspace area

Trimming layers

You can edit the duration of your layers by trimming them. Trimming your layers will give you control when your layers appear in your movie:

Trimming layers

Trimming layers

To trim your layer, perform the following steps:

  1. Move your time indicator to the desired spot on the timeline
  2. Press Alt + [ or Option + [ on macOS to activate the shortcut to trim your layer

To manually trim your layer, perform the following steps:

  1. Move your time indicator to the desired spot on the timeline.
  2. Bring your selection tool to the very beginning of the layer and hover over the start of the layer. You will see the trim layer icon represented by two arrows. (You must see this or your dragging you're layers, which is different to trimming them.) Use this to drag and trim your layer.

You can trim any type of layer using the preceding methods. This layer will be trimmed exactly where the time indicator is. Move your time indicator back and forth in the timeline across this trimmed layer. See how the layer appears where the image is trimmed to? This is how layers can appear across time.

Creating composition markers on your timeline

You can further organize your timeline by adding information to the timeline. You can also create markers, notes, and metadata on your timeline. These markers can also be used to align layers to a point in the timeline. The following are the steps for creating a composition marker:

  1. Hit Shift and a number.
  2. Double-click that number to enter a note:
Creating composition markers on your timeline

Composition markers

These markers and notes can be particularly helpful when organizing your project and writing notes from clients and team members.

Animating a property

Animating a property is essentially marking a parameter in time and adjusting that property further down the timeline. We create animation by creating at least two key frames. The steps to animate a property are simple. But you need to be sure you follow these steps each time. When you want to animate any property, you need to perform the following steps:

  1. First hit the stopwatch, which will automatically create a key frame for you.
  2. Move down the timeline, and change the Transform property to whatever you want it to be. That will automatically create a blue diamond key frame for you. But you have to be sure and press the stopwatch first.

After you have created key frames, you're free to move and adjust those key frames. Later, I will get into a lot more detail regarding adjusting key frames.

Animating scale

You can animate your scale parameter to make your layer change in scale over time. Follow these steps to begin your animation journey:

  1. Press the keyboard shortcut S for the scale parameter to come up.
  2. Indicate in the timeline where you want the animation to begin.
  3. Hit the stopwatch for scale.
  4. Page down to the right, getting closer to the end of this animation.
  5. Scrub the scale parameter. This will automatically create a blue diamond key frame.

Let's preview that. If I want to give my layer a little bit of blur, I'll hit the blur icon. Look in the timeline:

Animating scale

Motion blur

This is an effect that has to be turned on in two places. It has to be turned on in the timeline, just above the timeline. If you hit the preview button, you will see how it gives it a nice blur. That's how things move in real life. There is always some sort of blur when things move fast.

The workspace area

The timeline is the entire length of your composition. Your workspace area is the length of your movie. This is also called the rendering area. When I hit the play button for previewing my movie, it happens within that space. This can be trimmed and edited. To trim your workspace area, perform the following steps:

  1. Move your time indicator to the desired spot on the timeline
  2. Press the letter N to activate the shortcut to trim the work area

There is usually more than one way to do something in After Effects. To manually trim your workspace, perform the following steps:

  1. Move your mouse to the beginning the timeline and hover over the blue bar. This is the start of your workspace area.
  2. Drag this bar to the right, to trim your work area.

You can drag either the start or the end or the workspace area. Trimming this shortens the duration of the comp. This is useful for previewing your movie or previewing a small section of your movie. Remember when you export or render your movie, this workspace needs to be trimmed, to reflect exactly what you want exported. The duration of the workspace is the only thing that will be exported or rendered:

The workspace area

Trimming the workspace area

Trimming layers

You can edit the duration of your layers by trimming them. Trimming your layers will give you control when your layers appear in your movie:

Trimming layers

Trimming layers

To trim your layer, perform the following steps:

  1. Move your time indicator to the desired spot on the timeline
  2. Press Alt + [ or Option + [ on macOS to activate the shortcut to trim your layer

To manually trim your layer, perform the following steps:

  1. Move your time indicator to the desired spot on the timeline.
  2. Bring your selection tool to the very beginning of the layer and hover over the start of the layer. You will see the trim layer icon represented by two arrows. (You must see this or your dragging you're layers, which is different to trimming them.) Use this to drag and trim your layer.

You can trim any type of layer using the preceding methods. This layer will be trimmed exactly where the time indicator is. Move your time indicator back and forth in the timeline across this trimmed layer. See how the layer appears where the image is trimmed to? This is how layers can appear across time.

Creating composition markers on your timeline

You can further organize your timeline by adding information to the timeline. You can also create markers, notes, and metadata on your timeline. These markers can also be used to align layers to a point in the timeline. The following are the steps for creating a composition marker:

  1. Hit Shift and a number.
  2. Double-click that number to enter a note:
Creating composition markers on your timeline

Composition markers

These markers and notes can be particularly helpful when organizing your project and writing notes from clients and team members.

Animating a property

Animating a property is essentially marking a parameter in time and adjusting that property further down the timeline. We create animation by creating at least two key frames. The steps to animate a property are simple. But you need to be sure you follow these steps each time. When you want to animate any property, you need to perform the following steps:

  1. First hit the stopwatch, which will automatically create a key frame for you.
  2. Move down the timeline, and change the Transform property to whatever you want it to be. That will automatically create a blue diamond key frame for you. But you have to be sure and press the stopwatch first.

After you have created key frames, you're free to move and adjust those key frames. Later, I will get into a lot more detail regarding adjusting key frames.

Animating scale

You can animate your scale parameter to make your layer change in scale over time. Follow these steps to begin your animation journey:

  1. Press the keyboard shortcut S for the scale parameter to come up.
  2. Indicate in the timeline where you want the animation to begin.
  3. Hit the stopwatch for scale.
  4. Page down to the right, getting closer to the end of this animation.
  5. Scrub the scale parameter. This will automatically create a blue diamond key frame.

Let's preview that. If I want to give my layer a little bit of blur, I'll hit the blur icon. Look in the timeline:

Animating scale

Motion blur

This is an effect that has to be turned on in two places. It has to be turned on in the timeline, just above the timeline. If you hit the preview button, you will see how it gives it a nice blur. That's how things move in real life. There is always some sort of blur when things move fast.

Trimming layers

You can edit the duration of your layers by trimming them. Trimming your layers will give you control when your layers appear in your movie:

Trimming layers

Trimming layers

To trim your layer, perform the following steps:

  1. Move your time indicator to the desired spot on the timeline
  2. Press Alt + [ or Option + [ on macOS to activate the shortcut to trim your layer

To manually trim your layer, perform the following steps:

  1. Move your time indicator to the desired spot on the timeline.
  2. Bring your selection tool to the very beginning of the layer and hover over the start of the layer. You will see the trim layer icon represented by two arrows. (You must see this or your dragging you're layers, which is different to trimming them.) Use this to drag and trim your layer.

You can trim any type of layer using the preceding methods. This layer will be trimmed exactly where the time indicator is. Move your time indicator back and forth in the timeline across this trimmed layer. See how the layer appears where the image is trimmed to? This is how layers can appear across time.

Creating composition markers on your timeline

You can further organize your timeline by adding information to the timeline. You can also create markers, notes, and metadata on your timeline. These markers can also be used to align layers to a point in the timeline. The following are the steps for creating a composition marker:

  1. Hit Shift and a number.
  2. Double-click that number to enter a note:
Creating composition markers on your timeline

Composition markers

These markers and notes can be particularly helpful when organizing your project and writing notes from clients and team members.

Animating a property

Animating a property is essentially marking a parameter in time and adjusting that property further down the timeline. We create animation by creating at least two key frames. The steps to animate a property are simple. But you need to be sure you follow these steps each time. When you want to animate any property, you need to perform the following steps:

  1. First hit the stopwatch, which will automatically create a key frame for you.
  2. Move down the timeline, and change the Transform property to whatever you want it to be. That will automatically create a blue diamond key frame for you. But you have to be sure and press the stopwatch first.

After you have created key frames, you're free to move and adjust those key frames. Later, I will get into a lot more detail regarding adjusting key frames.

Animating scale

You can animate your scale parameter to make your layer change in scale over time. Follow these steps to begin your animation journey:

  1. Press the keyboard shortcut S for the scale parameter to come up.
  2. Indicate in the timeline where you want the animation to begin.
  3. Hit the stopwatch for scale.
  4. Page down to the right, getting closer to the end of this animation.
  5. Scrub the scale parameter. This will automatically create a blue diamond key frame.

Let's preview that. If I want to give my layer a little bit of blur, I'll hit the blur icon. Look in the timeline:

Animating scale

Motion blur

This is an effect that has to be turned on in two places. It has to be turned on in the timeline, just above the timeline. If you hit the preview button, you will see how it gives it a nice blur. That's how things move in real life. There is always some sort of blur when things move fast.

Creating composition markers on your timeline

You can further organize your timeline by adding information to the timeline. You can also create markers, notes, and metadata on your timeline. These markers can also be used to align layers to a point in the timeline. The following are the steps for creating a composition marker:

  1. Hit Shift and a number.
  2. Double-click that number to enter a note:
Creating composition markers on your timeline

Composition markers

These markers and notes can be particularly helpful when organizing your project and writing notes from clients and team members.

Animating a property

Animating a property is essentially marking a parameter in time and adjusting that property further down the timeline. We create animation by creating at least two key frames. The steps to animate a property are simple. But you need to be sure you follow these steps each time. When you want to animate any property, you need to perform the following steps:

  1. First hit the stopwatch, which will automatically create a key frame for you.
  2. Move down the timeline, and change the Transform property to whatever you want it to be. That will automatically create a blue diamond key frame for you. But you have to be sure and press the stopwatch first.

After you have created key frames, you're free to move and adjust those key frames. Later, I will get into a lot more detail regarding adjusting key frames.

Animating scale

You can animate your scale parameter to make your layer change in scale over time. Follow these steps to begin your animation journey:

  1. Press the keyboard shortcut S for the scale parameter to come up.
  2. Indicate in the timeline where you want the animation to begin.
  3. Hit the stopwatch for scale.
  4. Page down to the right, getting closer to the end of this animation.
  5. Scrub the scale parameter. This will automatically create a blue diamond key frame.

Let's preview that. If I want to give my layer a little bit of blur, I'll hit the blur icon. Look in the timeline:

Animating scale

Motion blur

This is an effect that has to be turned on in two places. It has to be turned on in the timeline, just above the timeline. If you hit the preview button, you will see how it gives it a nice blur. That's how things move in real life. There is always some sort of blur when things move fast.

Animating a property

Animating a property is essentially marking a parameter in time and adjusting that property further down the timeline. We create animation by creating at least two key frames. The steps to animate a property are simple. But you need to be sure you follow these steps each time. When you want to animate any property, you need to perform the following steps:

  1. First hit the stopwatch, which will automatically create a key frame for you.
  2. Move down the timeline, and change the Transform property to whatever you want it to be. That will automatically create a blue diamond key frame for you. But you have to be sure and press the stopwatch first.

After you have created key frames, you're free to move and adjust those key frames. Later, I will get into a lot more detail regarding adjusting key frames.

Animating scale

You can animate your scale parameter to make your layer change in scale over time. Follow these steps to begin your animation journey:

  1. Press the keyboard shortcut S for the scale parameter to come up.
  2. Indicate in the timeline where you want the animation to begin.
  3. Hit the stopwatch for scale.
  4. Page down to the right, getting closer to the end of this animation.
  5. Scrub the scale parameter. This will automatically create a blue diamond key frame.

Let's preview that. If I want to give my layer a little bit of blur, I'll hit the blur icon. Look in the timeline:

Animating scale

Motion blur

This is an effect that has to be turned on in two places. It has to be turned on in the timeline, just above the timeline. If you hit the preview button, you will see how it gives it a nice blur. That's how things move in real life. There is always some sort of blur when things move fast.

Animating scale

You can animate your scale parameter to make your layer change in scale over time. Follow these steps to begin your animation journey:

  1. Press the keyboard shortcut S for the scale parameter to come up.
  2. Indicate in the timeline where you want the animation to begin.
  3. Hit the stopwatch for scale.
  4. Page down to the right, getting closer to the end of this animation.
  5. Scrub the scale parameter. This will automatically create a blue diamond key frame.

Let's preview that. If I want to give my layer a little bit of blur, I'll hit the blur icon. Look in the timeline:

Animating scale

Motion blur

This is an effect that has to be turned on in two places. It has to be turned on in the timeline, just above the timeline. If you hit the preview button, you will see how it gives it a nice blur. That's how things move in real life. There is always some sort of blur when things move fast.

Solid layers and masking

Solid layers are basic colored layers. These can be used to give your video a solid color in the background. We can also use solid layers to create more complex masks. Let's spend more time with basic solid layers. Solid layers are simple color layers that can be edited with masking tools. You will learn how to create solids, edit them, and mask them:

  1. Create a new comp.
  2. Make the composition dimensions 1,920 x 1,080.
  3. Name this comp solids test.
  4. Move this composition into the main comp folder.
  5. Create a basic solid layer, Layer | New | Solid, or you can hit the shortcut Ctrl + Y or command + Y on macOS.
  6. Click on the color box and change the color to yellow:
Solid layers and masking

Solid settings

Good job! You have created your first solid layer. Notice that when you create a solid layer, After Effects creates a folder named solids in your project window. Whenever you create a new solid, it will automatically go into that folder. Right now, you have only one layer in your comp. It gets complicated when there are many layers in your composition. Let's create more layers to get used to working with more than one layer:

  1. Create another solid, or use a shortcut Ctrl + Y or command+ Y for macOS.
  2. Make this solid orange.
  3. Move this new orange layer to the lower-right corner.
  4. Create another solid, or use the shortcut Ctrl + Y or command + Y for macOS.
  5. Make this solid blue. Move this layer to the upper-left corner.

Remember that the stacking order is really important in After Effects. You will see what is on top first, followed by what is on the bottom, which is on the background. This composition is created with layers stacked on top of one another. You can see what's underneath that layer. You can see there are other things in the background. There is a solid underneath that layer. At this point, you should see all your different-colored layers: some in front of the others, and some at the back. This is a good visual representation of the stacking order. Look in the timeline; you can see how the stacking order correlates to what you see in your composition:

Solid layers and masking

Stacking order

Let's look at the transparency parameters for our solid layers. You can access this by pressing the letter T. Scrub this parameter to reduce the opacity, and then lower the opacity. Notice you can still see the other layers through it:

Solid layers and masking

Transparancy

Now that you have learned how to change your layer opacity, let's learn how to duplicate layers.

Duplicating layers

In After Effects, duplicating your layers will create an exact copy of your layers and any key frames and effects you have on them. To duplicate your layer, perform the following steps:

  1. First, select the layer, duplicating your latest layer
  2. Press Ctrl + D, or command + D for macOS
  3. To change the setting for your solid layer, press Shift + Ctrl + Y or Shift + command + Y for macOS

Note

Your shortcut may be different if you have macOS. Refer to tab at the right of the After Effects panels, | Help | Keyboard Shortcuts...:

Duplicating layers

Keyboard shortcuts

If you find anything you're doing a lot, find the shortcut for it. Learning these shortcuts will greatly speed up your workflow in After Effects.

Identifying and turning off your layers

When you get more advanced with After Effects, you will have many layers in your timeline. One way to identify a layer is to turn off all the other layers. Another reason to temporarily turn off a layer is to see how your composition looks without that layer. These eyeball icons are for turning off your layers:

Identifying and turning off your layers

Eyeball icon

Remember when the eyeball is visible, it means that the layer is visible. When it's not visible, the layer will not be seen in the composition.

Solo layers

Soloing your layer can be a life-saver. This will help you temporarily show one single layer or many single layers at a time. What makes this switch so important is that it's easy to turn on and off without changing any of your original layers. It's also easy to tell which layers you have soloed, making it easy to turn off the solo switch when you need to. To activate the solo switch, simply turn on the solo button. If you solo something, you will see the grid behind it, and this grid means that it is a transparent background. Turn off the solo switch to return the layer to its original condition. This becomes really helpful when you have a lot of layers and you want to locate and identify and work with just one layer; you can solo it:

Solo layers

Solo layer

Understanding how to solo your layers will help you quickly turn on and off hundreds of layers with no fear of ruining anything. Try practicing with the solo button on a layer.

Tagging your layers

Tagging your layers can be especially helpful for identifying and organizing your layers in the timeline. You can change these tags to be any color you want. When you need to quickly edit something, sometimes you can select it, but sometimes it can be really hard to find it. Identifying layers is an important part of After Effects. When you have a very complicated project, it's very important to be able to identify your layers. This is when naming and tagging your layers correctly becomes very important. Organization is very important:

Tagging your layers

Tags

In After Effects, your composition window is like a stage. You can see images outside the frame or stage. You can also drag things into or out of the main stage area. This is helpful when you want to start your animation off-screen and end up on-screen.

Looking at transform properties

Your layers have transform properties, which are the heart and soul of animation. Anything that has a stopwatch next to it can be animated. All these parameters can be overwhelming at first glance. Let's go over each property shortcut to familiarize yourself with them all. Twirl word transform down to see all the properties:

  • Anchor Point: The shortcut is Y
  • Position: The shortcut is P
  • Scale: The shortcut is S
  • Rotation: The shortcut is R
  • Opacity: The shortcut is T
  • Reveal all key frames: The shortcut is U

Pressing any of these keyboard shortcuts while your layer is selected will bring up that parameter:

Looking at transform properties

Transform properties

All these transform properties can be animated across time. All such properties appear with the icon of a stopwatch, which indicates the feature of animating them in the timeline.

Rulers and guides

After Effects comes with different guides you can use to create more precise alignments of your objects. If you look at the top-right of your tool panel, you can enable Snapping:

Rulers and guides

Snapping

This will make your objects snap to your guides. In the Guides section, you will find a variety of guides and grids to go beyond the guesswork of lining up your object in After Effects. The guide Title/Action Safe is used for video monitors. These guides can be accessed at the bottom of the composition window by clicking the grid icon:

Rulers and guides

Guides

If you choose the Rulers option, you have access to guides that you can drag across your composition and align objects to the guides:

Rulers and guides

Custom guides

Guides can be a great help to layout your composition and arrange text precisely.

Duplicating layers

In After Effects, duplicating your layers will create an exact copy of your layers and any key frames and effects you have on them. To duplicate your layer, perform the following steps:

  1. First, select the layer, duplicating your latest layer
  2. Press Ctrl + D, or command + D for macOS
  3. To change the setting for your solid layer, press Shift + Ctrl + Y or Shift + command + Y for macOS

Note

Your shortcut may be different if you have macOS. Refer to tab at the right of the After Effects panels, | Help | Keyboard Shortcuts...:

Duplicating layers

Keyboard shortcuts

If you find anything you're doing a lot, find the shortcut for it. Learning these shortcuts will greatly speed up your workflow in After Effects.

Identifying and turning off your layers

When you get more advanced with After Effects, you will have many layers in your timeline. One way to identify a layer is to turn off all the other layers. Another reason to temporarily turn off a layer is to see how your composition looks without that layer. These eyeball icons are for turning off your layers:

Identifying and turning off your layers

Eyeball icon

Remember when the eyeball is visible, it means that the layer is visible. When it's not visible, the layer will not be seen in the composition.

Solo layers

Soloing your layer can be a life-saver. This will help you temporarily show one single layer or many single layers at a time. What makes this switch so important is that it's easy to turn on and off without changing any of your original layers. It's also easy to tell which layers you have soloed, making it easy to turn off the solo switch when you need to. To activate the solo switch, simply turn on the solo button. If you solo something, you will see the grid behind it, and this grid means that it is a transparent background. Turn off the solo switch to return the layer to its original condition. This becomes really helpful when you have a lot of layers and you want to locate and identify and work with just one layer; you can solo it:

Solo layers

Solo layer

Understanding how to solo your layers will help you quickly turn on and off hundreds of layers with no fear of ruining anything. Try practicing with the solo button on a layer.

Tagging your layers

Tagging your layers can be especially helpful for identifying and organizing your layers in the timeline. You can change these tags to be any color you want. When you need to quickly edit something, sometimes you can select it, but sometimes it can be really hard to find it. Identifying layers is an important part of After Effects. When you have a very complicated project, it's very important to be able to identify your layers. This is when naming and tagging your layers correctly becomes very important. Organization is very important:

Tagging your layers

Tags

In After Effects, your composition window is like a stage. You can see images outside the frame or stage. You can also drag things into or out of the main stage area. This is helpful when you want to start your animation off-screen and end up on-screen.

Looking at transform properties

Your layers have transform properties, which are the heart and soul of animation. Anything that has a stopwatch next to it can be animated. All these parameters can be overwhelming at first glance. Let's go over each property shortcut to familiarize yourself with them all. Twirl word transform down to see all the properties:

  • Anchor Point: The shortcut is Y
  • Position: The shortcut is P
  • Scale: The shortcut is S
  • Rotation: The shortcut is R
  • Opacity: The shortcut is T
  • Reveal all key frames: The shortcut is U

Pressing any of these keyboard shortcuts while your layer is selected will bring up that parameter:

Looking at transform properties

Transform properties

All these transform properties can be animated across time. All such properties appear with the icon of a stopwatch, which indicates the feature of animating them in the timeline.

Rulers and guides

After Effects comes with different guides you can use to create more precise alignments of your objects. If you look at the top-right of your tool panel, you can enable Snapping:

Rulers and guides

Snapping

This will make your objects snap to your guides. In the Guides section, you will find a variety of guides and grids to go beyond the guesswork of lining up your object in After Effects. The guide Title/Action Safe is used for video monitors. These guides can be accessed at the bottom of the composition window by clicking the grid icon:

Rulers and guides

Guides

If you choose the Rulers option, you have access to guides that you can drag across your composition and align objects to the guides:

Rulers and guides

Custom guides

Guides can be a great help to layout your composition and arrange text precisely.

Identifying and turning off your layers

When you get more advanced with After Effects, you will have many layers in your timeline. One way to identify a layer is to turn off all the other layers. Another reason to temporarily turn off a layer is to see how your composition looks without that layer. These eyeball icons are for turning off your layers:

Identifying and turning off your layers

Eyeball icon

Remember when the eyeball is visible, it means that the layer is visible. When it's not visible, the layer will not be seen in the composition.

Solo layers

Soloing your layer can be a life-saver. This will help you temporarily show one single layer or many single layers at a time. What makes this switch so important is that it's easy to turn on and off without changing any of your original layers. It's also easy to tell which layers you have soloed, making it easy to turn off the solo switch when you need to. To activate the solo switch, simply turn on the solo button. If you solo something, you will see the grid behind it, and this grid means that it is a transparent background. Turn off the solo switch to return the layer to its original condition. This becomes really helpful when you have a lot of layers and you want to locate and identify and work with just one layer; you can solo it:

Solo layers

Solo layer

Understanding how to solo your layers will help you quickly turn on and off hundreds of layers with no fear of ruining anything. Try practicing with the solo button on a layer.

Tagging your layers

Tagging your layers can be especially helpful for identifying and organizing your layers in the timeline. You can change these tags to be any color you want. When you need to quickly edit something, sometimes you can select it, but sometimes it can be really hard to find it. Identifying layers is an important part of After Effects. When you have a very complicated project, it's very important to be able to identify your layers. This is when naming and tagging your layers correctly becomes very important. Organization is very important:

Tagging your layers

Tags

In After Effects, your composition window is like a stage. You can see images outside the frame or stage. You can also drag things into or out of the main stage area. This is helpful when you want to start your animation off-screen and end up on-screen.

Looking at transform properties

Your layers have transform properties, which are the heart and soul of animation. Anything that has a stopwatch next to it can be animated. All these parameters can be overwhelming at first glance. Let's go over each property shortcut to familiarize yourself with them all. Twirl word transform down to see all the properties:

  • Anchor Point: The shortcut is Y
  • Position: The shortcut is P
  • Scale: The shortcut is S
  • Rotation: The shortcut is R
  • Opacity: The shortcut is T
  • Reveal all key frames: The shortcut is U

Pressing any of these keyboard shortcuts while your layer is selected will bring up that parameter:

Looking at transform properties

Transform properties

All these transform properties can be animated across time. All such properties appear with the icon of a stopwatch, which indicates the feature of animating them in the timeline.

Rulers and guides

After Effects comes with different guides you can use to create more precise alignments of your objects. If you look at the top-right of your tool panel, you can enable Snapping:

Rulers and guides

Snapping

This will make your objects snap to your guides. In the Guides section, you will find a variety of guides and grids to go beyond the guesswork of lining up your object in After Effects. The guide Title/Action Safe is used for video monitors. These guides can be accessed at the bottom of the composition window by clicking the grid icon:

Rulers and guides

Guides

If you choose the Rulers option, you have access to guides that you can drag across your composition and align objects to the guides:

Rulers and guides

Custom guides

Guides can be a great help to layout your composition and arrange text precisely.

Solo layers

Soloing your layer can be a life-saver. This will help you temporarily show one single layer or many single layers at a time. What makes this switch so important is that it's easy to turn on and off without changing any of your original layers. It's also easy to tell which layers you have soloed, making it easy to turn off the solo switch when you need to. To activate the solo switch, simply turn on the solo button. If you solo something, you will see the grid behind it, and this grid means that it is a transparent background. Turn off the solo switch to return the layer to its original condition. This becomes really helpful when you have a lot of layers and you want to locate and identify and work with just one layer; you can solo it:

Solo layers

Solo layer

Understanding how to solo your layers will help you quickly turn on and off hundreds of layers with no fear of ruining anything. Try practicing with the solo button on a layer.

Tagging your layers

Tagging your layers can be especially helpful for identifying and organizing your layers in the timeline. You can change these tags to be any color you want. When you need to quickly edit something, sometimes you can select it, but sometimes it can be really hard to find it. Identifying layers is an important part of After Effects. When you have a very complicated project, it's very important to be able to identify your layers. This is when naming and tagging your layers correctly becomes very important. Organization is very important:

Tagging your layers

Tags

In After Effects, your composition window is like a stage. You can see images outside the frame or stage. You can also drag things into or out of the main stage area. This is helpful when you want to start your animation off-screen and end up on-screen.

Looking at transform properties

Your layers have transform properties, which are the heart and soul of animation. Anything that has a stopwatch next to it can be animated. All these parameters can be overwhelming at first glance. Let's go over each property shortcut to familiarize yourself with them all. Twirl word transform down to see all the properties:

  • Anchor Point: The shortcut is Y
  • Position: The shortcut is P
  • Scale: The shortcut is S
  • Rotation: The shortcut is R
  • Opacity: The shortcut is T
  • Reveal all key frames: The shortcut is U

Pressing any of these keyboard shortcuts while your layer is selected will bring up that parameter:

Looking at transform properties

Transform properties

All these transform properties can be animated across time. All such properties appear with the icon of a stopwatch, which indicates the feature of animating them in the timeline.

Rulers and guides

After Effects comes with different guides you can use to create more precise alignments of your objects. If you look at the top-right of your tool panel, you can enable Snapping:

Rulers and guides

Snapping

This will make your objects snap to your guides. In the Guides section, you will find a variety of guides and grids to go beyond the guesswork of lining up your object in After Effects. The guide Title/Action Safe is used for video monitors. These guides can be accessed at the bottom of the composition window by clicking the grid icon:

Rulers and guides

Guides

If you choose the Rulers option, you have access to guides that you can drag across your composition and align objects to the guides:

Rulers and guides

Custom guides

Guides can be a great help to layout your composition and arrange text precisely.

Tagging your layers

Tagging your layers can be especially helpful for identifying and organizing your layers in the timeline. You can change these tags to be any color you want. When you need to quickly edit something, sometimes you can select it, but sometimes it can be really hard to find it. Identifying layers is an important part of After Effects. When you have a very complicated project, it's very important to be able to identify your layers. This is when naming and tagging your layers correctly becomes very important. Organization is very important:

Tagging your layers

Tags

In After Effects, your composition window is like a stage. You can see images outside the frame or stage. You can also drag things into or out of the main stage area. This is helpful when you want to start your animation off-screen and end up on-screen.

Looking at transform properties

Your layers have transform properties, which are the heart and soul of animation. Anything that has a stopwatch next to it can be animated. All these parameters can be overwhelming at first glance. Let's go over each property shortcut to familiarize yourself with them all. Twirl word transform down to see all the properties:

  • Anchor Point: The shortcut is Y
  • Position: The shortcut is P
  • Scale: The shortcut is S
  • Rotation: The shortcut is R
  • Opacity: The shortcut is T
  • Reveal all key frames: The shortcut is U

Pressing any of these keyboard shortcuts while your layer is selected will bring up that parameter:

Looking at transform properties

Transform properties

All these transform properties can be animated across time. All such properties appear with the icon of a stopwatch, which indicates the feature of animating them in the timeline.

Rulers and guides

After Effects comes with different guides you can use to create more precise alignments of your objects. If you look at the top-right of your tool panel, you can enable Snapping:

Rulers and guides

Snapping

This will make your objects snap to your guides. In the Guides section, you will find a variety of guides and grids to go beyond the guesswork of lining up your object in After Effects. The guide Title/Action Safe is used for video monitors. These guides can be accessed at the bottom of the composition window by clicking the grid icon:

Rulers and guides

Guides

If you choose the Rulers option, you have access to guides that you can drag across your composition and align objects to the guides:

Rulers and guides

Custom guides

Guides can be a great help to layout your composition and arrange text precisely.

Looking at transform properties

Your layers have transform properties, which are the heart and soul of animation. Anything that has a stopwatch next to it can be animated. All these parameters can be overwhelming at first glance. Let's go over each property shortcut to familiarize yourself with them all. Twirl word transform down to see all the properties:

  • Anchor Point: The shortcut is Y
  • Position: The shortcut is P
  • Scale: The shortcut is S
  • Rotation: The shortcut is R
  • Opacity: The shortcut is T
  • Reveal all key frames: The shortcut is U

Pressing any of these keyboard shortcuts while your layer is selected will bring up that parameter:

Looking at transform properties

Transform properties

All these transform properties can be animated across time. All such properties appear with the icon of a stopwatch, which indicates the feature of animating them in the timeline.

Rulers and guides

After Effects comes with different guides you can use to create more precise alignments of your objects. If you look at the top-right of your tool panel, you can enable Snapping:

Rulers and guides

Snapping

This will make your objects snap to your guides. In the Guides section, you will find a variety of guides and grids to go beyond the guesswork of lining up your object in After Effects. The guide Title/Action Safe is used for video monitors. These guides can be accessed at the bottom of the composition window by clicking the grid icon:

Rulers and guides

Guides

If you choose the Rulers option, you have access to guides that you can drag across your composition and align objects to the guides:

Rulers and guides

Custom guides

Guides can be a great help to layout your composition and arrange text precisely.

Rulers and guides

After Effects comes with different guides you can use to create more precise alignments of your objects. If you look at the top-right of your tool panel, you can enable Snapping:

Rulers and guides

Snapping

This will make your objects snap to your guides. In the Guides section, you will find a variety of guides and grids to go beyond the guesswork of lining up your object in After Effects. The guide Title/Action Safe is used for video monitors. These guides can be accessed at the bottom of the composition window by clicking the grid icon:

Rulers and guides

Guides

If you choose the Rulers option, you have access to guides that you can drag across your composition and align objects to the guides:

Rulers and guides

Custom guides

Guides can be a great help to layout your composition and arrange text precisely.

Editing masks

In this section, we are going to discuss masking and editing layers and solids. We are going to mask off or cut out parts of the solids to create a shape. The following steps will illustrate how to do it:

  1. Create a 1,920 x 1,080 comp.
  2. Create a new solid layer layer, | New solid, or Ctrl + Y or command + Y for macOS.
  3. Make the solid yellow.

Look at the top-right of your tool bar. Under the Rectangle Tool, you have a variety of masking shapes to edit your solid. These are the masking tools that shape with After Effects. You can choose a Rectangle Tool, a Rounded Rectangle Tool, an Ellipse Tool, a Polygon Tool, or a Star Tool:

Editing masks

Mask tools

We are going to practice using an ellipse tool to cut out our shape:

  1. Choose Ellipse Tool
  2. Choose where you want to create your shape
  3. Click and drag

When dragging these tools, the mask may stretch. If you don't want that, hit Shift while dragging. That will create a perfect shape.

Editing your mask shape

Click once on one of the squares in the bounding box, and insert an image of the masking solid:

Editing your mask shape

Selecting a single point

The square will fill and you will get bezier handles. This enables you to edit one single mask point:

Editing your mask shape

Editing a single point

To edit the entire mask:

  1. Double-click one of these squares.
  2. You will get a square bounding box.
  3. Drag this bounding box to edit all the points at the same time:
Editing your mask shape

Masking a bounding box

This is masking off the rest of the solid. Under the properties for masking, there is a mask column where you can choose other parameters. This will hide your mask or give you different masking options.

Editing masks

You can take these basic shapes and make other more complex shapes. You can also change the color of the mask by clicking on the color box in the mask. After Effects also has other parameters that you can work with. Clicking on the mask gives you other parameters that can be edited. You can edit this mask by adjusting the feathering parameter. Adjusting the feathering amount means the outside of the mask will be feathered. Of course, the feathering is able to be key-framed. You can expand the mask as well. The expansion can also go the opposite direction, so you'll actually be eating into the mask in the negative direction. I'd like for you to experiment with all these mask-editing parameters.

Using the subtract-masking feature

Masking is a very powerful tool used for roto scoping and creating shapes. You have control over how your mask will behave, and you can choose to add or subtract from your mask shape. We will focus on the subtract feature:

  1. Drag another shape on top of the current solid shape.
  2. Find the new mask parameter on that solid in the lower-left side of the timeline.
  3. To the right of the mask is a tab called Add with an arrow pointing down. Click on that.
  4. Choose Subtract from that list:
Using the subtract-masking feature

Subtract mask

See how it cuts that shape out? This is how you can create interesting shapes in After Effects. Have a lot of fun with this; there's so much you can do with it—the sky's the limit! Masking becomes very important when you need to cut layers, videos, images, and so on. Think of layers as scissors to cut out what you don't want to see. I'd like for you guys to play with these shapes. Start editing these mask points. You can create complex interesting shapes with these techniques.

Editing your mask shape

Click once on one of the squares in the bounding box, and insert an image of the masking solid:

Editing your mask shape

Selecting a single point

The square will fill and you will get bezier handles. This enables you to edit one single mask point:

Editing your mask shape

Editing a single point

To edit the entire mask:

  1. Double-click one of these squares.
  2. You will get a square bounding box.
  3. Drag this bounding box to edit all the points at the same time:
Editing your mask shape

Masking a bounding box

This is masking off the rest of the solid. Under the properties for masking, there is a mask column where you can choose other parameters. This will hide your mask or give you different masking options.

Editing masks

You can take these basic shapes and make other more complex shapes. You can also change the color of the mask by clicking on the color box in the mask. After Effects also has other parameters that you can work with. Clicking on the mask gives you other parameters that can be edited. You can edit this mask by adjusting the feathering parameter. Adjusting the feathering amount means the outside of the mask will be feathered. Of course, the feathering is able to be key-framed. You can expand the mask as well. The expansion can also go the opposite direction, so you'll actually be eating into the mask in the negative direction. I'd like for you to experiment with all these mask-editing parameters.

Using the subtract-masking feature

Masking is a very powerful tool used for roto scoping and creating shapes. You have control over how your mask will behave, and you can choose to add or subtract from your mask shape. We will focus on the subtract feature:

  1. Drag another shape on top of the current solid shape.
  2. Find the new mask parameter on that solid in the lower-left side of the timeline.
  3. To the right of the mask is a tab called Add with an arrow pointing down. Click on that.
  4. Choose Subtract from that list:
Using the subtract-masking feature

Subtract mask

See how it cuts that shape out? This is how you can create interesting shapes in After Effects. Have a lot of fun with this; there's so much you can do with it—the sky's the limit! Masking becomes very important when you need to cut layers, videos, images, and so on. Think of layers as scissors to cut out what you don't want to see. I'd like for you guys to play with these shapes. Start editing these mask points. You can create complex interesting shapes with these techniques.

Editing masks

You can take these basic shapes and make other more complex shapes. You can also change the color of the mask by clicking on the color box in the mask. After Effects also has other parameters that you can work with. Clicking on the mask gives you other parameters that can be edited. You can edit this mask by adjusting the feathering parameter. Adjusting the feathering amount means the outside of the mask will be feathered. Of course, the feathering is able to be key-framed. You can expand the mask as well. The expansion can also go the opposite direction, so you'll actually be eating into the mask in the negative direction. I'd like for you to experiment with all these mask-editing parameters.

Using the subtract-masking feature

Masking is a very powerful tool used for roto scoping and creating shapes. You have control over how your mask will behave, and you can choose to add or subtract from your mask shape. We will focus on the subtract feature:

  1. Drag another shape on top of the current solid shape.
  2. Find the new mask parameter on that solid in the lower-left side of the timeline.
  3. To the right of the mask is a tab called Add with an arrow pointing down. Click on that.
  4. Choose Subtract from that list:
Using the subtract-masking feature

Subtract mask

See how it cuts that shape out? This is how you can create interesting shapes in After Effects. Have a lot of fun with this; there's so much you can do with it—the sky's the limit! Masking becomes very important when you need to cut layers, videos, images, and so on. Think of layers as scissors to cut out what you don't want to see. I'd like for you guys to play with these shapes. Start editing these mask points. You can create complex interesting shapes with these techniques.

Using the subtract-masking feature

Masking is a very powerful tool used for roto scoping and creating shapes. You have control over how your mask will behave, and you can choose to add or subtract from your mask shape. We will focus on the subtract feature:

  1. Drag another shape on top of the current solid shape.
  2. Find the new mask parameter on that solid in the lower-left side of the timeline.
  3. To the right of the mask is a tab called Add with an arrow pointing down. Click on that.
  4. Choose Subtract from that list:
Using the subtract-masking feature

Subtract mask

See how it cuts that shape out? This is how you can create interesting shapes in After Effects. Have a lot of fun with this; there's so much you can do with it—the sky's the limit! Masking becomes very important when you need to cut layers, videos, images, and so on. Think of layers as scissors to cut out what you don't want to see. I'd like for you guys to play with these shapes. Start editing these mask points. You can create complex interesting shapes with these techniques.

Creating an animated slideshow

After all the knowledge we have acquired so far, it is imperative that we put it to use. Let's make a simple animated slideshow, using the tips and tricks we have learned so far in this chapter. Follow these steps:

  1. Create a 1,920 x 1,080 comp and call it slideshow. Make the comp 20 seconds long.
  2. Move into the main comp folder.
  3. Import four photos (each with 1,920 x 1,080 dimensions).
  4. Put the photos into the image folder.
  5. Make a new solid: Layer | New solid. Call this back, and make the color black.
  6. Bring your first image into the timeline.
  7. Hit S to get your scale. Adjust this so your image fits in the frame.
  8. Spend some time adjusting your image in the comp. You may not need to adjust the scale. However, if you need to adjust the size of your image, press S to get the scale parameter.
  9. Scrub the scale parameter to get the desired size:
Creating an animated slideshow

Scaling an image

Let's add additional images to our slide show project. Follow these steps for adding images to your composition:

  1. Bring in a second image
  2. Adjust the scale
  3. Repeat these steps for the remaining images
  4. Select these layers and trim them so they are 3 seconds long

We are going trim our layers in the timeline. This will ensure that each image will be seen in the slide show for a certain amount of time:

Creating an animated slideshow

Trimming layers

Let's follow these steps to trim the layers:

  1. Select all layers to go to 3 second in the timeline
  2. Select Alt + R bracket/option + R bracket (macOS) to trim the layers, or you can drag the layers to trim them

It's important to understand how to trim your layers for this project and other projects we will work on. Make sure your layers are lined up and trimmed:

Creating an animated slideshow

Lining up the layers

After Effects has different types of assistance to help you with animation functions. We are going to use sequence layers. This will sort our layers across time. You can find this animation assistance on the top animation tab of your project window:

Creating an animated slideshow

Sequence layers

Select All layers | Animation | Keyframe Assistance | Sequence Layers....

Notice that After Effects takes your layers and sequences them across your timeline evenly! The next step for our slideshow is at the end:

Creating an animated slideshow

End of layer

The next step is to go 20 frames from the end of your layers (count backward from the end of the layer):

Creating an animated slideshow

20 key frames

Next we are going to create a fadeout animation for our images:

  1. Press T for the opacity parameter.
  2. Click on the stop watch for opacity. This creates a key frame, which is the first step of any animation.
  3. Go forward 20 key frames. Turn the opacity down to 0.

Your timeline should have two key frames. The first key frame is 100% opacity, and the last one will be 0% opacity.

You can test the animation by dragging the time indicator over the key frames. The image should be fading out:

Creating an animated slideshow

Opacity

To make the layer beneath this image fade on as the top image is fading off, we need to adjust this second image:

  1. Select the layer beneath the top layer.
  2. Drag your bottom layer, or choose Alt + L bracket to trim your layer to that point.

The top layer will begin to fade out as the layer shown next will appear or fade on:

Creating an animated slideshow

Adjusting the second layer

The goal is to have each photo fade into the next layer. This will happen over the course of 20 frames. It will be a slow fade. Repeat the preceding steps for each layer, and then proceed as follows:

  1. Add a black solid layer, for the background
  2. Move this layer to the bottom of the layers

    One of the most common things that new After Effects users forget to do is trim the work area at the end of a project:

    Creating an animated slideshow

    Slideshow trim work area

  3. Drag the blue bar over from the right.
  4. Drag this to the end of your layers, or move your time indicator at the end of your last layer and press the keyboard shortcut N, to trim the work area.

The final step is to preview your slideshow. Look for anything you'd like to adjust. You can always tweak any of the settings after creating a project.

Congratulations! You've created your first animated project in this book!

Press the space bar to preview your animated slideshow!

Summary

I hope you enjoyed your grand tour of After Effects. We learned about the interface and how to import, edit, and mask layers. Most importantly, we learned how to animate! The basics of animation is key as you work on projects. Grasping these fundamentals will propel you forward to understanding even more complex tools and concepts. Learning the interface and the basic animation are basic but important blocks for building your amazing future with motion graphics!

In Chapter 2, Creating a Lower Third for a Television Show, we will animate using the Easy Ease assistant. We will also work with null objects to animate a lower-third project. We will use masking and animation tools introduced in this chapter. You will also learn how to create type and how to use precomps.

Questions

  1. What are the steps for creating an animation?
  2. How do you trim or extend a layer in the timeline?
  3. How do you trim or extend the workspace area?
  4. Where are the safe guides located?
  5. How do you advance one key frame down the timeline?
  6. How do you preview your movie?
  7. How do you create a solid layer?
  8. Where are your masking shapes located?
  9. How do you edit one single masking point?
  10. How do you edit all the masking points at once?
  11. How do you apply the subtract masking?
  12. What is a key frame?
  13. How are key frames represented on the timeline?
  14. How are seconds represented on the timeline?

Chapter 2. Creating a Lower Third for a Television Show

In this chapter, we will create a television lower third. Lower thirds are used in television advertising. They provide information about a program. It is useful to know how to create lower thirds because understanding them helps you to understand how to design for television graphics. You will also learn about typography and how to work in the lower third of the screen.

The following topics will be covered in this chapter:

  • Designing with storyboards
  • Editing masks and using precomps
  • Nesting precomps and using the pen tool
  • Parenting and null object animations
  • Parenting null animations
  • Positioning a lower third
  • Adjusting colors
  • Adjusting masks
  • The type tool
  • Easy ease
  • Rendering options

Technical requirements

You must have Adobe Media Encoder and Adobe Bridge installed on your computer.

The technical requirements for this chapter are the same as Chapter 1, Getting Started with After Effects.

Purchase of this book comes with project files for each chapter, so you can learn as you follow along. Follow the links below to download the project files.

Password link:

http://www.daviddodds.net/password.html

Download link:

http://daviddodds.net/login.php?redirect=/after-effects-intro-assets.html

Animating a television lower third with precomps and null objects

In this segment, we will learn about precomps. This is a very important part of After Effects. It helps you to create complex animations quickly. Once you understand it, we will be able to create a lower third project with more complex layers.

Designing with storyboards

An important part of this book is knowing how to design strong compositions. In this chapter, you will create a lower third. Let's now walk through how this project is designed. In designing any project, the ideation stage is really important; it is when you're generating ideas and developing concepts for the project. It's very important to stay organized during the idea-generating phase. I use Adobe Bridge for this. You can bring in photos and videos, and organize them in Adobe Bridge. You can also label and organize them in a variety of ways.

All design projects have parameters. Ask yourself what the criteria are for your project. When you're creating a project, it's important to know your audience and know where your video will be seen. This will help you to design a project that is appropriate for your audience. Bear this in mind, particularly when you are choosing fonts, colors and images. Ask yourself: is the design legible?

The following screenshot shows a storyboard; you can use this to plan out your ideas for your project. It can be a very basic storyboard to help you organize and plan your project. When you design your storyboard, you have an opportunity to see whether your typography and images work well together. You need to make sure that your designs are readable and can be communicated effectively:

Designing with storyboards

Adobe Bridge

Refer to the following link to find out more about television lower thirds: https://www.jbistudios.com/blog/lower-thirds-chyrons-subtitles-dubbing-video-translation.

Editing masks and using precomps

Let's begin our television lower third. Look at the following screenshot; this is what we're creating. We are creating the 6:30 portion of this project right now:

Editing masks and using precomps

Final image

To begin with, we are going to create a compostion (comp) with solid layers and edit those solid layers with masking techniques, as follows:

  1. Create a new 1920 x 1080 comp with a frame rate of 29.97.
  2. Make the comp 9 seconds—0:00:09:00. Name it pattern.
  3. Go to Layer | New | Solid, and change the color to blue.
  4. Create a circle shape using the ellipse tool.
  5. Drag another ellipse on to the comp layer.
  6. Choose a subtract mask:
    Editing masks and using precomps

    Subtract mask

  7. This will allow you to cut out a shape inside your first mask.
  8. Choose the Pan Behind Tool. This will allow to move your anchor point, and you can transform around this point.
  9. Scale down the layer.
  10. Move it up into the top-left corner.
  11. Duplicate this layer.
  12. Reposition this layer as seen in the following example:
  13. Repeat this process until you have at least six circle shapes in your composition.

Just like Photoshop, you can put a variety of assets in one folder in After Effects. In After Effects, this is called precomposing. It's a simple process to precompose something. However, the concept behind it is a little more complicated. The way to precompose the objects in our scene is to have a transparent background and select everything in your composition.

Go to the Layer tab in the top-left panel of the screen and choose the Pre-compose... option:

Editing masks and using precomps

Pre-comp 1

When you precompose something, you get a dialog box. This gives you the option to name your precomp. Choose the option to move all of your attributes into the new composition, as demonstrated in the following screenshot:

Editing masks and using precomps

Pre-comp 2

Nesting precomps and using the pen tool

Let's create a background for your shapes, as follows:

  • Go to the top-left panel and choose Layer | New | Solid
  • Move this new Solid layer to the bottom of your composition layer
  • Next, create a main comp in which to move all of your assets

After creating a new composition, name it Main comp, and then we can apply the same settings as we did in our first comp.

To move a precomp into another composition, simply locate the precomp in your project window and drag it down into your Main comp:

Nesting precomps and using the pen tool

Dragging the precomp

Now, you should see one precomp in your Main comp. Let's adjust this precomp further. Select your pen tool, as demonstrated in the following screenshot:

Nesting precomps and using the pen tool

Pen tool

We will use the pen tool to mask out a shape on your precomp. To use the pen tool, you simply select the layer you want to use the pen tool on. In this case, it's the precomp. Click the pen icon at the desired starting point of your mask.

Move your pen tool to the next desired point, and click again. When you're ready to close the shape, hover near the point you want to close it at. You'll see a small circle icon near the pen tool, meaning that you can close the shape. When you've completed masking this precomp, it should look like the following screenshot:

Nesting precomps and using the pen tool

Masking a precomp

Next, I will create another composition for the additional shapes that I will use for my lower third. Create a new composition with the same dimensions and time length as our previous comp. I am essentially going to repeat the exact same process that I did with the previous shapes I created. This time, however, I'm going to use the rectangle tool to make some shapes.

With these new shapes, we won't be using the subtraction mask feature. We're making a series of rectangle shapes and organizing them to create a pattern, as shown in the following screenshot:

Nesting precomps and using the pen tool

Creating a rectangle pattern

Next, we are going to precompose these new shapes using the following steps:

  1. Simply select all the rectangle shapes and choose composition precompose. When you precompose something, a dialog box appears. This gives you options to name your precomp.
  2. Choose the Move all attributes into the new composition option.
  3. The next step is to create a background for your shapes. Go to Layer | New | Solid, and make the color yellow.

Since this will be the background for our design, you need to move this new Solid layer to the bottom of the stacking order.

Now that you have a new design, you need to move it into the Main comp. The steps for moving a precomp into your Main comp are as follows:

  1. Navigate to the Main composition in your project folder. Double-click on Main comp.
  2. Find the precomp in your Precomp folder and drag it into the Main comp.

It's very important to stay organized at this point because it will be easy for you to identify where all of your precomps are. When you make a new comp that's not the Main comp, put it into the Precomp folder immediately. The only composition that should be in your Main comp folder is the main composition. This is the composition that you intend to export/render.

Repeat the same process as before, and use the pen tool to mask off around the design in the Main comp:

Nesting precomps and using the pen tool

Masking the second pattern

Designing with storyboards

An important part of this book is knowing how to design strong compositions. In this chapter, you will create a lower third. Let's now walk through how this project is designed. In designing any project, the ideation stage is really important; it is when you're generating ideas and developing concepts for the project. It's very important to stay organized during the idea-generating phase. I use Adobe Bridge for this. You can bring in photos and videos, and organize them in Adobe Bridge. You can also label and organize them in a variety of ways.

All design projects have parameters. Ask yourself what the criteria are for your project. When you're creating a project, it's important to know your audience and know where your video will be seen. This will help you to design a project that is appropriate for your audience. Bear this in mind, particularly when you are choosing fonts, colors and images. Ask yourself: is the design legible?

The following screenshot shows a storyboard; you can use this to plan out your ideas for your project. It can be a very basic storyboard to help you organize and plan your project. When you design your storyboard, you have an opportunity to see whether your typography and images work well together. You need to make sure that your designs are readable and can be communicated effectively:

Designing with storyboards

Adobe Bridge

Refer to the following link to find out more about television lower thirds: https://www.jbistudios.com/blog/lower-thirds-chyrons-subtitles-dubbing-video-translation.

Editing masks and using precomps

Let's begin our television lower third. Look at the following screenshot; this is what we're creating. We are creating the 6:30 portion of this project right now:

Editing masks and using precomps

Final image

To begin with, we are going to create a compostion (comp) with solid layers and edit those solid layers with masking techniques, as follows:

  1. Create a new 1920 x 1080 comp with a frame rate of 29.97.
  2. Make the comp 9 seconds—0:00:09:00. Name it pattern.
  3. Go to Layer | New | Solid, and change the color to blue.
  4. Create a circle shape using the ellipse tool.
  5. Drag another ellipse on to the comp layer.
  6. Choose a subtract mask:
    Editing masks and using precomps

    Subtract mask

  7. This will allow you to cut out a shape inside your first mask.
  8. Choose the Pan Behind Tool. This will allow to move your anchor point, and you can transform around this point.
  9. Scale down the layer.
  10. Move it up into the top-left corner.
  11. Duplicate this layer.
  12. Reposition this layer as seen in the following example:
  13. Repeat this process until you have at least six circle shapes in your composition.

Just like Photoshop, you can put a variety of assets in one folder in After Effects. In After Effects, this is called precomposing. It's a simple process to precompose something. However, the concept behind it is a little more complicated. The way to precompose the objects in our scene is to have a transparent background and select everything in your composition.

Go to the Layer tab in the top-left panel of the screen and choose the Pre-compose... option:

Editing masks and using precomps

Pre-comp 1

When you precompose something, you get a dialog box. This gives you the option to name your precomp. Choose the option to move all of your attributes into the new composition, as demonstrated in the following screenshot:

Editing masks and using precomps

Pre-comp 2

Nesting precomps and using the pen tool

Let's create a background for your shapes, as follows:

  • Go to the top-left panel and choose Layer | New | Solid
  • Move this new Solid layer to the bottom of your composition layer
  • Next, create a main comp in which to move all of your assets

After creating a new composition, name it Main comp, and then we can apply the same settings as we did in our first comp.

To move a precomp into another composition, simply locate the precomp in your project window and drag it down into your Main comp:

Nesting precomps and using the pen tool

Dragging the precomp

Now, you should see one precomp in your Main comp. Let's adjust this precomp further. Select your pen tool, as demonstrated in the following screenshot:

Nesting precomps and using the pen tool

Pen tool

We will use the pen tool to mask out a shape on your precomp. To use the pen tool, you simply select the layer you want to use the pen tool on. In this case, it's the precomp. Click the pen icon at the desired starting point of your mask.

Move your pen tool to the next desired point, and click again. When you're ready to close the shape, hover near the point you want to close it at. You'll see a small circle icon near the pen tool, meaning that you can close the shape. When you've completed masking this precomp, it should look like the following screenshot:

Nesting precomps and using the pen tool

Masking a precomp

Next, I will create another composition for the additional shapes that I will use for my lower third. Create a new composition with the same dimensions and time length as our previous comp. I am essentially going to repeat the exact same process that I did with the previous shapes I created. This time, however, I'm going to use the rectangle tool to make some shapes.

With these new shapes, we won't be using the subtraction mask feature. We're making a series of rectangle shapes and organizing them to create a pattern, as shown in the following screenshot:

Nesting precomps and using the pen tool

Creating a rectangle pattern

Next, we are going to precompose these new shapes using the following steps:

  1. Simply select all the rectangle shapes and choose composition precompose. When you precompose something, a dialog box appears. This gives you options to name your precomp.
  2. Choose the Move all attributes into the new composition option.
  3. The next step is to create a background for your shapes. Go to Layer | New | Solid, and make the color yellow.

Since this will be the background for our design, you need to move this new Solid layer to the bottom of the stacking order.

Now that you have a new design, you need to move it into the Main comp. The steps for moving a precomp into your Main comp are as follows:

  1. Navigate to the Main composition in your project folder. Double-click on Main comp.
  2. Find the precomp in your Precomp folder and drag it into the Main comp.

It's very important to stay organized at this point because it will be easy for you to identify where all of your precomps are. When you make a new comp that's not the Main comp, put it into the Precomp folder immediately. The only composition that should be in your Main comp folder is the main composition. This is the composition that you intend to export/render.

Repeat the same process as before, and use the pen tool to mask off around the design in the Main comp:

Nesting precomps and using the pen tool

Masking the second pattern

Editing masks and using precomps

Let's begin our television lower third. Look at the following screenshot; this is what we're creating. We are creating the 6:30 portion of this project right now:

Editing masks and using precomps

Final image

To begin with, we are going to create a compostion (comp) with solid layers and edit those solid layers with masking techniques, as follows:

  1. Create a new 1920 x 1080 comp with a frame rate of 29.97.
  2. Make the comp 9 seconds—0:00:09:00. Name it pattern.
  3. Go to Layer | New | Solid, and change the color to blue.
  4. Create a circle shape using the ellipse tool.
  5. Drag another ellipse on to the comp layer.
  6. Choose a subtract mask:
    Editing masks and using precomps

    Subtract mask

  7. This will allow you to cut out a shape inside your first mask.
  8. Choose the Pan Behind Tool. This will allow to move your anchor point, and you can transform around this point.
  9. Scale down the layer.
  10. Move it up into the top-left corner.
  11. Duplicate this layer.
  12. Reposition this layer as seen in the following example:
  13. Repeat this process until you have at least six circle shapes in your composition.

Just like Photoshop, you can put a variety of assets in one folder in After Effects. In After Effects, this is called precomposing. It's a simple process to precompose something. However, the concept behind it is a little more complicated. The way to precompose the objects in our scene is to have a transparent background and select everything in your composition.

Go to the Layer tab in the top-left panel of the screen and choose the Pre-compose... option:

Editing masks and using precomps

Pre-comp 1

When you precompose something, you get a dialog box. This gives you the option to name your precomp. Choose the option to move all of your attributes into the new composition, as demonstrated in the following screenshot:

Editing masks and using precomps

Pre-comp 2

Nesting precomps and using the pen tool

Let's create a background for your shapes, as follows:

  • Go to the top-left panel and choose Layer | New | Solid
  • Move this new Solid layer to the bottom of your composition layer
  • Next, create a main comp in which to move all of your assets

After creating a new composition, name it Main comp, and then we can apply the same settings as we did in our first comp.

To move a precomp into another composition, simply locate the precomp in your project window and drag it down into your Main comp:

Nesting precomps and using the pen tool

Dragging the precomp

Now, you should see one precomp in your Main comp. Let's adjust this precomp further. Select your pen tool, as demonstrated in the following screenshot:

Nesting precomps and using the pen tool

Pen tool

We will use the pen tool to mask out a shape on your precomp. To use the pen tool, you simply select the layer you want to use the pen tool on. In this case, it's the precomp. Click the pen icon at the desired starting point of your mask.

Move your pen tool to the next desired point, and click again. When you're ready to close the shape, hover near the point you want to close it at. You'll see a small circle icon near the pen tool, meaning that you can close the shape. When you've completed masking this precomp, it should look like the following screenshot:

Nesting precomps and using the pen tool

Masking a precomp

Next, I will create another composition for the additional shapes that I will use for my lower third. Create a new composition with the same dimensions and time length as our previous comp. I am essentially going to repeat the exact same process that I did with the previous shapes I created. This time, however, I'm going to use the rectangle tool to make some shapes.

With these new shapes, we won't be using the subtraction mask feature. We're making a series of rectangle shapes and organizing them to create a pattern, as shown in the following screenshot:

Nesting precomps and using the pen tool

Creating a rectangle pattern

Next, we are going to precompose these new shapes using the following steps:

  1. Simply select all the rectangle shapes and choose composition precompose. When you precompose something, a dialog box appears. This gives you options to name your precomp.
  2. Choose the Move all attributes into the new composition option.
  3. The next step is to create a background for your shapes. Go to Layer | New | Solid, and make the color yellow.

Since this will be the background for our design, you need to move this new Solid layer to the bottom of the stacking order.

Now that you have a new design, you need to move it into the Main comp. The steps for moving a precomp into your Main comp are as follows:

  1. Navigate to the Main composition in your project folder. Double-click on Main comp.
  2. Find the precomp in your Precomp folder and drag it into the Main comp.

It's very important to stay organized at this point because it will be easy for you to identify where all of your precomps are. When you make a new comp that's not the Main comp, put it into the Precomp folder immediately. The only composition that should be in your Main comp folder is the main composition. This is the composition that you intend to export/render.

Repeat the same process as before, and use the pen tool to mask off around the design in the Main comp:

Nesting precomps and using the pen tool

Masking the second pattern

Nesting precomps and using the pen tool

Let's create a background for your shapes, as follows:

  • Go to the top-left panel and choose Layer | New | Solid
  • Move this new Solid layer to the bottom of your composition layer
  • Next, create a main comp in which to move all of your assets

After creating a new composition, name it Main comp, and then we can apply the same settings as we did in our first comp.

To move a precomp into another composition, simply locate the precomp in your project window and drag it down into your Main comp:

Nesting precomps and using the pen tool

Dragging the precomp

Now, you should see one precomp in your Main comp. Let's adjust this precomp further. Select your pen tool, as demonstrated in the following screenshot:

Nesting precomps and using the pen tool

Pen tool

We will use the pen tool to mask out a shape on your precomp. To use the pen tool, you simply select the layer you want to use the pen tool on. In this case, it's the precomp. Click the pen icon at the desired starting point of your mask.

Move your pen tool to the next desired point, and click again. When you're ready to close the shape, hover near the point you want to close it at. You'll see a small circle icon near the pen tool, meaning that you can close the shape. When you've completed masking this precomp, it should look like the following screenshot:

Nesting precomps and using the pen tool

Masking a precomp

Next, I will create another composition for the additional shapes that I will use for my lower third. Create a new composition with the same dimensions and time length as our previous comp. I am essentially going to repeat the exact same process that I did with the previous shapes I created. This time, however, I'm going to use the rectangle tool to make some shapes.

With these new shapes, we won't be using the subtraction mask feature. We're making a series of rectangle shapes and organizing them to create a pattern, as shown in the following screenshot:

Nesting precomps and using the pen tool

Creating a rectangle pattern

Next, we are going to precompose these new shapes using the following steps:

  1. Simply select all the rectangle shapes and choose composition precompose. When you precompose something, a dialog box appears. This gives you options to name your precomp.
  2. Choose the Move all attributes into the new composition option.
  3. The next step is to create a background for your shapes. Go to Layer | New | Solid, and make the color yellow.

Since this will be the background for our design, you need to move this new Solid layer to the bottom of the stacking order.

Now that you have a new design, you need to move it into the Main comp. The steps for moving a precomp into your Main comp are as follows:

  1. Navigate to the Main composition in your project folder. Double-click on Main comp.
  2. Find the precomp in your Precomp folder and drag it into the Main comp.

It's very important to stay organized at this point because it will be easy for you to identify where all of your precomps are. When you make a new comp that's not the Main comp, put it into the Precomp folder immediately. The only composition that should be in your Main comp folder is the main composition. This is the composition that you intend to export/render.

Repeat the same process as before, and use the pen tool to mask off around the design in the Main comp:

Nesting precomps and using the pen tool

Masking the second pattern

Animations, nulls, text, and rendering

In this section, we will learn how to animate using Null objects. We will also learn about rendering our projects.

Parenting and Null object animations

Now, we are going to animate our designs. We have created designs that live in the Precomp folder. Double-click on the first precomp you made. In this precomp, you have a nested comp and a Solid layer that you made for your background. Select and center the top precomposed shape layer:

  1. Press the R button to reveal the Rotation parameters
  2. Go to the left-side of the panel, and hit the stopwatch for the Rotation parameter
  3. Move 90 key frames down to the right in the timeline
  4. Scrub the Rotation parameter

This will automatically create a key frame, as shown in the following screenshot:

Parenting and Null object animations

Animation rotation

Go back into the Main comp, and press the spacebar to preview your animation. Give yourself a pat on the back for creating your first animation! Let's animate the next pattern precomp that we created by observing the following steps:

  1. In the Main comp, double-click on the remaining pattern precomp.
  2. Let's animate this precomp using the same steps that we previously used. We will animate by using the Position parameter.
  3. Animate this Pattern layer so that it's moving to the right.
  4. Hit P for Position.
  5. Go to the beginning of the timeline.
  6. Hit the Position stopwatch.
  7. Go down the timeline 90 key frames.
  8. Scrub the Position parameter.

You should see the rectangle shapes moving to the right, as seen in the following screenshot:

Parenting and Null object animations

Animation position

Let's jump back to the Main comp and preview our animation. Press the spacebar to preview our work:

  1. In the Main comp, let's import a 1920 x 1080 image to use for our background in the lower third project
  2. Drag the background image into the Main comp
  3. Bring this image to the bottom layer in the timeline
  4. Re-scale the image, if necessary

Parenting null animations

Another animation technique that I want to introduce you to is called parenting animation. Through the process of parenting, any layer you parent to another layer will follow the movement or animation of that layer. In the process of parenting, you will have a parent and a child. A child is anything that is connected to, or parented by, the parent. The child is able to move freely. However, it will always be connected and thus move with the parent. Using a parenting animation, we can create a complex secondary animation. We are going to parent our two shape layers to a Null object. The Null object is a layer that is essentially invisible. However, this Null object can be animated and things can be parented to it.

The following are the steps to create a parenting animation:

  1. Create a Null object by going up to the Layer tab and choose a new Null object.
  2. Select the two precomped animated patterns.
  3. Look to the right of the layers for the Parent & Link tab. Look for the coil icon.
  4. Click and drag on the coil icon (this is called pick whip).
  5. Pick whip this coil to the Null object, as demonstrated in the following screenshot:
    Parenting null animations

    Parenting

Parenting

After parenting these objects to the Null object, you will see the word Null in the Parent & Link tab for both of these layers. This means that these layers will move where the null moves. Just like any layer, this null will animate along the anchor point. That's the first thing we want to adjust. Make sure it's in the correct center position. Use the Null object to scale down both precomps. Hit S for the scale parameter and scale the objects down. Move the objects to the lower area of the composition, as seen in the following screenshot. Position the objects in a layout that is similar to the following screenshot. You can position the objects by selecting them on the composition window or you can hit P for Position and scrub the Position parameter in the timeline. You can also adjust each object's scale independent of the Null object. Adjust your masks for your precomps if necessary. The adjusting of these objects doesn't affect the parenting relationship. As stated earlier, the children are parented and obey the parent, but they are free to move on their own:

Parenting

Adjusting the mask

Positioning a lower third

Now, we are going to create a basic shape with no animation on it. You will have two precomps with animated shapes on it and one solid layer without any shapes on it.

Creating a dark blue solid layer

In this project, we are building our lower thirds from solid layers. We will add another Solid layer to our project and use the Parenting tool to connect it to our Null object, as follows:

  1. Use the pen tool to create a triangle shape.
  2. Adjust the Position parameter of your object further.
  3. Move this new object to beneath the two shapes. Adjust the mask for this Solid layer and reposition it, if necessary.
  4. Parent this object to the Null object.
  5. Select the triangle shape and look to the right of the layer for the Parent & Link tab. Look for the coil icon.

    Click and drag on the pick whip coil.

  6. Pick whip this coil to the Null object, as demonstrated in the following screenshot:
    Creating a dark blue solid layer

    Using the pick whip

The triangle pick whip

Now that we have all our objects parented to the Null object, we can animate them. Let's animate our lower third onto the screen using the null object, as follows:

  1. Select the Null object.
  2. Hit P for Position.
  3. Move down in the timeline about 30 key frames.
  4. Trim your work area to this point (hit N).
  5. Hit the Position stopwatch for the Null object.
  6. Move back to the beginning of the timeline.
  7. Select the Null object.
  8. Scrub the Null object Position parameter so that the lower third is moving off screen.
  9. Moving this at an angle, you will see a motion path line proceeding at a diagonal angle, as demonstrated in the following screenshot. Preview your animation:
    The triangle pick whip

    The position of an animation null object

Now that you have your objects moving on the screen, you are going to create a secondary animation. We are going to animate the children of the parented object independently. Creating this type of offset movement will enhance the visual interest of the object, and is executed as follows:

  1. Go 10 key frames after the last key frame of the Null object in the timeline.
  2. Select one of the precomped objects on the far left-hand side of the screen.
  3. Hit P for the Position parameter.
  4. Hit the Position stopwatch.
  5. Go about 10 key frames down from the first key frame.
  6. Animate the shape going off screen at an angle, as demonstrated in the following screenshot.
  7. Preview your animation, as follows:
    The triangle pick whip

    Animating the first object at an angle

This will create an offset animation for the object. A motion path shows the direction that your object is taking. If you notice when you animate the position of an object, a motion path appears in the composition window. This path is a dotted line, called a motion path. Apply this offset animation technique to the other solid shape. Motion paths are important for understanding your movement and timing. Timing is everything in animation. One way to control the speed of your animation is where your key frames are in the timeline. You can adjust your key frames by selecting them and sliding them in the timeline. Your key frames should look similar to the following screenshot:

The triangle pick whip

An offset animation for the additional object

Parenting and Null object animations

Now, we are going to animate our designs. We have created designs that live in the Precomp folder. Double-click on the first precomp you made. In this precomp, you have a nested comp and a Solid layer that you made for your background. Select and center the top precomposed shape layer:

  1. Press the R button to reveal the Rotation parameters
  2. Go to the left-side of the panel, and hit the stopwatch for the Rotation parameter
  3. Move 90 key frames down to the right in the timeline
  4. Scrub the Rotation parameter

This will automatically create a key frame, as shown in the following screenshot:

Parenting and Null object animations

Animation rotation

Go back into the Main comp, and press the spacebar to preview your animation. Give yourself a pat on the back for creating your first animation! Let's animate the next pattern precomp that we created by observing the following steps:

  1. In the Main comp, double-click on the remaining pattern precomp.
  2. Let's animate this precomp using the same steps that we previously used. We will animate by using the Position parameter.
  3. Animate this Pattern layer so that it's moving to the right.
  4. Hit P for Position.
  5. Go to the beginning of the timeline.
  6. Hit the Position stopwatch.
  7. Go down the timeline 90 key frames.
  8. Scrub the Position parameter.

You should see the rectangle shapes moving to the right, as seen in the following screenshot:

Parenting and Null object animations

Animation position

Let's jump back to the Main comp and preview our animation. Press the spacebar to preview our work:

  1. In the Main comp, let's import a 1920 x 1080 image to use for our background in the lower third project
  2. Drag the background image into the Main comp
  3. Bring this image to the bottom layer in the timeline
  4. Re-scale the image, if necessary

Parenting null animations

Another animation technique that I want to introduce you to is called parenting animation. Through the process of parenting, any layer you parent to another layer will follow the movement or animation of that layer. In the process of parenting, you will have a parent and a child. A child is anything that is connected to, or parented by, the parent. The child is able to move freely. However, it will always be connected and thus move with the parent. Using a parenting animation, we can create a complex secondary animation. We are going to parent our two shape layers to a Null object. The Null object is a layer that is essentially invisible. However, this Null object can be animated and things can be parented to it.

The following are the steps to create a parenting animation:

  1. Create a Null object by going up to the Layer tab and choose a new Null object.
  2. Select the two precomped animated patterns.
  3. Look to the right of the layers for the Parent & Link tab. Look for the coil icon.
  4. Click and drag on the coil icon (this is called pick whip).
  5. Pick whip this coil to the Null object, as demonstrated in the following screenshot:
    Parenting null animations

    Parenting

Parenting

After parenting these objects to the Null object, you will see the word Null in the Parent & Link tab for both of these layers. This means that these layers will move where the null moves. Just like any layer, this null will animate along the anchor point. That's the first thing we want to adjust. Make sure it's in the correct center position. Use the Null object to scale down both precomps. Hit S for the scale parameter and scale the objects down. Move the objects to the lower area of the composition, as seen in the following screenshot. Position the objects in a layout that is similar to the following screenshot. You can position the objects by selecting them on the composition window or you can hit P for Position and scrub the Position parameter in the timeline. You can also adjust each object's scale independent of the Null object. Adjust your masks for your precomps if necessary. The adjusting of these objects doesn't affect the parenting relationship. As stated earlier, the children are parented and obey the parent, but they are free to move on their own:

Parenting

Adjusting the mask

Positioning a lower third

Now, we are going to create a basic shape with no animation on it. You will have two precomps with animated shapes on it and one solid layer without any shapes on it.

Creating a dark blue solid layer

In this project, we are building our lower thirds from solid layers. We will add another Solid layer to our project and use the Parenting tool to connect it to our Null object, as follows:

  1. Use the pen tool to create a triangle shape.
  2. Adjust the Position parameter of your object further.
  3. Move this new object to beneath the two shapes. Adjust the mask for this Solid layer and reposition it, if necessary.
  4. Parent this object to the Null object.
  5. Select the triangle shape and look to the right of the layer for the Parent & Link tab. Look for the coil icon.

    Click and drag on the pick whip coil.

  6. Pick whip this coil to the Null object, as demonstrated in the following screenshot:
    Creating a dark blue solid layer

    Using the pick whip

The triangle pick whip

Now that we have all our objects parented to the Null object, we can animate them. Let's animate our lower third onto the screen using the null object, as follows:

  1. Select the Null object.
  2. Hit P for Position.
  3. Move down in the timeline about 30 key frames.
  4. Trim your work area to this point (hit N).
  5. Hit the Position stopwatch for the Null object.
  6. Move back to the beginning of the timeline.
  7. Select the Null object.
  8. Scrub the Null object Position parameter so that the lower third is moving off screen.
  9. Moving this at an angle, you will see a motion path line proceeding at a diagonal angle, as demonstrated in the following screenshot. Preview your animation:
    The triangle pick whip

    The position of an animation null object

Now that you have your objects moving on the screen, you are going to create a secondary animation. We are going to animate the children of the parented object independently. Creating this type of offset movement will enhance the visual interest of the object, and is executed as follows:

  1. Go 10 key frames after the last key frame of the Null object in the timeline.
  2. Select one of the precomped objects on the far left-hand side of the screen.
  3. Hit P for the Position parameter.
  4. Hit the Position stopwatch.
  5. Go about 10 key frames down from the first key frame.
  6. Animate the shape going off screen at an angle, as demonstrated in the following screenshot.
  7. Preview your animation, as follows:
    The triangle pick whip

    Animating the first object at an angle

This will create an offset animation for the object. A motion path shows the direction that your object is taking. If you notice when you animate the position of an object, a motion path appears in the composition window. This path is a dotted line, called a motion path. Apply this offset animation technique to the other solid shape. Motion paths are important for understanding your movement and timing. Timing is everything in animation. One way to control the speed of your animation is where your key frames are in the timeline. You can adjust your key frames by selecting them and sliding them in the timeline. Your key frames should look similar to the following screenshot:

The triangle pick whip

An offset animation for the additional object

Parenting null animations

Another animation technique that I want to introduce you to is called parenting animation. Through the process of parenting, any layer you parent to another layer will follow the movement or animation of that layer. In the process of parenting, you will have a parent and a child. A child is anything that is connected to, or parented by, the parent. The child is able to move freely. However, it will always be connected and thus move with the parent. Using a parenting animation, we can create a complex secondary animation. We are going to parent our two shape layers to a Null object. The Null object is a layer that is essentially invisible. However, this Null object can be animated and things can be parented to it.

The following are the steps to create a parenting animation:

  1. Create a Null object by going up to the Layer tab and choose a new Null object.
  2. Select the two precomped animated patterns.
  3. Look to the right of the layers for the Parent & Link tab. Look for the coil icon.
  4. Click and drag on the coil icon (this is called pick whip).
  5. Pick whip this coil to the Null object, as demonstrated in the following screenshot:
    Parenting null animations

    Parenting

Parenting

After parenting these objects to the Null object, you will see the word Null in the Parent & Link tab for both of these layers. This means that these layers will move where the null moves. Just like any layer, this null will animate along the anchor point. That's the first thing we want to adjust. Make sure it's in the correct center position. Use the Null object to scale down both precomps. Hit S for the scale parameter and scale the objects down. Move the objects to the lower area of the composition, as seen in the following screenshot. Position the objects in a layout that is similar to the following screenshot. You can position the objects by selecting them on the composition window or you can hit P for Position and scrub the Position parameter in the timeline. You can also adjust each object's scale independent of the Null object. Adjust your masks for your precomps if necessary. The adjusting of these objects doesn't affect the parenting relationship. As stated earlier, the children are parented and obey the parent, but they are free to move on their own:

Parenting

Adjusting the mask

Positioning a lower third

Now, we are going to create a basic shape with no animation on it. You will have two precomps with animated shapes on it and one solid layer without any shapes on it.

Creating a dark blue solid layer

In this project, we are building our lower thirds from solid layers. We will add another Solid layer to our project and use the Parenting tool to connect it to our Null object, as follows:

  1. Use the pen tool to create a triangle shape.
  2. Adjust the Position parameter of your object further.
  3. Move this new object to beneath the two shapes. Adjust the mask for this Solid layer and reposition it, if necessary.
  4. Parent this object to the Null object.
  5. Select the triangle shape and look to the right of the layer for the Parent & Link tab. Look for the coil icon.

    Click and drag on the pick whip coil.

  6. Pick whip this coil to the Null object, as demonstrated in the following screenshot:
    Creating a dark blue solid layer

    Using the pick whip

The triangle pick whip

Now that we have all our objects parented to the Null object, we can animate them. Let's animate our lower third onto the screen using the null object, as follows:

  1. Select the Null object.
  2. Hit P for Position.
  3. Move down in the timeline about 30 key frames.
  4. Trim your work area to this point (hit N).
  5. Hit the Position stopwatch for the Null object.
  6. Move back to the beginning of the timeline.
  7. Select the Null object.
  8. Scrub the Null object Position parameter so that the lower third is moving off screen.
  9. Moving this at an angle, you will see a motion path line proceeding at a diagonal angle, as demonstrated in the following screenshot. Preview your animation:
    The triangle pick whip

    The position of an animation null object

Now that you have your objects moving on the screen, you are going to create a secondary animation. We are going to animate the children of the parented object independently. Creating this type of offset movement will enhance the visual interest of the object, and is executed as follows:

  1. Go 10 key frames after the last key frame of the Null object in the timeline.
  2. Select one of the precomped objects on the far left-hand side of the screen.
  3. Hit P for the Position parameter.
  4. Hit the Position stopwatch.
  5. Go about 10 key frames down from the first key frame.
  6. Animate the shape going off screen at an angle, as demonstrated in the following screenshot.
  7. Preview your animation, as follows:
    The triangle pick whip

    Animating the first object at an angle

This will create an offset animation for the object. A motion path shows the direction that your object is taking. If you notice when you animate the position of an object, a motion path appears in the composition window. This path is a dotted line, called a motion path. Apply this offset animation technique to the other solid shape. Motion paths are important for understanding your movement and timing. Timing is everything in animation. One way to control the speed of your animation is where your key frames are in the timeline. You can adjust your key frames by selecting them and sliding them in the timeline. Your key frames should look similar to the following screenshot:

The triangle pick whip

An offset animation for the additional object

Parenting

After parenting these objects to the Null object, you will see the word Null in the Parent & Link tab for both of these layers. This means that these layers will move where the null moves. Just like any layer, this null will animate along the anchor point. That's the first thing we want to adjust. Make sure it's in the correct center position. Use the Null object to scale down both precomps. Hit S for the scale parameter and scale the objects down. Move the objects to the lower area of the composition, as seen in the following screenshot. Position the objects in a layout that is similar to the following screenshot. You can position the objects by selecting them on the composition window or you can hit P for Position and scrub the Position parameter in the timeline. You can also adjust each object's scale independent of the Null object. Adjust your masks for your precomps if necessary. The adjusting of these objects doesn't affect the parenting relationship. As stated earlier, the children are parented and obey the parent, but they are free to move on their own:

Parenting

Adjusting the mask

Positioning a lower third

Now, we are going to create a basic shape with no animation on it. You will have two precomps with animated shapes on it and one solid layer without any shapes on it.

Creating a dark blue solid layer

In this project, we are building our lower thirds from solid layers. We will add another Solid layer to our project and use the Parenting tool to connect it to our Null object, as follows:

  1. Use the pen tool to create a triangle shape.
  2. Adjust the Position parameter of your object further.
  3. Move this new object to beneath the two shapes. Adjust the mask for this Solid layer and reposition it, if necessary.
  4. Parent this object to the Null object.
  5. Select the triangle shape and look to the right of the layer for the Parent & Link tab. Look for the coil icon.

    Click and drag on the pick whip coil.

  6. Pick whip this coil to the Null object, as demonstrated in the following screenshot:
    Creating a dark blue solid layer

    Using the pick whip

The triangle pick whip

Now that we have all our objects parented to the Null object, we can animate them. Let's animate our lower third onto the screen using the null object, as follows:

  1. Select the Null object.
  2. Hit P for Position.
  3. Move down in the timeline about 30 key frames.
  4. Trim your work area to this point (hit N).
  5. Hit the Position stopwatch for the Null object.
  6. Move back to the beginning of the timeline.
  7. Select the Null object.
  8. Scrub the Null object Position parameter so that the lower third is moving off screen.
  9. Moving this at an angle, you will see a motion path line proceeding at a diagonal angle, as demonstrated in the following screenshot. Preview your animation:
    The triangle pick whip

    The position of an animation null object

Now that you have your objects moving on the screen, you are going to create a secondary animation. We are going to animate the children of the parented object independently. Creating this type of offset movement will enhance the visual interest of the object, and is executed as follows:

  1. Go 10 key frames after the last key frame of the Null object in the timeline.
  2. Select one of the precomped objects on the far left-hand side of the screen.
  3. Hit P for the Position parameter.
  4. Hit the Position stopwatch.
  5. Go about 10 key frames down from the first key frame.
  6. Animate the shape going off screen at an angle, as demonstrated in the following screenshot.
  7. Preview your animation, as follows:
    The triangle pick whip

    Animating the first object at an angle

This will create an offset animation for the object. A motion path shows the direction that your object is taking. If you notice when you animate the position of an object, a motion path appears in the composition window. This path is a dotted line, called a motion path. Apply this offset animation technique to the other solid shape. Motion paths are important for understanding your movement and timing. Timing is everything in animation. One way to control the speed of your animation is where your key frames are in the timeline. You can adjust your key frames by selecting them and sliding them in the timeline. Your key frames should look similar to the following screenshot:

The triangle pick whip

An offset animation for the additional object

Positioning a lower third

Now, we are going to create a basic shape with no animation on it. You will have two precomps with animated shapes on it and one solid layer without any shapes on it.

Creating a dark blue solid layer

In this project, we are building our lower thirds from solid layers. We will add another Solid layer to our project and use the Parenting tool to connect it to our Null object, as follows:

  1. Use the pen tool to create a triangle shape.
  2. Adjust the Position parameter of your object further.
  3. Move this new object to beneath the two shapes. Adjust the mask for this Solid layer and reposition it, if necessary.
  4. Parent this object to the Null object.
  5. Select the triangle shape and look to the right of the layer for the Parent & Link tab. Look for the coil icon.

    Click and drag on the pick whip coil.

  6. Pick whip this coil to the Null object, as demonstrated in the following screenshot:
    Creating a dark blue solid layer

    Using the pick whip

The triangle pick whip

Now that we have all our objects parented to the Null object, we can animate them. Let's animate our lower third onto the screen using the null object, as follows:

  1. Select the Null object.
  2. Hit P for Position.
  3. Move down in the timeline about 30 key frames.
  4. Trim your work area to this point (hit N).
  5. Hit the Position stopwatch for the Null object.
  6. Move back to the beginning of the timeline.
  7. Select the Null object.
  8. Scrub the Null object Position parameter so that the lower third is moving off screen.
  9. Moving this at an angle, you will see a motion path line proceeding at a diagonal angle, as demonstrated in the following screenshot. Preview your animation:
    The triangle pick whip

    The position of an animation null object

Now that you have your objects moving on the screen, you are going to create a secondary animation. We are going to animate the children of the parented object independently. Creating this type of offset movement will enhance the visual interest of the object, and is executed as follows:

  1. Go 10 key frames after the last key frame of the Null object in the timeline.
  2. Select one of the precomped objects on the far left-hand side of the screen.
  3. Hit P for the Position parameter.
  4. Hit the Position stopwatch.
  5. Go about 10 key frames down from the first key frame.
  6. Animate the shape going off screen at an angle, as demonstrated in the following screenshot.
  7. Preview your animation, as follows:
    The triangle pick whip

    Animating the first object at an angle

This will create an offset animation for the object. A motion path shows the direction that your object is taking. If you notice when you animate the position of an object, a motion path appears in the composition window. This path is a dotted line, called a motion path. Apply this offset animation technique to the other solid shape. Motion paths are important for understanding your movement and timing. Timing is everything in animation. One way to control the speed of your animation is where your key frames are in the timeline. You can adjust your key frames by selecting them and sliding them in the timeline. Your key frames should look similar to the following screenshot:

The triangle pick whip

An offset animation for the additional object

Creating a dark blue solid layer

In this project, we are building our lower thirds from solid layers. We will add another Solid layer to our project and use the Parenting tool to connect it to our Null object, as follows:

  1. Use the pen tool to create a triangle shape.
  2. Adjust the Position parameter of your object further.
  3. Move this new object to beneath the two shapes. Adjust the mask for this Solid layer and reposition it, if necessary.
  4. Parent this object to the Null object.
  5. Select the triangle shape and look to the right of the layer for the Parent & Link tab. Look for the coil icon.

    Click and drag on the pick whip coil.

  6. Pick whip this coil to the Null object, as demonstrated in the following screenshot:
    Creating a dark blue solid layer

    Using the pick whip

The triangle pick whip

Now that we have all our objects parented to the Null object, we can animate them. Let's animate our lower third onto the screen using the null object, as follows:

  1. Select the Null object.
  2. Hit P for Position.
  3. Move down in the timeline about 30 key frames.
  4. Trim your work area to this point (hit N).
  5. Hit the Position stopwatch for the Null object.
  6. Move back to the beginning of the timeline.
  7. Select the Null object.
  8. Scrub the Null object Position parameter so that the lower third is moving off screen.
  9. Moving this at an angle, you will see a motion path line proceeding at a diagonal angle, as demonstrated in the following screenshot. Preview your animation:
    The triangle pick whip

    The position of an animation null object

Now that you have your objects moving on the screen, you are going to create a secondary animation. We are going to animate the children of the parented object independently. Creating this type of offset movement will enhance the visual interest of the object, and is executed as follows:

  1. Go 10 key frames after the last key frame of the Null object in the timeline.
  2. Select one of the precomped objects on the far left-hand side of the screen.
  3. Hit P for the Position parameter.
  4. Hit the Position stopwatch.
  5. Go about 10 key frames down from the first key frame.
  6. Animate the shape going off screen at an angle, as demonstrated in the following screenshot.
  7. Preview your animation, as follows:
    The triangle pick whip

    Animating the first object at an angle

This will create an offset animation for the object. A motion path shows the direction that your object is taking. If you notice when you animate the position of an object, a motion path appears in the composition window. This path is a dotted line, called a motion path. Apply this offset animation technique to the other solid shape. Motion paths are important for understanding your movement and timing. Timing is everything in animation. One way to control the speed of your animation is where your key frames are in the timeline. You can adjust your key frames by selecting them and sliding them in the timeline. Your key frames should look similar to the following screenshot:

The triangle pick whip

An offset animation for the additional object

The triangle pick whip

Now that we have all our objects parented to the Null object, we can animate them. Let's animate our lower third onto the screen using the null object, as follows:

  1. Select the Null object.
  2. Hit P for Position.
  3. Move down in the timeline about 30 key frames.
  4. Trim your work area to this point (hit N).
  5. Hit the Position stopwatch for the Null object.
  6. Move back to the beginning of the timeline.
  7. Select the Null object.
  8. Scrub the Null object Position parameter so that the lower third is moving off screen.
  9. Moving this at an angle, you will see a motion path line proceeding at a diagonal angle, as demonstrated in the following screenshot. Preview your animation:
    The triangle pick whip

    The position of an animation null object

Now that you have your objects moving on the screen, you are going to create a secondary animation. We are going to animate the children of the parented object independently. Creating this type of offset movement will enhance the visual interest of the object, and is executed as follows:

  1. Go 10 key frames after the last key frame of the Null object in the timeline.
  2. Select one of the precomped objects on the far left-hand side of the screen.
  3. Hit P for the Position parameter.
  4. Hit the Position stopwatch.
  5. Go about 10 key frames down from the first key frame.
  6. Animate the shape going off screen at an angle, as demonstrated in the following screenshot.
  7. Preview your animation, as follows:
    The triangle pick whip

    Animating the first object at an angle

This will create an offset animation for the object. A motion path shows the direction that your object is taking. If you notice when you animate the position of an object, a motion path appears in the composition window. This path is a dotted line, called a motion path. Apply this offset animation technique to the other solid shape. Motion paths are important for understanding your movement and timing. Timing is everything in animation. One way to control the speed of your animation is where your key frames are in the timeline. You can adjust your key frames by selecting them and sliding them in the timeline. Your key frames should look similar to the following screenshot:

The triangle pick whip

An offset animation for the additional object

Color correction and adjusting masks

We are going to change some of the colors of our shapes. When I discovered all the color correction tools available in After Effects, I swear I did a little dance! These color correction tools are non-destructive, so you can change them at any time. Many of these tools are also available in Photoshop. So, if you're familiar with color correction in Photoshop, some of these tools and concepts will be familiar to you. As you color correct, think of yourself as a colorist using color to help convey some emotion. We are also going to fine-tune our mask shapes. Remember, your precomps and masks are always editable.

Adjusting colors

To edit the color of the yellow triangle shape, you can double-click on the precomp in the timeline, as follows:

  1. Select the bottom yellow layer
  2. Go to the Effect & Presets panel
  3. Type fill
  4. Double-click the Fill effect

This will add the effect to whatever you have chosen. As you can see, you get an Effects panel that pops up next to your project panel. The default color for this effect is red. Adjust your color by selecting the Color box and selecting a new color:

Adjusting colors

Fill effect

Now go back to your Main comp. You will see your background is a different color. Spend some time adjusting the colors of your shapes and background. Use the same Fill effect on anything you want to change the color of. You want your text for your lower thirds to stand out from the background of these shapes.

In After Effects, you have access to many image editing tools that come with Photoshop. We're going to use one called Curves:

  1. Select your photo background layer.
  2. Find the effect called Curves in the Effects & Preset panel.
  3. Click on this effect to add it to your photo layer.
  4. Look at the Effect Controls panel next to your project window.
  5. Adjust your curve effects using the bottom button called Auto:
    Adjusting colors

    Auto curve effect

  6. Next, we will add a photo filter effect to our image. Find this in the effect panel by typing photo filter. Double-click and add this effect to your layer. This effect will give your image an overall color effect. Choose a nice cooling filter (such as 80).

Adjusting masks

You can also adjust the masks of your shape in the Main comp window. Remember to edit individual points for your mask by choosing the selection tool and clicking once on one mask path point. Once you see the point filled in (as in the following screenshot), that means it's ready to be edited. If you study the following screenshot, you will see that only one point is filled in. The other two points are empty. This demonstrates how to edit your mask points:

Adjusting masks

Editing single mask points

You can also add points to your masks by selecting the pen tool, and hovering over the mask where you want to make the point. You will see a + sign. Click on the mask to make an additional point. After adding a mask point, drag this point to the desired location to edit the mask shape:

Adjusting masks

Pen tool editing path

You are now going to add your show information for your lower third object.

Adjusting colors

To edit the color of the yellow triangle shape, you can double-click on the precomp in the timeline, as follows:

  1. Select the bottom yellow layer
  2. Go to the Effect & Presets panel
  3. Type fill
  4. Double-click the Fill effect

This will add the effect to whatever you have chosen. As you can see, you get an Effects panel that pops up next to your project panel. The default color for this effect is red. Adjust your color by selecting the Color box and selecting a new color:

Adjusting colors

Fill effect

Now go back to your Main comp. You will see your background is a different color. Spend some time adjusting the colors of your shapes and background. Use the same Fill effect on anything you want to change the color of. You want your text for your lower thirds to stand out from the background of these shapes.

In After Effects, you have access to many image editing tools that come with Photoshop. We're going to use one called Curves:

  1. Select your photo background layer.
  2. Find the effect called Curves in the Effects & Preset panel.
  3. Click on this effect to add it to your photo layer.
  4. Look at the Effect Controls panel next to your project window.
  5. Adjust your curve effects using the bottom button called Auto:
    Adjusting colors

    Auto curve effect

  6. Next, we will add a photo filter effect to our image. Find this in the effect panel by typing photo filter. Double-click and add this effect to your layer. This effect will give your image an overall color effect. Choose a nice cooling filter (such as 80).

Adjusting masks

You can also adjust the masks of your shape in the Main comp window. Remember to edit individual points for your mask by choosing the selection tool and clicking once on one mask path point. Once you see the point filled in (as in the following screenshot), that means it's ready to be edited. If you study the following screenshot, you will see that only one point is filled in. The other two points are empty. This demonstrates how to edit your mask points:

Adjusting masks

Editing single mask points

You can also add points to your masks by selecting the pen tool, and hovering over the mask where you want to make the point. You will see a + sign. Click on the mask to make an additional point. After adding a mask point, drag this point to the desired location to edit the mask shape:

Adjusting masks

Pen tool editing path

You are now going to add your show information for your lower third object.

Adjusting masks

You can also adjust the masks of your shape in the Main comp window. Remember to edit individual points for your mask by choosing the selection tool and clicking once on one mask path point. Once you see the point filled in (as in the following screenshot), that means it's ready to be edited. If you study the following screenshot, you will see that only one point is filled in. The other two points are empty. This demonstrates how to edit your mask points:

Adjusting masks

Editing single mask points

You can also add points to your masks by selecting the pen tool, and hovering over the mask where you want to make the point. You will see a + sign. Click on the mask to make an additional point. After adding a mask point, drag this point to the desired location to edit the mask shape:

Adjusting masks

Pen tool editing path

You are now going to add your show information for your lower third object.

Creating text, easy easing key frames, and rendering

Imagine yourself getting very close to the finish line! We are almost done with this lower third project. You should be very proud of yourself. In this next section, we are going to add some information for our show, using the type tool. Pay special attention to the text tool. It's one of the main communication devices used with After Effects, and is one of the principal means of communicating information. It's very important that you understand how to use this tool. We are also going to learn ways of how to further edit your key frames for more natural movement. Then, we are going to learn a couple of ways of how to render our movie.

The type tool

The type tool is one of the most versatile tools in After Effects. Text layers are useful for many purposes, including lower thirds, animated titles, and dynamic typography. You can fully edit your text layers, spacing, size, and stroke. You can animate the text layers, or the color, size, and position. There's also a complete set of tools for animating your text in complex ways. Creating dynamic typography sets this program apart from any other.

You can add text to your composition using the text tool, as follows:

  1. We will begin by selecting the type tool in the top tool panel.
  2. Next, click on your comp to add a type to the Main comp. This immediately creates a text layer in your composition. Make sure that your type layer is on top of all your other layers.
  3. Look to the left-hand side of the screen, and you will find some of your type tool options.
  4. You can change the color of your type by selecting the fill color option; this is the box found to the right of your font option.
  5. To adjust the scale of your text, hit the S shortcut for scale, and adjust this as you would any other layer:
    The type tool

    Type color fill

The type fill

Spend time creating individual text layers for your show information. Use one shape for the day of your show. Use another one for the time of your show. And finally, include the name of your show on one of the shapes. We will go over more of these type tools, but for now, just adjust your type so that it fits in all of the shapes, as demonstrated in the following screenshot:

The type fill

Adjusting the type

Adjusting the text

Now, you will parent your text to the shape you have it positioned inside of. Your text should move with the shapes it is positioned in. Go to a point in your timeline where all your animation has happened, and the lower third is completely in place and framed correctly.

Follow this up by selecting each line of text and parent it to the corresponding object. You parent your text with these steps:

  1. Select the text layer and use the pick whip tool
  2. Drag the coil tool to the appropriate shape

Animation is basically making things move across time. After Effects gives you the ability to control how things move in-between frames. Understanding how to control how things move will make your animation look natural. One way to do this is to ease your key frames. This is an advanced topic that we will cover in much greater detail in future chapters.

The first step to learning key frames is the understanding of the selection tool. In order to master it, go to the timeline and click and drag a square around all your key frames. The following screenshot demonstrates how to select your key frames:

Adjusting the text

Selecting key frames

Our next task is to ease our key frames. Editing your key frames is crucial to create smooth movements:

  1. Right-click on the key frames
  2. Choose the Keyframe Assistant option
  3. Select Easy Ease

The following screenshot demonstrates how to access the Keyframe Assistant panel:

Adjusting the text

Easy Ease

Remember to always ease your key frames. Take a look at the following screenshot to see how eased key frames should look:

Adjusting the text

Easy Ease 2

Rendering options

Lower thirds are typically used for television shows and placed on top of video footage. In order to place footage on video, the composition needs to have a transparent background. Rendering is how we can create a video of your projects. If you want to render your lower third by itself, perform the following steps on a transparent background:

  1. Go to the Main composition
  2. Turn off everything except the lower third
  3. Add to the render queue
  4. Choose Lossless
  5. Choose the QuickTime format
  6. Choose RGB + Alpha
  7. Navigate to the folder you want to save it in
  8. Name your video

Note

Your render should only be the length of your project. Check the last frame of your project before you render it so that you don't have any blank frames.

You can also render your project using Adobe Media Encoder. I recommend rendering this way, particularly if you don't need your video on a transparent background. You can work in After Effects while you're rendering in Adobe Media Encoder. You need to be sure that Adobe Media Encoder is downloaded to your computer:

  1. Go to composition.
  2. Choose Add to Adobe Media Encoder.
  3. In Adobe Media Encoder, you should see your project.
  4. You should see h264 under your title. If not, find it in the drop-down menu.
  5. Hit the h264 icon.
  6. The Export settings option should come up.
  7. Go to basic video settings.
  8. Adjust the target bitrate/maximum bitrate to about five or lower (small numbers = a smaller file size; bigger numbers = a bigger file size). Notice that the estimated file size at the bottom of this screen goes down when you adjust the target bitrate.
  9. Choose the green start button triangle in the top-right corner of the screen.

The type tool

The type tool is one of the most versatile tools in After Effects. Text layers are useful for many purposes, including lower thirds, animated titles, and dynamic typography. You can fully edit your text layers, spacing, size, and stroke. You can animate the text layers, or the color, size, and position. There's also a complete set of tools for animating your text in complex ways. Creating dynamic typography sets this program apart from any other.

You can add text to your composition using the text tool, as follows:

  1. We will begin by selecting the type tool in the top tool panel.
  2. Next, click on your comp to add a type to the Main comp. This immediately creates a text layer in your composition. Make sure that your type layer is on top of all your other layers.
  3. Look to the left-hand side of the screen, and you will find some of your type tool options.
  4. You can change the color of your type by selecting the fill color option; this is the box found to the right of your font option.
  5. To adjust the scale of your text, hit the S shortcut for scale, and adjust this as you would any other layer:
    The type tool

    Type color fill

The type fill

Spend time creating individual text layers for your show information. Use one shape for the day of your show. Use another one for the time of your show. And finally, include the name of your show on one of the shapes. We will go over more of these type tools, but for now, just adjust your type so that it fits in all of the shapes, as demonstrated in the following screenshot:

The type fill

Adjusting the type

Adjusting the text

Now, you will parent your text to the shape you have it positioned inside of. Your text should move with the shapes it is positioned in. Go to a point in your timeline where all your animation has happened, and the lower third is completely in place and framed correctly.

Follow this up by selecting each line of text and parent it to the corresponding object. You parent your text with these steps:

  1. Select the text layer and use the pick whip tool
  2. Drag the coil tool to the appropriate shape

Animation is basically making things move across time. After Effects gives you the ability to control how things move in-between frames. Understanding how to control how things move will make your animation look natural. One way to do this is to ease your key frames. This is an advanced topic that we will cover in much greater detail in future chapters.

The first step to learning key frames is the understanding of the selection tool. In order to master it, go to the timeline and click and drag a square around all your key frames. The following screenshot demonstrates how to select your key frames:

Adjusting the text

Selecting key frames

Our next task is to ease our key frames. Editing your key frames is crucial to create smooth movements:

  1. Right-click on the key frames
  2. Choose the Keyframe Assistant option
  3. Select Easy Ease

The following screenshot demonstrates how to access the Keyframe Assistant panel:

Adjusting the text

Easy Ease

Remember to always ease your key frames. Take a look at the following screenshot to see how eased key frames should look:

Adjusting the text

Easy Ease 2

Rendering options

Lower thirds are typically used for television shows and placed on top of video footage. In order to place footage on video, the composition needs to have a transparent background. Rendering is how we can create a video of your projects. If you want to render your lower third by itself, perform the following steps on a transparent background:

  1. Go to the Main composition
  2. Turn off everything except the lower third
  3. Add to the render queue
  4. Choose Lossless
  5. Choose the QuickTime format
  6. Choose RGB + Alpha
  7. Navigate to the folder you want to save it in
  8. Name your video

Note

Your render should only be the length of your project. Check the last frame of your project before you render it so that you don't have any blank frames.

You can also render your project using Adobe Media Encoder. I recommend rendering this way, particularly if you don't need your video on a transparent background. You can work in After Effects while you're rendering in Adobe Media Encoder. You need to be sure that Adobe Media Encoder is downloaded to your computer:

  1. Go to composition.
  2. Choose Add to Adobe Media Encoder.
  3. In Adobe Media Encoder, you should see your project.
  4. You should see h264 under your title. If not, find it in the drop-down menu.
  5. Hit the h264 icon.
  6. The Export settings option should come up.
  7. Go to basic video settings.
  8. Adjust the target bitrate/maximum bitrate to about five or lower (small numbers = a smaller file size; bigger numbers = a bigger file size). Notice that the estimated file size at the bottom of this screen goes down when you adjust the target bitrate.
  9. Choose the green start button triangle in the top-right corner of the screen.

The type fill

Spend time creating individual text layers for your show information. Use one shape for the day of your show. Use another one for the time of your show. And finally, include the name of your show on one of the shapes. We will go over more of these type tools, but for now, just adjust your type so that it fits in all of the shapes, as demonstrated in the following screenshot:

The type fill

Adjusting the type

Adjusting the text

Now, you will parent your text to the shape you have it positioned inside of. Your text should move with the shapes it is positioned in. Go to a point in your timeline where all your animation has happened, and the lower third is completely in place and framed correctly.

Follow this up by selecting each line of text and parent it to the corresponding object. You parent your text with these steps:

  1. Select the text layer and use the pick whip tool
  2. Drag the coil tool to the appropriate shape

Animation is basically making things move across time. After Effects gives you the ability to control how things move in-between frames. Understanding how to control how things move will make your animation look natural. One way to do this is to ease your key frames. This is an advanced topic that we will cover in much greater detail in future chapters.

The first step to learning key frames is the understanding of the selection tool. In order to master it, go to the timeline and click and drag a square around all your key frames. The following screenshot demonstrates how to select your key frames:

Adjusting the text

Selecting key frames

Our next task is to ease our key frames. Editing your key frames is crucial to create smooth movements:

  1. Right-click on the key frames
  2. Choose the Keyframe Assistant option
  3. Select Easy Ease

The following screenshot demonstrates how to access the Keyframe Assistant panel:

Adjusting the text

Easy Ease

Remember to always ease your key frames. Take a look at the following screenshot to see how eased key frames should look:

Adjusting the text

Easy Ease 2

Rendering options

Lower thirds are typically used for television shows and placed on top of video footage. In order to place footage on video, the composition needs to have a transparent background. Rendering is how we can create a video of your projects. If you want to render your lower third by itself, perform the following steps on a transparent background:

  1. Go to the Main composition
  2. Turn off everything except the lower third
  3. Add to the render queue
  4. Choose Lossless
  5. Choose the QuickTime format
  6. Choose RGB + Alpha
  7. Navigate to the folder you want to save it in
  8. Name your video

Note

Your render should only be the length of your project. Check the last frame of your project before you render it so that you don't have any blank frames.

You can also render your project using Adobe Media Encoder. I recommend rendering this way, particularly if you don't need your video on a transparent background. You can work in After Effects while you're rendering in Adobe Media Encoder. You need to be sure that Adobe Media Encoder is downloaded to your computer:

  1. Go to composition.
  2. Choose Add to Adobe Media Encoder.
  3. In Adobe Media Encoder, you should see your project.
  4. You should see h264 under your title. If not, find it in the drop-down menu.
  5. Hit the h264 icon.
  6. The Export settings option should come up.
  7. Go to basic video settings.
  8. Adjust the target bitrate/maximum bitrate to about five or lower (small numbers = a smaller file size; bigger numbers = a bigger file size). Notice that the estimated file size at the bottom of this screen goes down when you adjust the target bitrate.
  9. Choose the green start button triangle in the top-right corner of the screen.

Adjusting the text

Now, you will parent your text to the shape you have it positioned inside of. Your text should move with the shapes it is positioned in. Go to a point in your timeline where all your animation has happened, and the lower third is completely in place and framed correctly.

Follow this up by selecting each line of text and parent it to the corresponding object. You parent your text with these steps:

  1. Select the text layer and use the pick whip tool
  2. Drag the coil tool to the appropriate shape

Animation is basically making things move across time. After Effects gives you the ability to control how things move in-between frames. Understanding how to control how things move will make your animation look natural. One way to do this is to ease your key frames. This is an advanced topic that we will cover in much greater detail in future chapters.

The first step to learning key frames is the understanding of the selection tool. In order to master it, go to the timeline and click and drag a square around all your key frames. The following screenshot demonstrates how to select your key frames:

Adjusting the text

Selecting key frames

Our next task is to ease our key frames. Editing your key frames is crucial to create smooth movements:

  1. Right-click on the key frames
  2. Choose the Keyframe Assistant option
  3. Select Easy Ease

The following screenshot demonstrates how to access the Keyframe Assistant panel:

Adjusting the text

Easy Ease

Remember to always ease your key frames. Take a look at the following screenshot to see how eased key frames should look:

Adjusting the text

Easy Ease 2

Rendering options

Lower thirds are typically used for television shows and placed on top of video footage. In order to place footage on video, the composition needs to have a transparent background. Rendering is how we can create a video of your projects. If you want to render your lower third by itself, perform the following steps on a transparent background:

  1. Go to the Main composition
  2. Turn off everything except the lower third
  3. Add to the render queue
  4. Choose Lossless
  5. Choose the QuickTime format
  6. Choose RGB + Alpha
  7. Navigate to the folder you want to save it in
  8. Name your video

Note

Your render should only be the length of your project. Check the last frame of your project before you render it so that you don't have any blank frames.

You can also render your project using Adobe Media Encoder. I recommend rendering this way, particularly if you don't need your video on a transparent background. You can work in After Effects while you're rendering in Adobe Media Encoder. You need to be sure that Adobe Media Encoder is downloaded to your computer:

  1. Go to composition.
  2. Choose Add to Adobe Media Encoder.
  3. In Adobe Media Encoder, you should see your project.
  4. You should see h264 under your title. If not, find it in the drop-down menu.
  5. Hit the h264 icon.
  6. The Export settings option should come up.
  7. Go to basic video settings.
  8. Adjust the target bitrate/maximum bitrate to about five or lower (small numbers = a smaller file size; bigger numbers = a bigger file size). Notice that the estimated file size at the bottom of this screen goes down when you adjust the target bitrate.
  9. Choose the green start button triangle in the top-right corner of the screen.

Rendering options

Lower thirds are typically used for television shows and placed on top of video footage. In order to place footage on video, the composition needs to have a transparent background. Rendering is how we can create a video of your projects. If you want to render your lower third by itself, perform the following steps on a transparent background:

  1. Go to the Main composition
  2. Turn off everything except the lower third
  3. Add to the render queue
  4. Choose Lossless
  5. Choose the QuickTime format
  6. Choose RGB + Alpha
  7. Navigate to the folder you want to save it in
  8. Name your video

Note

Your render should only be the length of your project. Check the last frame of your project before you render it so that you don't have any blank frames.

You can also render your project using Adobe Media Encoder. I recommend rendering this way, particularly if you don't need your video on a transparent background. You can work in After Effects while you're rendering in Adobe Media Encoder. You need to be sure that Adobe Media Encoder is downloaded to your computer:

  1. Go to composition.
  2. Choose Add to Adobe Media Encoder.
  3. In Adobe Media Encoder, you should see your project.
  4. You should see h264 under your title. If not, find it in the drop-down menu.
  5. Hit the h264 icon.
  6. The Export settings option should come up.
  7. Go to basic video settings.
  8. Adjust the target bitrate/maximum bitrate to about five or lower (small numbers = a smaller file size; bigger numbers = a bigger file size). Notice that the estimated file size at the bottom of this screen goes down when you adjust the target bitrate.
  9. Choose the green start button triangle in the top-right corner of the screen.

Summary

In this chapter, we learned more about Solid layers, masking, key frames, the Keyframe Assistant, the text tool, Null objects, precomps, and how to create a lower third for a television show. We also learned about easy ease and how to render your projects. After reading this chapter, you can group your layers into precomps and edit masks. This is crucial as we move forward into the next chapter, where we will design with shape layers and work more with editing and animating masks. We will build on the skills that we have learned from this chapter and learn about shape layers, text presets, editing audio, and how to create an animated lyric video for social media.

Questions

  1. What is a pen tool and how do you use it to create custom masks?
  2. How do you adjust your key frames?
  3. What is the Keyframe Assistant?
  4. What is easy ease?
  5. How do you activate the text tool?
  6. How do you use Null objects?
  7. How do you create precomps?

Chapter 3. Using Shape Layers to Create an Animated Lyric Video

In this chapter, we are going to work with shape layers. Shape layers are like solid layers, except they are much more powerful! Essentially, shape layers are a bit like Illustrator, you can create custom shapes and edit them, but you have access to tons of animation parameters as well. Shape layers are a natural continuation of solid layers and the masking that we did in the last chapter. Both solid layers and shape layers are vector objects. They can be scaled infinitely without losing quality.

We will use shape layers as transition elements in our project. Every time you create an animation project, ask yourself, is there a creative way I can transition in or out of this scene? By the end of this chapter, you will know a couple interesting ways to transition between your scenes.

The following topics will be covered in this chapter:

  • Shape layer animation
  • Mask animation
  • Editing audio
  • Text animation

Using shape layers to create transitions and background graphics

In this shape layer project, we will duplicate and reuse a lot of elements. We will change the color of the shapes and offset the key frames for complex animated designs. This project will get your feet wet with shape layers; however, there are more advanced features with shape layers that we won't cover. Please feel free to explore after I have introduced the shape layer concept.

We are building a looping lyric video for a fictional children's movie. These types of videos are used on social media to generate excitement about a song or a movie. Understanding how to animate typography in a kinetic way is important in the field of motion graphics. Moving typography helps convey your message in a more entertaining way than static type. Let's get started with shape layers.

Creating shape 1

The interface for shape layers can be found in two areas: at the top of the interface in the tool panel, and also in the timeline:

  1. Go to Layer | New | Shape Layer | Add | Ellipse.
  2. Name it Circle 1.
  3. Twirl down the Ellipse Path 1.
  4. Increase the size to 1000.
  5. Go to Add | Stroke.
  6. Increase the stroke width to 90:
    Creating shape 1

    Stroke width

Add a solid-color background:

  1. Go to Add | Trim Paths.
  2. Go to Start | 100.
  3. Go to the beginning of the timeline and click the stop watch.
  4. Go to key frame 20 and set the start parameter to 0.
  5. Hit the N shortcut to trim your work area.
  6. Hit Spacebar to preview, and, with that, you've created your first shape layer animation!
  7. Open the shape layer.
  8. Increase the stroke width size.
  9. Duplicate the shape layer.
  10. Right-click this layer.
  11. Rename your circle layer 2.
  12. Twirl down content | Stroke 1.
  13. Change the stroke color:
    Creating shape 1

    Stroke color

  14. Go to Stroke 1 | Stroke width.
  15. Reduce the stroke width to 30.
  16. So these paths will animate on at different times, go to Trim path | Start | Offset keyframes:
    Creating shape 1

    Offset key frames

Select your key frames for the trim path. Drag the key frames so they are offset. Look at the offset key frames I am pointing to in the preceding screenshot:

  1. Rename Circle 1 to Thick line
  2. Rename Circle 2 to Thin line
  3. Duplicate Thick line
  4. Move to the top
  5. Change the stroke color of Thick line 2

Next, look closely at the Stroke 1 option. Under the Stroke 1 options is Dashes. Slowly look to the right of Dashes and you will see + and -, which are called Dashes. Clicking on the + will allow you to add dashes to your object:

  1. Across from Dashes, find the + and - signs.
  2. Hit the + sign twice. Under Dashes, you have three parameters called Dash, Gap, and Offset.
  3. Adjust the gaps to 120:
    Creating shape 1

    Gap parameters

  4. Increase the Gap to 120.

    Offset the key frames for the trim path so these elements will be animated at different times. Remember, timing is everything in animation. You want these key frames offset so each animation happens a few key frames behind the offset key frames.

  5. Adjust the stroke width to 500 for Thick line 2.

Creating a new polystar shape layer

We need you to create a new transition shape layer. This will help us transition to our next scene in a creative way:

  1. Create a new shape layer.
  2. Add a Polystar shape to our layer:
    Creating a new polystar shape layer

    Polystar shape

Add a Polystar shape to the empty shape layer. By default, when you add a shape layer to your project, it's empty. You have to add any shapes you want to see. You can add items to your shape layer in the timeline to the right of the contents tab, or you can add them with the bar in the top right:

  1. Add a fill.
  2. Twirl down the polystar.
  3. Add 30 points:
    Creating a new polystar shape layer

    Add points

  4. Next, expand the outer radius to 1250.
  5. Go to the last key frame of your animation and create a key frame for the outer radius.
  6. Go to the mid point where your circles are half way through their animations.
  7. Make your outer radius 0.
  8. At that same point in the timeline, hit the stop watch for your inner radius.
  9. Jump to the last key frame and expand you inner radius to 1080.
  10. Spend some time offsetting your inner radius key frames to achieve the following screenshot:
    Creating a new polystar shape layer

    Inner/outer radius

Creating a transition shape

We are going to add our final transition shape for shape 1.

Now you need to go to the point in the timeline where the last shape is almost fully covering the screen. See the following screenshot:

Creating a transition shape

Timeline location new shape

To create a transition animated shape, follow these steps:

  1. Create a new shape layer.
  2. Name this layer Transition stroke.
  3. Add an ellipse.
  4. Add a stroke.
  5. Change the color of the stroke.
  6. Twirl down the contents of the transition stroke layer.
  7. Find Ellipse Path 1.
  8. Animate the ellipse by changing its size, scaling it up and eventually having it leave the scene.
  9. Go to the first key frame for the size change.
  10. Add a key frame for the stroke width.
  11. Go to the last size key frame, choose the stroke parameter, and increase the stroke width so that on that frame your stroke looks like the following screenshot:
    Creating a transition shape

    Circle 2 transition stroke width

We are using this shape to reveal the character underneath. We have already created the animated mask shapes. We are now going to use an additional mask to cut out the center of the polygon shape:

  1. Choose the last shape layer created.
  2. At the top of the toolbar, select the ellipse tool.
  3. To the far right, next to the star shape, choose the Tool Creates Mask tool:
    Creating a transition shape

    Tool creates mask

Use this tool to click and drag to make a shape to cut through this mask shape:

  1. Put your mouse in the center of this shape.
  2. Press Ctrl +Shift to constrain this shape. This will create a perfect mask shape. Starting the shape from the center will perfectly center it. Look at the new mask created on the polystar layer.
  3. Click invert to cut out the center of the shape:
    Creating a transition shape

    Invert

When you click on the Invert option, it makes your mask invert. This will effectively cut through your mask. The following screenshot demonstrates how you can see the background through the cut-out shape:

Creating a transition shape

Cut out

We need to animate this mask and have the animation aligned with the key frames from the transition stroke layer. This will ensure the mask animation is in sync with the transition stroke layer:

  1. Go to the first key frame of the transition stroke layer.
  2. Select the mask on the polystar layer.
  3. Create a key frame for the mask.
  4. Go to the last key frame of the transition stroke layer.
  5. Adjust the mask so it animates off the screen with the transition stroke mask. To select all mask points, double-click one mask shape until you get the mask bounding box. This will allow you to adjust your mask and keep the perfect ellipse shape:
    Creating a transition shape

    Mask bounding box

The first key frame mask shape will be so small that it's barely noticeable. Key frame the last mask so that it completely fill the screen.

This process is called creating a wipe transition. This is used frequently in motion graphics to transition in and out of scenes. Since this is a circular shape, this transition would be called a radial wipe. We need to trim the other shape layers except the transition layer, background layer, and the polystar layer:

  1. Go to the first key frame of the polystar layer mask layer.
  2. Select all layers except the background, the polystar layer, and the transition stroke layer.
  3. Trim your layers. Press Alt + ] or press and hold Shift and drag your layers to the left.

Pressing Shift will snap your layers to where your time indicator is parked. Make sure you see the trim icon.

Importing audio, text animation presets, and background graphics

We are going to finish the lyric video by adding music, creating dynamic animated typography, and creating an animated background.

Importing audio and creating composition markers

You import audio layers the same way you import anything. An audio layer is just like any other layer, except it doesn't have some transform properties. Any layer that is represented by a visual image will have position, scale, and rotation transform properties. However, an audio layer isn't represented visually; therefore, you don't have any of the usual transform properties. You will have access to wave forms that will display the sound variations on your audio layers.

To reveal your wave form, simply do the following:

  1. Twirl down the audio layer to reveal the wave forms:
    Importing audio and creating composition markers

    Audio

    These audio layers have volume that can be animated.

  2. To adjust and key frame your audio volume, reveal the stopwatch audio parameter.
  3. Key frame the audio levels in the negative direction. You can tell when your audio has zeroed out because the waveform will be a flat line. You have audio controls on any layer that has an audio track:
    Importing audio and creating composition markers

    Audio keyframing

  4. Next, we are going to listen to our audio and listen for the lyrics to make composition markers for our text. To add a composition marker, hit Shift and press a number:
    Importing audio and creating composition markers

    The composition marker

This will create a marker on your composition with a marker on it. You can further edit that marker by double-clicking on the number. This will reveal a panel that lets you rename the number. Here, you can enter notes for your layer. Double-click that number to add the name of your lyric:

Importing audio and creating composition markers

Renaming the marker

Keep doing this until you have about 10 seconds of music with the lyrics notated in the markers.

Text animators

Kinetic typography is an essential tool to understand in motion graphics. Luckily, we have access to lots of text presets that provide us with instant animation. Go to Effects & Presets and twirl down Animation Presets | Text | Organic | Drop Bounce:

Text animators

Text presets

While one of your lines of type is selected, double-click on the Drop Bounce preset. It will automatically add this preset to your text.

Make sure you have enough room for your first line of type to be animated. Adjust your layers if necessary:

Text animators

Adjusting layers

We are going to use the type tool to type in the first text. Go to the point in the timeline with your first marker with the lyrics. Type the first word of the lyric. Type the second word in the lyrics on a separate line. You should have one text layer per word in your lyrics. Center your text in the screen and scale it down, as shown in the following screenshot:

Text animators

Centering text

Select the second layer of text. Ensure that the text matches the audio. Choose another animation preset. Look in the animation folder. Next, go to the point in the timeline when the next line of lyrics needs to be animated. Animate off your type. Look in the animate off presets and click on one of these presets to animate off your text.

Editing your text preset key frames

The text presets don't always look exactly how you want them after adding them to your text. Therefore, you may need to edit the preset key frames:

  1. Press U to reveal the key frames that create the preset.
  2. Select all key frames and hit the Alt key on Windows, or the option key on macOS.
  3. Drag your key frames. This will adjust all your key frames relative to each other. Or, you can select the key frames and move them individually.

Bringing your key frames closer together makes your animation happen faster, while moving them further apart makes the animations move slower:

Editing your text preset key frames

Adjusting key frames

Adding a layer style to your text is done as follows:

  1. Go to Layer | Layer Styles | Stroke.
  2. Next, you can adjust the stroke color:
    Editing your text preset key frames

    Adjusting the stroke

Make sure your text layers are at the top of your stacking order. Things should happen in this order:

  1. The shape layers animate on and off with the text.
  2. The transition happens, revealing a character.
  3. Repeat step 1 as many times as needed for your lyrics:
    Editing your text preset key frames

    Transition

To make sure your layers are in the correct order, follow these steps:

  1. Select your all your text layers.
  2. Move all text underneath your other layers.

Creating an animated background shape

We are going to animate a repeating background element for our animation. We are going to duplicate the radial dash line layer:

  1. Adjust the key frames for this layer so it animates on and off with the text.
  2. This needs to be underneath the text, as shown in the following screenshot:
    Creating an animated background shape

We are going to make this project a square format for better viewing on social media. Go to Composition | Composition Setting and make the composition size 1,080 x 1,080.

Importing audio and creating composition markers

You import audio layers the same way you import anything. An audio layer is just like any other layer, except it doesn't have some transform properties. Any layer that is represented by a visual image will have position, scale, and rotation transform properties. However, an audio layer isn't represented visually; therefore, you don't have any of the usual transform properties. You will have access to wave forms that will display the sound variations on your audio layers.

To reveal your wave form, simply do the following:

  1. Twirl down the audio layer to reveal the wave forms:
    Importing audio and creating composition markers

    Audio

    These audio layers have volume that can be animated.

  2. To adjust and key frame your audio volume, reveal the stopwatch audio parameter.
  3. Key frame the audio levels in the negative direction. You can tell when your audio has zeroed out because the waveform will be a flat line. You have audio controls on any layer that has an audio track:
    Importing audio and creating composition markers

    Audio keyframing

  4. Next, we are going to listen to our audio and listen for the lyrics to make composition markers for our text. To add a composition marker, hit Shift and press a number:
    Importing audio and creating composition markers

    The composition marker

This will create a marker on your composition with a marker on it. You can further edit that marker by double-clicking on the number. This will reveal a panel that lets you rename the number. Here, you can enter notes for your layer. Double-click that number to add the name of your lyric:

Importing audio and creating composition markers

Renaming the marker

Keep doing this until you have about 10 seconds of music with the lyrics notated in the markers.

Text animators

Kinetic typography is an essential tool to understand in motion graphics. Luckily, we have access to lots of text presets that provide us with instant animation. Go to Effects & Presets and twirl down Animation Presets | Text | Organic | Drop Bounce:

Text animators

Text presets

While one of your lines of type is selected, double-click on the Drop Bounce preset. It will automatically add this preset to your text.

Make sure you have enough room for your first line of type to be animated. Adjust your layers if necessary:

Text animators

Adjusting layers

We are going to use the type tool to type in the first text. Go to the point in the timeline with your first marker with the lyrics. Type the first word of the lyric. Type the second word in the lyrics on a separate line. You should have one text layer per word in your lyrics. Center your text in the screen and scale it down, as shown in the following screenshot:

Text animators

Centering text

Select the second layer of text. Ensure that the text matches the audio. Choose another animation preset. Look in the animation folder. Next, go to the point in the timeline when the next line of lyrics needs to be animated. Animate off your type. Look in the animate off presets and click on one of these presets to animate off your text.

Editing your text preset key frames

The text presets don't always look exactly how you want them after adding them to your text. Therefore, you may need to edit the preset key frames:

  1. Press U to reveal the key frames that create the preset.
  2. Select all key frames and hit the Alt key on Windows, or the option key on macOS.
  3. Drag your key frames. This will adjust all your key frames relative to each other. Or, you can select the key frames and move them individually.

Bringing your key frames closer together makes your animation happen faster, while moving them further apart makes the animations move slower:

Editing your text preset key frames

Adjusting key frames

Adding a layer style to your text is done as follows:

  1. Go to Layer | Layer Styles | Stroke.
  2. Next, you can adjust the stroke color:
    Editing your text preset key frames

    Adjusting the stroke

Make sure your text layers are at the top of your stacking order. Things should happen in this order:

  1. The shape layers animate on and off with the text.
  2. The transition happens, revealing a character.
  3. Repeat step 1 as many times as needed for your lyrics:
    Editing your text preset key frames

    Transition

To make sure your layers are in the correct order, follow these steps:

  1. Select your all your text layers.
  2. Move all text underneath your other layers.

Creating an animated background shape

We are going to animate a repeating background element for our animation. We are going to duplicate the radial dash line layer:

  1. Adjust the key frames for this layer so it animates on and off with the text.
  2. This needs to be underneath the text, as shown in the following screenshot:
    Creating an animated background shape

We are going to make this project a square format for better viewing on social media. Go to Composition | Composition Setting and make the composition size 1,080 x 1,080.

Text animators

Kinetic typography is an essential tool to understand in motion graphics. Luckily, we have access to lots of text presets that provide us with instant animation. Go to Effects & Presets and twirl down Animation Presets | Text | Organic | Drop Bounce:

Text animators

Text presets

While one of your lines of type is selected, double-click on the Drop Bounce preset. It will automatically add this preset to your text.

Make sure you have enough room for your first line of type to be animated. Adjust your layers if necessary:

Text animators

Adjusting layers

We are going to use the type tool to type in the first text. Go to the point in the timeline with your first marker with the lyrics. Type the first word of the lyric. Type the second word in the lyrics on a separate line. You should have one text layer per word in your lyrics. Center your text in the screen and scale it down, as shown in the following screenshot:

Text animators

Centering text

Select the second layer of text. Ensure that the text matches the audio. Choose another animation preset. Look in the animation folder. Next, go to the point in the timeline when the next line of lyrics needs to be animated. Animate off your type. Look in the animate off presets and click on one of these presets to animate off your text.

Editing your text preset key frames

The text presets don't always look exactly how you want them after adding them to your text. Therefore, you may need to edit the preset key frames:

  1. Press U to reveal the key frames that create the preset.
  2. Select all key frames and hit the Alt key on Windows, or the option key on macOS.
  3. Drag your key frames. This will adjust all your key frames relative to each other. Or, you can select the key frames and move them individually.

Bringing your key frames closer together makes your animation happen faster, while moving them further apart makes the animations move slower:

Editing your text preset key frames

Adjusting key frames

Adding a layer style to your text is done as follows:

  1. Go to Layer | Layer Styles | Stroke.
  2. Next, you can adjust the stroke color:
    Editing your text preset key frames

    Adjusting the stroke

Make sure your text layers are at the top of your stacking order. Things should happen in this order:

  1. The shape layers animate on and off with the text.
  2. The transition happens, revealing a character.
  3. Repeat step 1 as many times as needed for your lyrics:
    Editing your text preset key frames

    Transition

To make sure your layers are in the correct order, follow these steps:

  1. Select your all your text layers.
  2. Move all text underneath your other layers.

Creating an animated background shape

We are going to animate a repeating background element for our animation. We are going to duplicate the radial dash line layer:

  1. Adjust the key frames for this layer so it animates on and off with the text.
  2. This needs to be underneath the text, as shown in the following screenshot:
    Creating an animated background shape

We are going to make this project a square format for better viewing on social media. Go to Composition | Composition Setting and make the composition size 1,080 x 1,080.

Editing your text preset key frames

The text presets don't always look exactly how you want them after adding them to your text. Therefore, you may need to edit the preset key frames:

  1. Press U to reveal the key frames that create the preset.
  2. Select all key frames and hit the Alt key on Windows, or the option key on macOS.
  3. Drag your key frames. This will adjust all your key frames relative to each other. Or, you can select the key frames and move them individually.

Bringing your key frames closer together makes your animation happen faster, while moving them further apart makes the animations move slower:

Editing your text preset key frames

Adjusting key frames

Adding a layer style to your text is done as follows:

  1. Go to Layer | Layer Styles | Stroke.
  2. Next, you can adjust the stroke color:
    Editing your text preset key frames

    Adjusting the stroke

Make sure your text layers are at the top of your stacking order. Things should happen in this order:

  1. The shape layers animate on and off with the text.
  2. The transition happens, revealing a character.
  3. Repeat step 1 as many times as needed for your lyrics:
    Editing your text preset key frames

    Transition

To make sure your layers are in the correct order, follow these steps:

  1. Select your all your text layers.
  2. Move all text underneath your other layers.

Creating an animated background shape

We are going to animate a repeating background element for our animation. We are going to duplicate the radial dash line layer:

  1. Adjust the key frames for this layer so it animates on and off with the text.
  2. This needs to be underneath the text, as shown in the following screenshot:
    Creating an animated background shape

We are going to make this project a square format for better viewing on social media. Go to Composition | Composition Setting and make the composition size 1,080 x 1,080.

Creating an animated background shape

We are going to animate a repeating background element for our animation. We are going to duplicate the radial dash line layer:

  1. Adjust the key frames for this layer so it animates on and off with the text.
  2. This needs to be underneath the text, as shown in the following screenshot:
    Creating an animated background shape

We are going to make this project a square format for better viewing on social media. Go to Composition | Composition Setting and make the composition size 1,080 x 1,080.

Summary

In this chapter, we learned about the powerful and complex world of shape layers. We learned how to create custom shapes, edit them, and create animation with these shapes. We learned how to use shape layers as transition elements in our projects. We also learned about the exciting world of text animation presets. We learned how to animate in and out of text animation. Remember—text presets are the starting point for kinetic typography. Play with these parameters to get unique animations. You don't want your animations to be too predictable and look as though they came directly from a preset. Alter the text presets to create something unique.

Questions

  1. What are layer styles?
  2. How do you access layer styles?
  3. What are shape layers?
  4. What is a transition?
  5. How do you create a composition marker?
  6. What are waveforms?
  7. What is a text preset?
  8. How do you access text presets?

Further reading

Consult the following pages for more information on the topics in this chapter:

Chapter 4. Creating an Infographic with Character Animator

In this chapter, we will bring together all the things we have learned so far. We will continue building on the topics we've covered so far by creating an information-based project, jumping into the exciting world of character animation! We will rely heavily on assets from Illustrator. Artwork from Illustrator is vector-based and can be scaled. Adobe Character Animator and Illustrator must be installed on your machine to follow along with this lesson.

The following topics will be covered in this chapter:

  • Kinetic typography
  • Creative transitions
  • Character animation
  • Icon animation

Technical requirements

You need Photoshop, Illustrator installed and a web camera.

Infographics

Infographics are video projects that can be used to communicate information in exciting and memorable ways. Motion graphics animation tools are uniquely suited to this type of storytelling. The ability to create kinetic typography and dazzling transitions makes After Effects perfect for creating infographics. For this project, I want you to think of an issue that has factual data you can explain. Alternatively, you can choose to follow along and use the data and character I use, or you could base your project on an interesting article you have read. Another idea would be to create an infographic about a simple fact or food recipe. The important thing is that there is some information to be conveyed in the project. You should limit the amount of text in your project or it will be too overwhelming for viewers to read it. You could also include some subtle background music to help push your narrative along.

Text

In motion graphics, it's important to understand how to set good type so that it's visually pleasing, has a clear message, and is compositionally strong. It's also important to know how to edit your text. The power of well-designed text is used in the creation of film titles, videos, commercials, and animated gifs. Well-designed text can be an art form in itself. Take time to choose just the right font for your project. Consider what's the least amount of text you can put on the screen at a time to convey the information you want to communicate. It's also important to know how to tweak your text so that it's spaced correctly and stands out in its environment. Carefully consider which fonts to use. Color also makes a huge difference to the emotional impact and readability of text. Start looking at text all around you, in print and in the media. What makes text look good? What makes it stand out and be memorable? Try to recreate text treatments to understand the process of creating beautiful text.

We went over text in previous chapters, but in this chapter, let's discuss spacing features. On the far-right of the panel, near the Effects panel, we have our Character panel. This is where you control your text parameters. Create some text and let's go over these controls. In the top-left corner of the Character panel, you have different fonts to choose from. Click on the dropdown to reveal the different fonts installed on your computer:

Text

Fonts

Under the fonts, you have different weights for your font. Click on this to see what weights are available for the font. Typically, you will have access to bold and italicized weights for your fonts.

To the right of the weights, there is a dropdown that provides you with all of the color selection options. This is where you can add a stroke to your font and change the color of it. You can change the font size underneath the font tab:

Text

Font size

This tab is used to adjust the tracking or the spacing between letters. I use this a lot, because text isn't always perfect after typing. Most text needs to have the tracking adjusted:

Text

Tracking

This is used to adjust the stroke width:

Text

Stroke width

This is used to determine exactly where your stroke is on your type. You have different options, such as Fill Over Stroke and Stroke Over Fill. Experiment with these to see their differences:

Text

Fill Over Stroke

Under this panel, there is the Paragraph panel. This helps you with text alignment:

Text

Paragraph

Next, let's look at the Drop Shadow feature. Drop Shadow is located in the Effects & Presets panel. Add this to some text to see what this effect can do. I love this effect; it's so useful and versatile:

Text

Drop Shadow

Play around with the Opacity, the Distance, Direction, and Softness to get comfortable with this tool:

Text

Drop Shadow adjustments

Creating text on a path

Have you seen those videos where text travels along a path? A custom path is a vector path that is drawn freehand using the pen tool in After Effects. In After Effects, you can make your type align with a path and travel along that path!

We can align our text to a path by following these steps:

  1. Create your type.
  2. Select the text layer.
  3. Create a path with the pen tool on the text layer.
  4. Twirl down Text.
  5. Twirl down Path Options.
  6. To the right, choose the path you just created (Mask 1):
    Creating text on a path

    Inserting text along a path

Animated text

For this project, we are creating an infographic video. Spend some time looking for some information you want to share in this project. You can also choose to download and use the same files I'm using, to follow along. Create your lines of text on two different layers, as follows:

  1. Create some text.
  2. Turn on title-safe guides.
  3. Make sure the text is centered.
  4. Create a background.
  5. Create text—ONLINE LEARNING.
  6. Turn on continuous rasterized on all layers.
  7. Use the following text presets:
    • Fly in with a twist
    • Straight in by word

Sometimes, when you select a text preset, you will need to adjust its settings. The text may not animate in the right place. You can adjust your preset starting position in the following way:

  • Twirl down Text.
  • Twirl down Animator 1.
  • Twirl down Range Selector 1.
  • Find Position and go to the start of the timeline. Adjust Position if necessary.

See the following screenshot for the correct Position parameter to adjust:

Animated text

Adjusting preset position

Editing and importing Illustrator files

Understanding how to put your Illustrator artwork on individual layers is critical, because you can animate each of these layers in After Effects. These layers are vectors, so they can be scaled up without losing quality, and can easily be edited. Separating images from the background in Photoshop can be a long process. You can import ep files into Illustrator and save them as ai files. Make sure Illustrator is downloaded on your computer. Open up a file in Illustrator and let's take a look at layers!

In Illustrator, the layer stacking order is like Photoshop and After Effects; hierarchy is important. What's on the top layer will appear in front of everything else. To arrange these layers, simply select a layer and move it in the stacking order.

Very often, every element of an image will be on one layer. You can separate these and put them on their own layer in Illustrator. To see all of the elements of an image, twirl down Layers:

Editing and importing Illustrator files

Illustrator twirl down

Creating a new layer in Illustrator

As you can see in this screenshot, there are other elements that make up this image. If you were to import this into After Effects, everything would be on one layer. You would not be able to animate these elements individually, though. Let's take a look at part of the interface of the Illustrator Layers panel. Look at the lower-right corner of the Illustrator window. There's a button called Create New Layer:

Creating a new layer in Illustrator

Illustrator new layer

Click on the Create New Layer button. This is how you create a new layer in Illustrator.

Once you've created a layer in Illustrator, you need to drag the element you want into that layer. If you double-click on that layer, you can rename it:

Creating a new layer in Illustrator

Dragging to a new layer

Now that you know how to create separate layers for your illustrations. Take a few moments to drag each element to its own layer. We are going to animate these elements in After Effects later:

Creating a new layer in Illustrator

Separate layers

You can edit your Illustrator file extensively. This is great for animation purposes.

The Eyedropper tool

One of my go-to editing tools for changing the color of an element is the Eyedropper tool, which can be used as follows:

  1. You use this tool by selecting the element you want to change.
  2. Go to the far-left of the Illustrator panel.
  3. Choose the Eyedropper Tool (I) or the fill icon:
    The Eyedropper tool

    Eyedropper

  4. Once you have selected either one of these, you can change the color of the element:
    The Eyedropper tool

    Changing the color of an element

    Changing the color of text is done just as it is in After Effects. You can use the Eyedropper tool to choose a color onscreen to change your element to.

  5. To save your file, go up to the upper-left corner of the screen and, under the File tab, choose Save As...:
The Eyedropper tool

Save

This is where you can save your file in a variety of different formats. For our purposes, we want our illustrations saved as Illustrator files. Choose the Adobe Illustrator *AI file format.

Now jump back to After Effects. Once you import your Illustrator file into After Effects, you can jump back into Illustrator, modify the existing layers, save them, and they will automatically update in After Effects. However, any new layers created in the Illustrator file will not import into After Effects. If you need to add a new layer to an Illustrator file, I recommend you save a new Illustrator file. Import the new Illustrator file and incorporate that new layer into the After Effects project. Now we are ready to import our Illustrator files into After Effect and start animating them! I love this process because Illustrator files are so beautiful and easy to work with. So, the way we import our Illustrator files correctly is by choosing the following options:

  1. Import As: Composition - Retain Layer Sizes
  2. Import

Click on Create a composition.

Now that you have imported your Illustrator files, you should see a composition automatically appear in the project panel. Move it into your precomp folder:

The Eyedropper tool

Importing an Illustrator file

This will also import a folder with the individual layers. Move this folder into the IMAGES folder. I love this—it's so organized if you set it up correctly in Illustrator! Take a look at the size of these IMAGES in the folder. This is important because bigger layers increase the render time. Smaller-sized layers are easier to animate. Since these are Illustrator files, they can be scaled up and not lose their quality:

  1. Navigate to the Illustrator precomp.
  2. Duplicate this so that you have a backup copy in After Effects.
  3. Double-click on one of these PRECOMPS. You will see your laptop's individual elements set up exactly how we created them in Illustrator.
  4. When you import Illustrator files, be sure to turn on continuously rasterize:
    The Eyedropper tool

    Continuously rasterize

Continuously rasterize is a way to make your layers render in full resolution. Since these are Illustrator files, they will look crisp no matter how much they are scaled up. Now we are going to parent all of our elements to our monitor:

The Eyedropper tool

Parent elements

Copy all of these elements and paste them into the composition with your type composition, then do the following:

  1. Name this composition ONLINE LEARNING
  2. Select the monitor layer you parented everything to
  3. Scale this layer down to fit in the scene

When you move this layer, all your elements will move with it, because you parented them to it:

The Eyedropper tool

Monitor resize

Let's take a look at what we have created so far and be proud of ourselves! We now have our first logo element set up and ready to be animated. Great job!

Animation principles

At this point, I am going to slow things down and talk about animation principles. We are about to animate our logo and I want you to have a greater understanding of how to move your elements in convincing dynamic ways. Walt Disney—one of the great pioneers of animation—created 12 animation principles that we still use today:

  • Timing
  • Ease in and out (or slow in and slow out)
  • Arcs
  • Anticipation
  • Exaggeration
  • Squash and stretch
  • Secondary action
  • Follow through and overlapping action
  • Straight ahead action and pose-to-pose action
  • Staging
  • Appeal
  • Personality

The ones I want to pay special attention to are timing, ease in and out, secondary action, and personality. Timing is everything in animation. I will repeat this many times in this book. A rule I almost always use is the rule of 10 key frames. It takes the eye about 10 key frames to visually register anything. Make sure you have at least 10 frames between each action. You may need more frames if you have a lot of information on the screen, but this is a good starting point. Take special care in deciding how long something should be onscreen. You do not want the viewer to be bored, so do not let your animations lag. This is something you will get the hang of the more you animate.

The next thing to pay attention to is ease in and out. This is one of the most important things in animating a convincing, elegant action. In the real world, objects need time to accelerate and slow down, like the human body does; most objects move in this way. There's always a gradual easing at the start and end of a movement. To accomplish this in After Effects, we use the Easy Ease key frame assistant. Adding this immediately makes your animation look better.

Secondary actions also add some personality and realism to your animation. Secondary actions are when your objects move into their positions and have a secondary movement after they land there. It isn't necessary to always use secondary movements, but it can add weight and believability to your movements. It also makes your animations imperfect, which generates interest and creates personality. We will go over these principles a lot more in this book.

Animating a monitor

Now let's get to animating our computer monitor:

  • Move 10–20 key frames down the timeline after our text appears on the screen
  • Move the anchor point of the monitor to the bottom edge of your monitor

To move your anchor point, choose the pan behind tool (Y) and move the anchor point. Now this object will animate around the anchor point. It's important to set this up before animating your object:

Animating a monitor

Monitor anchor point

At this point, we need to lock our parameters where they are. We do that by creating blank key frames:

  • Set scale and rotate key frames at this point
  • Move back in the timeline (to the left) 10 key frames
  • Scale down the monitor to 0
  • Turn on motion blur for everything

Now we are going to create a fake camera move. This will be used as a transition element for our infographic video. We create camera nulls by parenting everything but the background of the null object:

  • Go to the point in the timeline after the monitor has been animated.
  • Create a null object. Select everything except the background.
  • Parent everything selected to the null object.
  • Easy ease all of these key frames.
  • Turn on motion blur for everything except the background. Remember, motion blur must be turned on in two locations:
    Animating a monitor

    Motion blur to icons

Easy Ease will soften your movements and will make them look more organic. Select the key frames for the monitor and the null. Go to Animation | Keyframe Assistance | Easy Ease:

Animating a monitor

Easy Ease

Now let's animate our fake camera push on our monitor. Here are the steps:

  1. Stay at the point where the monitor has been animated.
  2. Create a key frame for the scale and position of the null object.
  3. Jump down (to the right) 10 key frames.
  4. Adjust the Position parameter and scale so that the monitor fills the screen:
    Animating a monitor

    Monitor full screen

Now we are going to animate all of our element pieces. The following are the steps to do that:

  1. Go to the point in the timeline where the monitor fills the screen and select all your elements to your monitor.
  2. Parent them to your monitor.
  3. For each of these elements, position the anchor points at the end of the line.

This will ensure our elements are animating from the correct spot:

Animating a monitor

Anchor point element

Now that your anchor points and your elements are parented correctly to the monitor, we can start animating them. Here's how we can do that:

  1. Select the first element and make a key frame for scale
  2. Jump down the timeline 10 key frames (to the right) and set key frames for scale
  3. Jump back to the previous scale key frame and scale that element down to 0

Great! Let's preview what we have so far! You should see your animated text on the screen. The next thing you should see is the monitor. Next, you should see your fake camera push in and one of your elements scaling up from the background. (All your elements should be in the background.)

The next step is to create a secondary scale movement. Go to the last key frame position, go 10 key frames to the right, then create a blank key frame.

This is how you create a blank key frame. This is helpful for holding a key frame. Also, you can use these triangles to jump between key frames:

  • Jump backward to the keyframe (to the left).
  • Scale that key frame up to 120:
    Animating a monitor

    Adding a blank key frame

Next, you need to Easy Ease these scale key frames:

Animating a monitor

Easy Ease elements

Excellent! Let's look at what we've accomplished. On previewing your work, you should have your monitor element animating on with secondary movement, with motion blur turned on. If turning motion blur on makes your computer run too slowly, you can turn motion blur off temporarily. You will need to remember to turn it back on before you render your project. Repeat the steps to animate the rest of your elements on for your monitor.

At this point, you have all the powerful tools for animating a text with text presets. You also know how to use a camera null. You are grooving along! The next thing we are going to do is animate more type using the same tools we used for the online learning introduction. Be certain that you have time to see the monitor animate on fully with all its pieces and the camera push in. Timing is everything. If you start your text animation too soon, it won't be a pretty sight. Let it rest for a bit, then start animating on the next message. Take a while to animate the text (today's schools are under pressure to do more with less). Be sure to pause in between the lines of text—this will give the viewer time to read it. We are going to add an adjustment layer in between the text and the monitor elements:

  1. Go to the Layer tab.
  2. Then go to Adjustment Layer.
  3. This will add an adjustment layer to your timeline:
    Animating a monitor

    Adjustment layer

Adjustment layers are similar to null objects. They are like a blank layer that you can add effects to and will affect everything underneath them. I'm dropping some important knowledge here; be sure to pick it up and remember it! Effects on an adjustment layer affect everything underneath it in the stacking order. We don't want it to affect the new animated type, so put the adjustment layer under the new type.

Now that we've added our adjustment layer, we can add an effect to it. Here's how we can do that:

Go to the point in the timeline where your monitor and all the elements are completely animated on

  1. Go to your effects and add a Fast Box Blur
  2. While the box radius is at 0, hit the stopwatch in the effects panel
  3. Move down the timeline 10 key frames
  4. Increase the box radius to 60
  5. Turn on Repeat Edge Pixels

After turning on these settings, your screen should look similar to this:

Animating a monitor

Fast box blur

Great! Let's take a look at what we are working with here. As the fake camera moves in and out on the monitor, all the elements animated on the screen blur as the next message is animating on. I just taught you another transition effect. This is a rack focus transition. You have a lot of tools under your belt so far. Take a breather to be proud of what you have accomplished so far. Next, we are moving on to character animation—my favorite subject.

Text

In motion graphics, it's important to understand how to set good type so that it's visually pleasing, has a clear message, and is compositionally strong. It's also important to know how to edit your text. The power of well-designed text is used in the creation of film titles, videos, commercials, and animated gifs. Well-designed text can be an art form in itself. Take time to choose just the right font for your project. Consider what's the least amount of text you can put on the screen at a time to convey the information you want to communicate. It's also important to know how to tweak your text so that it's spaced correctly and stands out in its environment. Carefully consider which fonts to use. Color also makes a huge difference to the emotional impact and readability of text. Start looking at text all around you, in print and in the media. What makes text look good? What makes it stand out and be memorable? Try to recreate text treatments to understand the process of creating beautiful text.

We went over text in previous chapters, but in this chapter, let's discuss spacing features. On the far-right of the panel, near the Effects panel, we have our Character panel. This is where you control your text parameters. Create some text and let's go over these controls. In the top-left corner of the Character panel, you have different fonts to choose from. Click on the dropdown to reveal the different fonts installed on your computer:

Text

Fonts

Under the fonts, you have different weights for your font. Click on this to see what weights are available for the font. Typically, you will have access to bold and italicized weights for your fonts.

To the right of the weights, there is a dropdown that provides you with all of the color selection options. This is where you can add a stroke to your font and change the color of it. You can change the font size underneath the font tab:

Text

Font size

This tab is used to adjust the tracking or the spacing between letters. I use this a lot, because text isn't always perfect after typing. Most text needs to have the tracking adjusted:

Text

Tracking

This is used to adjust the stroke width:

Text

Stroke width

This is used to determine exactly where your stroke is on your type. You have different options, such as Fill Over Stroke and Stroke Over Fill. Experiment with these to see their differences:

Text

Fill Over Stroke

Under this panel, there is the Paragraph panel. This helps you with text alignment:

Text

Paragraph

Next, let's look at the Drop Shadow feature. Drop Shadow is located in the Effects & Presets panel. Add this to some text to see what this effect can do. I love this effect; it's so useful and versatile:

Text

Drop Shadow

Play around with the Opacity, the Distance, Direction, and Softness to get comfortable with this tool:

Text

Drop Shadow adjustments

Creating text on a path

Have you seen those videos where text travels along a path? A custom path is a vector path that is drawn freehand using the pen tool in After Effects. In After Effects, you can make your type align with a path and travel along that path!

We can align our text to a path by following these steps:

  1. Create your type.
  2. Select the text layer.
  3. Create a path with the pen tool on the text layer.
  4. Twirl down Text.
  5. Twirl down Path Options.
  6. To the right, choose the path you just created (Mask 1):
    Creating text on a path

    Inserting text along a path

Animated text

For this project, we are creating an infographic video. Spend some time looking for some information you want to share in this project. You can also choose to download and use the same files I'm using, to follow along. Create your lines of text on two different layers, as follows:

  1. Create some text.
  2. Turn on title-safe guides.
  3. Make sure the text is centered.
  4. Create a background.
  5. Create text—ONLINE LEARNING.
  6. Turn on continuous rasterized on all layers.
  7. Use the following text presets:
    • Fly in with a twist
    • Straight in by word

Sometimes, when you select a text preset, you will need to adjust its settings. The text may not animate in the right place. You can adjust your preset starting position in the following way:

  • Twirl down Text.
  • Twirl down Animator 1.
  • Twirl down Range Selector 1.
  • Find Position and go to the start of the timeline. Adjust Position if necessary.

See the following screenshot for the correct Position parameter to adjust:

Animated text

Adjusting preset position

Editing and importing Illustrator files

Understanding how to put your Illustrator artwork on individual layers is critical, because you can animate each of these layers in After Effects. These layers are vectors, so they can be scaled up without losing quality, and can easily be edited. Separating images from the background in Photoshop can be a long process. You can import ep files into Illustrator and save them as ai files. Make sure Illustrator is downloaded on your computer. Open up a file in Illustrator and let's take a look at layers!

In Illustrator, the layer stacking order is like Photoshop and After Effects; hierarchy is important. What's on the top layer will appear in front of everything else. To arrange these layers, simply select a layer and move it in the stacking order.

Very often, every element of an image will be on one layer. You can separate these and put them on their own layer in Illustrator. To see all of the elements of an image, twirl down Layers:

Editing and importing Illustrator files

Illustrator twirl down

Creating a new layer in Illustrator

As you can see in this screenshot, there are other elements that make up this image. If you were to import this into After Effects, everything would be on one layer. You would not be able to animate these elements individually, though. Let's take a look at part of the interface of the Illustrator Layers panel. Look at the lower-right corner of the Illustrator window. There's a button called Create New Layer:

Creating a new layer in Illustrator

Illustrator new layer

Click on the Create New Layer button. This is how you create a new layer in Illustrator.

Once you've created a layer in Illustrator, you need to drag the element you want into that layer. If you double-click on that layer, you can rename it:

Creating a new layer in Illustrator

Dragging to a new layer

Now that you know how to create separate layers for your illustrations. Take a few moments to drag each element to its own layer. We are going to animate these elements in After Effects later:

Creating a new layer in Illustrator

Separate layers

You can edit your Illustrator file extensively. This is great for animation purposes.

The Eyedropper tool

One of my go-to editing tools for changing the color of an element is the Eyedropper tool, which can be used as follows:

  1. You use this tool by selecting the element you want to change.
  2. Go to the far-left of the Illustrator panel.
  3. Choose the Eyedropper Tool (I) or the fill icon:
    The Eyedropper tool

    Eyedropper

  4. Once you have selected either one of these, you can change the color of the element:
    The Eyedropper tool

    Changing the color of an element

    Changing the color of text is done just as it is in After Effects. You can use the Eyedropper tool to choose a color onscreen to change your element to.

  5. To save your file, go up to the upper-left corner of the screen and, under the File tab, choose Save As...:
The Eyedropper tool

Save

This is where you can save your file in a variety of different formats. For our purposes, we want our illustrations saved as Illustrator files. Choose the Adobe Illustrator *AI file format.

Now jump back to After Effects. Once you import your Illustrator file into After Effects, you can jump back into Illustrator, modify the existing layers, save them, and they will automatically update in After Effects. However, any new layers created in the Illustrator file will not import into After Effects. If you need to add a new layer to an Illustrator file, I recommend you save a new Illustrator file. Import the new Illustrator file and incorporate that new layer into the After Effects project. Now we are ready to import our Illustrator files into After Effect and start animating them! I love this process because Illustrator files are so beautiful and easy to work with. So, the way we import our Illustrator files correctly is by choosing the following options:

  1. Import As: Composition - Retain Layer Sizes
  2. Import

Click on Create a composition.

Now that you have imported your Illustrator files, you should see a composition automatically appear in the project panel. Move it into your precomp folder:

The Eyedropper tool

Importing an Illustrator file

This will also import a folder with the individual layers. Move this folder into the IMAGES folder. I love this—it's so organized if you set it up correctly in Illustrator! Take a look at the size of these IMAGES in the folder. This is important because bigger layers increase the render time. Smaller-sized layers are easier to animate. Since these are Illustrator files, they can be scaled up and not lose their quality:

  1. Navigate to the Illustrator precomp.
  2. Duplicate this so that you have a backup copy in After Effects.
  3. Double-click on one of these PRECOMPS. You will see your laptop's individual elements set up exactly how we created them in Illustrator.
  4. When you import Illustrator files, be sure to turn on continuously rasterize:
    The Eyedropper tool

    Continuously rasterize

Continuously rasterize is a way to make your layers render in full resolution. Since these are Illustrator files, they will look crisp no matter how much they are scaled up. Now we are going to parent all of our elements to our monitor:

The Eyedropper tool

Parent elements

Copy all of these elements and paste them into the composition with your type composition, then do the following:

  1. Name this composition ONLINE LEARNING
  2. Select the monitor layer you parented everything to
  3. Scale this layer down to fit in the scene

When you move this layer, all your elements will move with it, because you parented them to it:

The Eyedropper tool

Monitor resize

Let's take a look at what we have created so far and be proud of ourselves! We now have our first logo element set up and ready to be animated. Great job!

Animation principles

At this point, I am going to slow things down and talk about animation principles. We are about to animate our logo and I want you to have a greater understanding of how to move your elements in convincing dynamic ways. Walt Disney—one of the great pioneers of animation—created 12 animation principles that we still use today:

  • Timing
  • Ease in and out (or slow in and slow out)
  • Arcs
  • Anticipation
  • Exaggeration
  • Squash and stretch
  • Secondary action
  • Follow through and overlapping action
  • Straight ahead action and pose-to-pose action
  • Staging
  • Appeal
  • Personality

The ones I want to pay special attention to are timing, ease in and out, secondary action, and personality. Timing is everything in animation. I will repeat this many times in this book. A rule I almost always use is the rule of 10 key frames. It takes the eye about 10 key frames to visually register anything. Make sure you have at least 10 frames between each action. You may need more frames if you have a lot of information on the screen, but this is a good starting point. Take special care in deciding how long something should be onscreen. You do not want the viewer to be bored, so do not let your animations lag. This is something you will get the hang of the more you animate.

The next thing to pay attention to is ease in and out. This is one of the most important things in animating a convincing, elegant action. In the real world, objects need time to accelerate and slow down, like the human body does; most objects move in this way. There's always a gradual easing at the start and end of a movement. To accomplish this in After Effects, we use the Easy Ease key frame assistant. Adding this immediately makes your animation look better.

Secondary actions also add some personality and realism to your animation. Secondary actions are when your objects move into their positions and have a secondary movement after they land there. It isn't necessary to always use secondary movements, but it can add weight and believability to your movements. It also makes your animations imperfect, which generates interest and creates personality. We will go over these principles a lot more in this book.

Animating a monitor

Now let's get to animating our computer monitor:

  • Move 10–20 key frames down the timeline after our text appears on the screen
  • Move the anchor point of the monitor to the bottom edge of your monitor

To move your anchor point, choose the pan behind tool (Y) and move the anchor point. Now this object will animate around the anchor point. It's important to set this up before animating your object:

Animating a monitor

Monitor anchor point

At this point, we need to lock our parameters where they are. We do that by creating blank key frames:

  • Set scale and rotate key frames at this point
  • Move back in the timeline (to the left) 10 key frames
  • Scale down the monitor to 0
  • Turn on motion blur for everything

Now we are going to create a fake camera move. This will be used as a transition element for our infographic video. We create camera nulls by parenting everything but the background of the null object:

  • Go to the point in the timeline after the monitor has been animated.
  • Create a null object. Select everything except the background.
  • Parent everything selected to the null object.
  • Easy ease all of these key frames.
  • Turn on motion blur for everything except the background. Remember, motion blur must be turned on in two locations:
    Animating a monitor

    Motion blur to icons

Easy Ease will soften your movements and will make them look more organic. Select the key frames for the monitor and the null. Go to Animation | Keyframe Assistance | Easy Ease:

Animating a monitor

Easy Ease

Now let's animate our fake camera push on our monitor. Here are the steps:

  1. Stay at the point where the monitor has been animated.
  2. Create a key frame for the scale and position of the null object.
  3. Jump down (to the right) 10 key frames.
  4. Adjust the Position parameter and scale so that the monitor fills the screen:
    Animating a monitor

    Monitor full screen

Now we are going to animate all of our element pieces. The following are the steps to do that:

  1. Go to the point in the timeline where the monitor fills the screen and select all your elements to your monitor.
  2. Parent them to your monitor.
  3. For each of these elements, position the anchor points at the end of the line.

This will ensure our elements are animating from the correct spot:

Animating a monitor

Anchor point element

Now that your anchor points and your elements are parented correctly to the monitor, we can start animating them. Here's how we can do that:

  1. Select the first element and make a key frame for scale
  2. Jump down the timeline 10 key frames (to the right) and set key frames for scale
  3. Jump back to the previous scale key frame and scale that element down to 0

Great! Let's preview what we have so far! You should see your animated text on the screen. The next thing you should see is the monitor. Next, you should see your fake camera push in and one of your elements scaling up from the background. (All your elements should be in the background.)

The next step is to create a secondary scale movement. Go to the last key frame position, go 10 key frames to the right, then create a blank key frame.

This is how you create a blank key frame. This is helpful for holding a key frame. Also, you can use these triangles to jump between key frames:

  • Jump backward to the keyframe (to the left).
  • Scale that key frame up to 120:
    Animating a monitor

    Adding a blank key frame

Next, you need to Easy Ease these scale key frames:

Animating a monitor

Easy Ease elements

Excellent! Let's look at what we've accomplished. On previewing your work, you should have your monitor element animating on with secondary movement, with motion blur turned on. If turning motion blur on makes your computer run too slowly, you can turn motion blur off temporarily. You will need to remember to turn it back on before you render your project. Repeat the steps to animate the rest of your elements on for your monitor.

At this point, you have all the powerful tools for animating a text with text presets. You also know how to use a camera null. You are grooving along! The next thing we are going to do is animate more type using the same tools we used for the online learning introduction. Be certain that you have time to see the monitor animate on fully with all its pieces and the camera push in. Timing is everything. If you start your text animation too soon, it won't be a pretty sight. Let it rest for a bit, then start animating on the next message. Take a while to animate the text (today's schools are under pressure to do more with less). Be sure to pause in between the lines of text—this will give the viewer time to read it. We are going to add an adjustment layer in between the text and the monitor elements:

  1. Go to the Layer tab.
  2. Then go to Adjustment Layer.
  3. This will add an adjustment layer to your timeline:
    Animating a monitor

    Adjustment layer

Adjustment layers are similar to null objects. They are like a blank layer that you can add effects to and will affect everything underneath them. I'm dropping some important knowledge here; be sure to pick it up and remember it! Effects on an adjustment layer affect everything underneath it in the stacking order. We don't want it to affect the new animated type, so put the adjustment layer under the new type.

Now that we've added our adjustment layer, we can add an effect to it. Here's how we can do that:

Go to the point in the timeline where your monitor and all the elements are completely animated on

  1. Go to your effects and add a Fast Box Blur
  2. While the box radius is at 0, hit the stopwatch in the effects panel
  3. Move down the timeline 10 key frames
  4. Increase the box radius to 60
  5. Turn on Repeat Edge Pixels

After turning on these settings, your screen should look similar to this:

Animating a monitor

Fast box blur

Great! Let's take a look at what we are working with here. As the fake camera moves in and out on the monitor, all the elements animated on the screen blur as the next message is animating on. I just taught you another transition effect. This is a rack focus transition. You have a lot of tools under your belt so far. Take a breather to be proud of what you have accomplished so far. Next, we are moving on to character animation—my favorite subject.

Creating text on a path

Have you seen those videos where text travels along a path? A custom path is a vector path that is drawn freehand using the pen tool in After Effects. In After Effects, you can make your type align with a path and travel along that path!

We can align our text to a path by following these steps:

  1. Create your type.
  2. Select the text layer.
  3. Create a path with the pen tool on the text layer.
  4. Twirl down Text.
  5. Twirl down Path Options.
  6. To the right, choose the path you just created (Mask 1):
    Creating text on a path

    Inserting text along a path

Animated text

For this project, we are creating an infographic video. Spend some time looking for some information you want to share in this project. You can also choose to download and use the same files I'm using, to follow along. Create your lines of text on two different layers, as follows:

  1. Create some text.
  2. Turn on title-safe guides.
  3. Make sure the text is centered.
  4. Create a background.
  5. Create text—ONLINE LEARNING.
  6. Turn on continuous rasterized on all layers.
  7. Use the following text presets:
    • Fly in with a twist
    • Straight in by word

Sometimes, when you select a text preset, you will need to adjust its settings. The text may not animate in the right place. You can adjust your preset starting position in the following way:

  • Twirl down Text.
  • Twirl down Animator 1.
  • Twirl down Range Selector 1.
  • Find Position and go to the start of the timeline. Adjust Position if necessary.

See the following screenshot for the correct Position parameter to adjust:

Animated text

Adjusting preset position

Editing and importing Illustrator files

Understanding how to put your Illustrator artwork on individual layers is critical, because you can animate each of these layers in After Effects. These layers are vectors, so they can be scaled up without losing quality, and can easily be edited. Separating images from the background in Photoshop can be a long process. You can import ep files into Illustrator and save them as ai files. Make sure Illustrator is downloaded on your computer. Open up a file in Illustrator and let's take a look at layers!

In Illustrator, the layer stacking order is like Photoshop and After Effects; hierarchy is important. What's on the top layer will appear in front of everything else. To arrange these layers, simply select a layer and move it in the stacking order.

Very often, every element of an image will be on one layer. You can separate these and put them on their own layer in Illustrator. To see all of the elements of an image, twirl down Layers:

Editing and importing Illustrator files

Illustrator twirl down

Creating a new layer in Illustrator

As you can see in this screenshot, there are other elements that make up this image. If you were to import this into After Effects, everything would be on one layer. You would not be able to animate these elements individually, though. Let's take a look at part of the interface of the Illustrator Layers panel. Look at the lower-right corner of the Illustrator window. There's a button called Create New Layer:

Creating a new layer in Illustrator

Illustrator new layer

Click on the Create New Layer button. This is how you create a new layer in Illustrator.

Once you've created a layer in Illustrator, you need to drag the element you want into that layer. If you double-click on that layer, you can rename it:

Creating a new layer in Illustrator

Dragging to a new layer

Now that you know how to create separate layers for your illustrations. Take a few moments to drag each element to its own layer. We are going to animate these elements in After Effects later:

Creating a new layer in Illustrator

Separate layers

You can edit your Illustrator file extensively. This is great for animation purposes.

The Eyedropper tool

One of my go-to editing tools for changing the color of an element is the Eyedropper tool, which can be used as follows:

  1. You use this tool by selecting the element you want to change.
  2. Go to the far-left of the Illustrator panel.
  3. Choose the Eyedropper Tool (I) or the fill icon:
    The Eyedropper tool

    Eyedropper

  4. Once you have selected either one of these, you can change the color of the element:
    The Eyedropper tool

    Changing the color of an element

    Changing the color of text is done just as it is in After Effects. You can use the Eyedropper tool to choose a color onscreen to change your element to.

  5. To save your file, go up to the upper-left corner of the screen and, under the File tab, choose Save As...:
The Eyedropper tool

Save

This is where you can save your file in a variety of different formats. For our purposes, we want our illustrations saved as Illustrator files. Choose the Adobe Illustrator *AI file format.

Now jump back to After Effects. Once you import your Illustrator file into After Effects, you can jump back into Illustrator, modify the existing layers, save them, and they will automatically update in After Effects. However, any new layers created in the Illustrator file will not import into After Effects. If you need to add a new layer to an Illustrator file, I recommend you save a new Illustrator file. Import the new Illustrator file and incorporate that new layer into the After Effects project. Now we are ready to import our Illustrator files into After Effect and start animating them! I love this process because Illustrator files are so beautiful and easy to work with. So, the way we import our Illustrator files correctly is by choosing the following options:

  1. Import As: Composition - Retain Layer Sizes
  2. Import

Click on Create a composition.

Now that you have imported your Illustrator files, you should see a composition automatically appear in the project panel. Move it into your precomp folder:

The Eyedropper tool

Importing an Illustrator file

This will also import a folder with the individual layers. Move this folder into the IMAGES folder. I love this—it's so organized if you set it up correctly in Illustrator! Take a look at the size of these IMAGES in the folder. This is important because bigger layers increase the render time. Smaller-sized layers are easier to animate. Since these are Illustrator files, they can be scaled up and not lose their quality:

  1. Navigate to the Illustrator precomp.
  2. Duplicate this so that you have a backup copy in After Effects.
  3. Double-click on one of these PRECOMPS. You will see your laptop's individual elements set up exactly how we created them in Illustrator.
  4. When you import Illustrator files, be sure to turn on continuously rasterize:
    The Eyedropper tool

    Continuously rasterize

Continuously rasterize is a way to make your layers render in full resolution. Since these are Illustrator files, they will look crisp no matter how much they are scaled up. Now we are going to parent all of our elements to our monitor:

The Eyedropper tool

Parent elements

Copy all of these elements and paste them into the composition with your type composition, then do the following:

  1. Name this composition ONLINE LEARNING
  2. Select the monitor layer you parented everything to
  3. Scale this layer down to fit in the scene

When you move this layer, all your elements will move with it, because you parented them to it:

The Eyedropper tool

Monitor resize

Let's take a look at what we have created so far and be proud of ourselves! We now have our first logo element set up and ready to be animated. Great job!

Animation principles

At this point, I am going to slow things down and talk about animation principles. We are about to animate our logo and I want you to have a greater understanding of how to move your elements in convincing dynamic ways. Walt Disney—one of the great pioneers of animation—created 12 animation principles that we still use today:

  • Timing
  • Ease in and out (or slow in and slow out)
  • Arcs
  • Anticipation
  • Exaggeration
  • Squash and stretch
  • Secondary action
  • Follow through and overlapping action
  • Straight ahead action and pose-to-pose action
  • Staging
  • Appeal
  • Personality

The ones I want to pay special attention to are timing, ease in and out, secondary action, and personality. Timing is everything in animation. I will repeat this many times in this book. A rule I almost always use is the rule of 10 key frames. It takes the eye about 10 key frames to visually register anything. Make sure you have at least 10 frames between each action. You may need more frames if you have a lot of information on the screen, but this is a good starting point. Take special care in deciding how long something should be onscreen. You do not want the viewer to be bored, so do not let your animations lag. This is something you will get the hang of the more you animate.

The next thing to pay attention to is ease in and out. This is one of the most important things in animating a convincing, elegant action. In the real world, objects need time to accelerate and slow down, like the human body does; most objects move in this way. There's always a gradual easing at the start and end of a movement. To accomplish this in After Effects, we use the Easy Ease key frame assistant. Adding this immediately makes your animation look better.

Secondary actions also add some personality and realism to your animation. Secondary actions are when your objects move into their positions and have a secondary movement after they land there. It isn't necessary to always use secondary movements, but it can add weight and believability to your movements. It also makes your animations imperfect, which generates interest and creates personality. We will go over these principles a lot more in this book.

Animating a monitor

Now let's get to animating our computer monitor:

  • Move 10–20 key frames down the timeline after our text appears on the screen
  • Move the anchor point of the monitor to the bottom edge of your monitor

To move your anchor point, choose the pan behind tool (Y) and move the anchor point. Now this object will animate around the anchor point. It's important to set this up before animating your object:

Animating a monitor

Monitor anchor point

At this point, we need to lock our parameters where they are. We do that by creating blank key frames:

  • Set scale and rotate key frames at this point
  • Move back in the timeline (to the left) 10 key frames
  • Scale down the monitor to 0
  • Turn on motion blur for everything

Now we are going to create a fake camera move. This will be used as a transition element for our infographic video. We create camera nulls by parenting everything but the background of the null object:

  • Go to the point in the timeline after the monitor has been animated.
  • Create a null object. Select everything except the background.
  • Parent everything selected to the null object.
  • Easy ease all of these key frames.
  • Turn on motion blur for everything except the background. Remember, motion blur must be turned on in two locations:
    Animating a monitor

    Motion blur to icons

Easy Ease will soften your movements and will make them look more organic. Select the key frames for the monitor and the null. Go to Animation | Keyframe Assistance | Easy Ease:

Animating a monitor

Easy Ease

Now let's animate our fake camera push on our monitor. Here are the steps:

  1. Stay at the point where the monitor has been animated.
  2. Create a key frame for the scale and position of the null object.
  3. Jump down (to the right) 10 key frames.
  4. Adjust the Position parameter and scale so that the monitor fills the screen:
    Animating a monitor

    Monitor full screen

Now we are going to animate all of our element pieces. The following are the steps to do that:

  1. Go to the point in the timeline where the monitor fills the screen and select all your elements to your monitor.
  2. Parent them to your monitor.
  3. For each of these elements, position the anchor points at the end of the line.

This will ensure our elements are animating from the correct spot:

Animating a monitor

Anchor point element

Now that your anchor points and your elements are parented correctly to the monitor, we can start animating them. Here's how we can do that:

  1. Select the first element and make a key frame for scale
  2. Jump down the timeline 10 key frames (to the right) and set key frames for scale
  3. Jump back to the previous scale key frame and scale that element down to 0

Great! Let's preview what we have so far! You should see your animated text on the screen. The next thing you should see is the monitor. Next, you should see your fake camera push in and one of your elements scaling up from the background. (All your elements should be in the background.)

The next step is to create a secondary scale movement. Go to the last key frame position, go 10 key frames to the right, then create a blank key frame.

This is how you create a blank key frame. This is helpful for holding a key frame. Also, you can use these triangles to jump between key frames:

  • Jump backward to the keyframe (to the left).
  • Scale that key frame up to 120:
    Animating a monitor

    Adding a blank key frame

Next, you need to Easy Ease these scale key frames:

Animating a monitor

Easy Ease elements

Excellent! Let's look at what we've accomplished. On previewing your work, you should have your monitor element animating on with secondary movement, with motion blur turned on. If turning motion blur on makes your computer run too slowly, you can turn motion blur off temporarily. You will need to remember to turn it back on before you render your project. Repeat the steps to animate the rest of your elements on for your monitor.

At this point, you have all the powerful tools for animating a text with text presets. You also know how to use a camera null. You are grooving along! The next thing we are going to do is animate more type using the same tools we used for the online learning introduction. Be certain that you have time to see the monitor animate on fully with all its pieces and the camera push in. Timing is everything. If you start your text animation too soon, it won't be a pretty sight. Let it rest for a bit, then start animating on the next message. Take a while to animate the text (today's schools are under pressure to do more with less). Be sure to pause in between the lines of text—this will give the viewer time to read it. We are going to add an adjustment layer in between the text and the monitor elements:

  1. Go to the Layer tab.
  2. Then go to Adjustment Layer.
  3. This will add an adjustment layer to your timeline:
    Animating a monitor

    Adjustment layer

Adjustment layers are similar to null objects. They are like a blank layer that you can add effects to and will affect everything underneath them. I'm dropping some important knowledge here; be sure to pick it up and remember it! Effects on an adjustment layer affect everything underneath it in the stacking order. We don't want it to affect the new animated type, so put the adjustment layer under the new type.

Now that we've added our adjustment layer, we can add an effect to it. Here's how we can do that:

Go to the point in the timeline where your monitor and all the elements are completely animated on

  1. Go to your effects and add a Fast Box Blur
  2. While the box radius is at 0, hit the stopwatch in the effects panel
  3. Move down the timeline 10 key frames
  4. Increase the box radius to 60
  5. Turn on Repeat Edge Pixels

After turning on these settings, your screen should look similar to this:

Animating a monitor

Fast box blur

Great! Let's take a look at what we are working with here. As the fake camera moves in and out on the monitor, all the elements animated on the screen blur as the next message is animating on. I just taught you another transition effect. This is a rack focus transition. You have a lot of tools under your belt so far. Take a breather to be proud of what you have accomplished so far. Next, we are moving on to character animation—my favorite subject.

Animated text

For this project, we are creating an infographic video. Spend some time looking for some information you want to share in this project. You can also choose to download and use the same files I'm using, to follow along. Create your lines of text on two different layers, as follows:

  1. Create some text.
  2. Turn on title-safe guides.
  3. Make sure the text is centered.
  4. Create a background.
  5. Create text—ONLINE LEARNING.
  6. Turn on continuous rasterized on all layers.
  7. Use the following text presets:
    • Fly in with a twist
    • Straight in by word

Sometimes, when you select a text preset, you will need to adjust its settings. The text may not animate in the right place. You can adjust your preset starting position in the following way:

  • Twirl down Text.
  • Twirl down Animator 1.
  • Twirl down Range Selector 1.
  • Find Position and go to the start of the timeline. Adjust Position if necessary.

See the following screenshot for the correct Position parameter to adjust:

Animated text

Adjusting preset position

Editing and importing Illustrator files

Understanding how to put your Illustrator artwork on individual layers is critical, because you can animate each of these layers in After Effects. These layers are vectors, so they can be scaled up without losing quality, and can easily be edited. Separating images from the background in Photoshop can be a long process. You can import ep files into Illustrator and save them as ai files. Make sure Illustrator is downloaded on your computer. Open up a file in Illustrator and let's take a look at layers!

In Illustrator, the layer stacking order is like Photoshop and After Effects; hierarchy is important. What's on the top layer will appear in front of everything else. To arrange these layers, simply select a layer and move it in the stacking order.

Very often, every element of an image will be on one layer. You can separate these and put them on their own layer in Illustrator. To see all of the elements of an image, twirl down Layers:

Editing and importing Illustrator files

Illustrator twirl down

Creating a new layer in Illustrator

As you can see in this screenshot, there are other elements that make up this image. If you were to import this into After Effects, everything would be on one layer. You would not be able to animate these elements individually, though. Let's take a look at part of the interface of the Illustrator Layers panel. Look at the lower-right corner of the Illustrator window. There's a button called Create New Layer:

Creating a new layer in Illustrator

Illustrator new layer

Click on the Create New Layer button. This is how you create a new layer in Illustrator.

Once you've created a layer in Illustrator, you need to drag the element you want into that layer. If you double-click on that layer, you can rename it:

Creating a new layer in Illustrator

Dragging to a new layer

Now that you know how to create separate layers for your illustrations. Take a few moments to drag each element to its own layer. We are going to animate these elements in After Effects later:

Creating a new layer in Illustrator

Separate layers

You can edit your Illustrator file extensively. This is great for animation purposes.

The Eyedropper tool

One of my go-to editing tools for changing the color of an element is the Eyedropper tool, which can be used as follows:

  1. You use this tool by selecting the element you want to change.
  2. Go to the far-left of the Illustrator panel.
  3. Choose the Eyedropper Tool (I) or the fill icon:
    The Eyedropper tool

    Eyedropper

  4. Once you have selected either one of these, you can change the color of the element:
    The Eyedropper tool

    Changing the color of an element

    Changing the color of text is done just as it is in After Effects. You can use the Eyedropper tool to choose a color onscreen to change your element to.

  5. To save your file, go up to the upper-left corner of the screen and, under the File tab, choose Save As...:
The Eyedropper tool

Save

This is where you can save your file in a variety of different formats. For our purposes, we want our illustrations saved as Illustrator files. Choose the Adobe Illustrator *AI file format.

Now jump back to After Effects. Once you import your Illustrator file into After Effects, you can jump back into Illustrator, modify the existing layers, save them, and they will automatically update in After Effects. However, any new layers created in the Illustrator file will not import into After Effects. If you need to add a new layer to an Illustrator file, I recommend you save a new Illustrator file. Import the new Illustrator file and incorporate that new layer into the After Effects project. Now we are ready to import our Illustrator files into After Effect and start animating them! I love this process because Illustrator files are so beautiful and easy to work with. So, the way we import our Illustrator files correctly is by choosing the following options:

  1. Import As: Composition - Retain Layer Sizes
  2. Import

Click on Create a composition.

Now that you have imported your Illustrator files, you should see a composition automatically appear in the project panel. Move it into your precomp folder:

The Eyedropper tool

Importing an Illustrator file

This will also import a folder with the individual layers. Move this folder into the IMAGES folder. I love this—it's so organized if you set it up correctly in Illustrator! Take a look at the size of these IMAGES in the folder. This is important because bigger layers increase the render time. Smaller-sized layers are easier to animate. Since these are Illustrator files, they can be scaled up and not lose their quality:

  1. Navigate to the Illustrator precomp.
  2. Duplicate this so that you have a backup copy in After Effects.
  3. Double-click on one of these PRECOMPS. You will see your laptop's individual elements set up exactly how we created them in Illustrator.
  4. When you import Illustrator files, be sure to turn on continuously rasterize:
    The Eyedropper tool

    Continuously rasterize

Continuously rasterize is a way to make your layers render in full resolution. Since these are Illustrator files, they will look crisp no matter how much they are scaled up. Now we are going to parent all of our elements to our monitor:

The Eyedropper tool

Parent elements

Copy all of these elements and paste them into the composition with your type composition, then do the following:

  1. Name this composition ONLINE LEARNING
  2. Select the monitor layer you parented everything to
  3. Scale this layer down to fit in the scene

When you move this layer, all your elements will move with it, because you parented them to it:

The Eyedropper tool

Monitor resize

Let's take a look at what we have created so far and be proud of ourselves! We now have our first logo element set up and ready to be animated. Great job!

Animation principles

At this point, I am going to slow things down and talk about animation principles. We are about to animate our logo and I want you to have a greater understanding of how to move your elements in convincing dynamic ways. Walt Disney—one of the great pioneers of animation—created 12 animation principles that we still use today:

  • Timing
  • Ease in and out (or slow in and slow out)
  • Arcs
  • Anticipation
  • Exaggeration
  • Squash and stretch
  • Secondary action
  • Follow through and overlapping action
  • Straight ahead action and pose-to-pose action
  • Staging
  • Appeal
  • Personality

The ones I want to pay special attention to are timing, ease in and out, secondary action, and personality. Timing is everything in animation. I will repeat this many times in this book. A rule I almost always use is the rule of 10 key frames. It takes the eye about 10 key frames to visually register anything. Make sure you have at least 10 frames between each action. You may need more frames if you have a lot of information on the screen, but this is a good starting point. Take special care in deciding how long something should be onscreen. You do not want the viewer to be bored, so do not let your animations lag. This is something you will get the hang of the more you animate.

The next thing to pay attention to is ease in and out. This is one of the most important things in animating a convincing, elegant action. In the real world, objects need time to accelerate and slow down, like the human body does; most objects move in this way. There's always a gradual easing at the start and end of a movement. To accomplish this in After Effects, we use the Easy Ease key frame assistant. Adding this immediately makes your animation look better.

Secondary actions also add some personality and realism to your animation. Secondary actions are when your objects move into their positions and have a secondary movement after they land there. It isn't necessary to always use secondary movements, but it can add weight and believability to your movements. It also makes your animations imperfect, which generates interest and creates personality. We will go over these principles a lot more in this book.

Animating a monitor

Now let's get to animating our computer monitor:

  • Move 10–20 key frames down the timeline after our text appears on the screen
  • Move the anchor point of the monitor to the bottom edge of your monitor

To move your anchor point, choose the pan behind tool (Y) and move the anchor point. Now this object will animate around the anchor point. It's important to set this up before animating your object:

Animating a monitor

Monitor anchor point

At this point, we need to lock our parameters where they are. We do that by creating blank key frames:

  • Set scale and rotate key frames at this point
  • Move back in the timeline (to the left) 10 key frames
  • Scale down the monitor to 0
  • Turn on motion blur for everything

Now we are going to create a fake camera move. This will be used as a transition element for our infographic video. We create camera nulls by parenting everything but the background of the null object:

  • Go to the point in the timeline after the monitor has been animated.
  • Create a null object. Select everything except the background.
  • Parent everything selected to the null object.
  • Easy ease all of these key frames.
  • Turn on motion blur for everything except the background. Remember, motion blur must be turned on in two locations:
    Animating a monitor

    Motion blur to icons

Easy Ease will soften your movements and will make them look more organic. Select the key frames for the monitor and the null. Go to Animation | Keyframe Assistance | Easy Ease:

Animating a monitor

Easy Ease

Now let's animate our fake camera push on our monitor. Here are the steps:

  1. Stay at the point where the monitor has been animated.
  2. Create a key frame for the scale and position of the null object.
  3. Jump down (to the right) 10 key frames.
  4. Adjust the Position parameter and scale so that the monitor fills the screen:
    Animating a monitor

    Monitor full screen

Now we are going to animate all of our element pieces. The following are the steps to do that:

  1. Go to the point in the timeline where the monitor fills the screen and select all your elements to your monitor.
  2. Parent them to your monitor.
  3. For each of these elements, position the anchor points at the end of the line.

This will ensure our elements are animating from the correct spot:

Animating a monitor

Anchor point element

Now that your anchor points and your elements are parented correctly to the monitor, we can start animating them. Here's how we can do that:

  1. Select the first element and make a key frame for scale
  2. Jump down the timeline 10 key frames (to the right) and set key frames for scale
  3. Jump back to the previous scale key frame and scale that element down to 0

Great! Let's preview what we have so far! You should see your animated text on the screen. The next thing you should see is the monitor. Next, you should see your fake camera push in and one of your elements scaling up from the background. (All your elements should be in the background.)

The next step is to create a secondary scale movement. Go to the last key frame position, go 10 key frames to the right, then create a blank key frame.

This is how you create a blank key frame. This is helpful for holding a key frame. Also, you can use these triangles to jump between key frames:

  • Jump backward to the keyframe (to the left).
  • Scale that key frame up to 120:
    Animating a monitor

    Adding a blank key frame

Next, you need to Easy Ease these scale key frames:

Animating a monitor

Easy Ease elements

Excellent! Let's look at what we've accomplished. On previewing your work, you should have your monitor element animating on with secondary movement, with motion blur turned on. If turning motion blur on makes your computer run too slowly, you can turn motion blur off temporarily. You will need to remember to turn it back on before you render your project. Repeat the steps to animate the rest of your elements on for your monitor.

At this point, you have all the powerful tools for animating a text with text presets. You also know how to use a camera null. You are grooving along! The next thing we are going to do is animate more type using the same tools we used for the online learning introduction. Be certain that you have time to see the monitor animate on fully with all its pieces and the camera push in. Timing is everything. If you start your text animation too soon, it won't be a pretty sight. Let it rest for a bit, then start animating on the next message. Take a while to animate the text (today's schools are under pressure to do more with less). Be sure to pause in between the lines of text—this will give the viewer time to read it. We are going to add an adjustment layer in between the text and the monitor elements:

  1. Go to the Layer tab.
  2. Then go to Adjustment Layer.
  3. This will add an adjustment layer to your timeline:
    Animating a monitor

    Adjustment layer

Adjustment layers are similar to null objects. They are like a blank layer that you can add effects to and will affect everything underneath them. I'm dropping some important knowledge here; be sure to pick it up and remember it! Effects on an adjustment layer affect everything underneath it in the stacking order. We don't want it to affect the new animated type, so put the adjustment layer under the new type.

Now that we've added our adjustment layer, we can add an effect to it. Here's how we can do that:

Go to the point in the timeline where your monitor and all the elements are completely animated on

  1. Go to your effects and add a Fast Box Blur
  2. While the box radius is at 0, hit the stopwatch in the effects panel
  3. Move down the timeline 10 key frames
  4. Increase the box radius to 60
  5. Turn on Repeat Edge Pixels

After turning on these settings, your screen should look similar to this:

Animating a monitor

Fast box blur

Great! Let's take a look at what we are working with here. As the fake camera moves in and out on the monitor, all the elements animated on the screen blur as the next message is animating on. I just taught you another transition effect. This is a rack focus transition. You have a lot of tools under your belt so far. Take a breather to be proud of what you have accomplished so far. Next, we are moving on to character animation—my favorite subject.

Editing and importing Illustrator files

Understanding how to put your Illustrator artwork on individual layers is critical, because you can animate each of these layers in After Effects. These layers are vectors, so they can be scaled up without losing quality, and can easily be edited. Separating images from the background in Photoshop can be a long process. You can import ep files into Illustrator and save them as ai files. Make sure Illustrator is downloaded on your computer. Open up a file in Illustrator and let's take a look at layers!

In Illustrator, the layer stacking order is like Photoshop and After Effects; hierarchy is important. What's on the top layer will appear in front of everything else. To arrange these layers, simply select a layer and move it in the stacking order.

Very often, every element of an image will be on one layer. You can separate these and put them on their own layer in Illustrator. To see all of the elements of an image, twirl down Layers:

Editing and importing Illustrator files

Illustrator twirl down

Creating a new layer in Illustrator

As you can see in this screenshot, there are other elements that make up this image. If you were to import this into After Effects, everything would be on one layer. You would not be able to animate these elements individually, though. Let's take a look at part of the interface of the Illustrator Layers panel. Look at the lower-right corner of the Illustrator window. There's a button called Create New Layer:

Creating a new layer in Illustrator

Illustrator new layer

Click on the Create New Layer button. This is how you create a new layer in Illustrator.

Once you've created a layer in Illustrator, you need to drag the element you want into that layer. If you double-click on that layer, you can rename it:

Creating a new layer in Illustrator

Dragging to a new layer

Now that you know how to create separate layers for your illustrations. Take a few moments to drag each element to its own layer. We are going to animate these elements in After Effects later:

Creating a new layer in Illustrator

Separate layers

You can edit your Illustrator file extensively. This is great for animation purposes.

The Eyedropper tool

One of my go-to editing tools for changing the color of an element is the Eyedropper tool, which can be used as follows:

  1. You use this tool by selecting the element you want to change.
  2. Go to the far-left of the Illustrator panel.
  3. Choose the Eyedropper Tool (I) or the fill icon:
    The Eyedropper tool

    Eyedropper

  4. Once you have selected either one of these, you can change the color of the element:
    The Eyedropper tool

    Changing the color of an element

    Changing the color of text is done just as it is in After Effects. You can use the Eyedropper tool to choose a color onscreen to change your element to.

  5. To save your file, go up to the upper-left corner of the screen and, under the File tab, choose Save As...:
The Eyedropper tool

Save

This is where you can save your file in a variety of different formats. For our purposes, we want our illustrations saved as Illustrator files. Choose the Adobe Illustrator *AI file format.

Now jump back to After Effects. Once you import your Illustrator file into After Effects, you can jump back into Illustrator, modify the existing layers, save them, and they will automatically update in After Effects. However, any new layers created in the Illustrator file will not import into After Effects. If you need to add a new layer to an Illustrator file, I recommend you save a new Illustrator file. Import the new Illustrator file and incorporate that new layer into the After Effects project. Now we are ready to import our Illustrator files into After Effect and start animating them! I love this process because Illustrator files are so beautiful and easy to work with. So, the way we import our Illustrator files correctly is by choosing the following options:

  1. Import As: Composition - Retain Layer Sizes
  2. Import

Click on Create a composition.

Now that you have imported your Illustrator files, you should see a composition automatically appear in the project panel. Move it into your precomp folder:

The Eyedropper tool

Importing an Illustrator file

This will also import a folder with the individual layers. Move this folder into the IMAGES folder. I love this—it's so organized if you set it up correctly in Illustrator! Take a look at the size of these IMAGES in the folder. This is important because bigger layers increase the render time. Smaller-sized layers are easier to animate. Since these are Illustrator files, they can be scaled up and not lose their quality:

  1. Navigate to the Illustrator precomp.
  2. Duplicate this so that you have a backup copy in After Effects.
  3. Double-click on one of these PRECOMPS. You will see your laptop's individual elements set up exactly how we created them in Illustrator.
  4. When you import Illustrator files, be sure to turn on continuously rasterize:
    The Eyedropper tool

    Continuously rasterize

Continuously rasterize is a way to make your layers render in full resolution. Since these are Illustrator files, they will look crisp no matter how much they are scaled up. Now we are going to parent all of our elements to our monitor:

The Eyedropper tool

Parent elements

Copy all of these elements and paste them into the composition with your type composition, then do the following:

  1. Name this composition ONLINE LEARNING
  2. Select the monitor layer you parented everything to
  3. Scale this layer down to fit in the scene

When you move this layer, all your elements will move with it, because you parented them to it:

The Eyedropper tool

Monitor resize

Let's take a look at what we have created so far and be proud of ourselves! We now have our first logo element set up and ready to be animated. Great job!

Animation principles

At this point, I am going to slow things down and talk about animation principles. We are about to animate our logo and I want you to have a greater understanding of how to move your elements in convincing dynamic ways. Walt Disney—one of the great pioneers of animation—created 12 animation principles that we still use today:

  • Timing
  • Ease in and out (or slow in and slow out)
  • Arcs
  • Anticipation
  • Exaggeration
  • Squash and stretch
  • Secondary action
  • Follow through and overlapping action
  • Straight ahead action and pose-to-pose action
  • Staging
  • Appeal
  • Personality

The ones I want to pay special attention to are timing, ease in and out, secondary action, and personality. Timing is everything in animation. I will repeat this many times in this book. A rule I almost always use is the rule of 10 key frames. It takes the eye about 10 key frames to visually register anything. Make sure you have at least 10 frames between each action. You may need more frames if you have a lot of information on the screen, but this is a good starting point. Take special care in deciding how long something should be onscreen. You do not want the viewer to be bored, so do not let your animations lag. This is something you will get the hang of the more you animate.

The next thing to pay attention to is ease in and out. This is one of the most important things in animating a convincing, elegant action. In the real world, objects need time to accelerate and slow down, like the human body does; most objects move in this way. There's always a gradual easing at the start and end of a movement. To accomplish this in After Effects, we use the Easy Ease key frame assistant. Adding this immediately makes your animation look better.

Secondary actions also add some personality and realism to your animation. Secondary actions are when your objects move into their positions and have a secondary movement after they land there. It isn't necessary to always use secondary movements, but it can add weight and believability to your movements. It also makes your animations imperfect, which generates interest and creates personality. We will go over these principles a lot more in this book.

Animating a monitor

Now let's get to animating our computer monitor:

  • Move 10–20 key frames down the timeline after our text appears on the screen
  • Move the anchor point of the monitor to the bottom edge of your monitor

To move your anchor point, choose the pan behind tool (Y) and move the anchor point. Now this object will animate around the anchor point. It's important to set this up before animating your object:

Animating a monitor

Monitor anchor point

At this point, we need to lock our parameters where they are. We do that by creating blank key frames:

  • Set scale and rotate key frames at this point
  • Move back in the timeline (to the left) 10 key frames
  • Scale down the monitor to 0
  • Turn on motion blur for everything

Now we are going to create a fake camera move. This will be used as a transition element for our infographic video. We create camera nulls by parenting everything but the background of the null object:

  • Go to the point in the timeline after the monitor has been animated.
  • Create a null object. Select everything except the background.
  • Parent everything selected to the null object.
  • Easy ease all of these key frames.
  • Turn on motion blur for everything except the background. Remember, motion blur must be turned on in two locations:
    Animating a monitor

    Motion blur to icons

Easy Ease will soften your movements and will make them look more organic. Select the key frames for the monitor and the null. Go to Animation | Keyframe Assistance | Easy Ease:

Animating a monitor

Easy Ease

Now let's animate our fake camera push on our monitor. Here are the steps:

  1. Stay at the point where the monitor has been animated.
  2. Create a key frame for the scale and position of the null object.
  3. Jump down (to the right) 10 key frames.
  4. Adjust the Position parameter and scale so that the monitor fills the screen:
    Animating a monitor

    Monitor full screen

Now we are going to animate all of our element pieces. The following are the steps to do that:

  1. Go to the point in the timeline where the monitor fills the screen and select all your elements to your monitor.
  2. Parent them to your monitor.
  3. For each of these elements, position the anchor points at the end of the line.

This will ensure our elements are animating from the correct spot:

Animating a monitor

Anchor point element

Now that your anchor points and your elements are parented correctly to the monitor, we can start animating them. Here's how we can do that:

  1. Select the first element and make a key frame for scale
  2. Jump down the timeline 10 key frames (to the right) and set key frames for scale
  3. Jump back to the previous scale key frame and scale that element down to 0

Great! Let's preview what we have so far! You should see your animated text on the screen. The next thing you should see is the monitor. Next, you should see your fake camera push in and one of your elements scaling up from the background. (All your elements should be in the background.)

The next step is to create a secondary scale movement. Go to the last key frame position, go 10 key frames to the right, then create a blank key frame.

This is how you create a blank key frame. This is helpful for holding a key frame. Also, you can use these triangles to jump between key frames:

  • Jump backward to the keyframe (to the left).
  • Scale that key frame up to 120:
    Animating a monitor

    Adding a blank key frame

Next, you need to Easy Ease these scale key frames:

Animating a monitor

Easy Ease elements

Excellent! Let's look at what we've accomplished. On previewing your work, you should have your monitor element animating on with secondary movement, with motion blur turned on. If turning motion blur on makes your computer run too slowly, you can turn motion blur off temporarily. You will need to remember to turn it back on before you render your project. Repeat the steps to animate the rest of your elements on for your monitor.

At this point, you have all the powerful tools for animating a text with text presets. You also know how to use a camera null. You are grooving along! The next thing we are going to do is animate more type using the same tools we used for the online learning introduction. Be certain that you have time to see the monitor animate on fully with all its pieces and the camera push in. Timing is everything. If you start your text animation too soon, it won't be a pretty sight. Let it rest for a bit, then start animating on the next message. Take a while to animate the text (today's schools are under pressure to do more with less). Be sure to pause in between the lines of text—this will give the viewer time to read it. We are going to add an adjustment layer in between the text and the monitor elements:

  1. Go to the Layer tab.
  2. Then go to Adjustment Layer.
  3. This will add an adjustment layer to your timeline:
    Animating a monitor

    Adjustment layer

Adjustment layers are similar to null objects. They are like a blank layer that you can add effects to and will affect everything underneath them. I'm dropping some important knowledge here; be sure to pick it up and remember it! Effects on an adjustment layer affect everything underneath it in the stacking order. We don't want it to affect the new animated type, so put the adjustment layer under the new type.

Now that we've added our adjustment layer, we can add an effect to it. Here's how we can do that:

Go to the point in the timeline where your monitor and all the elements are completely animated on

  1. Go to your effects and add a Fast Box Blur
  2. While the box radius is at 0, hit the stopwatch in the effects panel
  3. Move down the timeline 10 key frames
  4. Increase the box radius to 60
  5. Turn on Repeat Edge Pixels

After turning on these settings, your screen should look similar to this:

Animating a monitor

Fast box blur

Great! Let's take a look at what we are working with here. As the fake camera moves in and out on the monitor, all the elements animated on the screen blur as the next message is animating on. I just taught you another transition effect. This is a rack focus transition. You have a lot of tools under your belt so far. Take a breather to be proud of what you have accomplished so far. Next, we are moving on to character animation—my favorite subject.

Creating a new layer in Illustrator

As you can see in this screenshot, there are other elements that make up this image. If you were to import this into After Effects, everything would be on one layer. You would not be able to animate these elements individually, though. Let's take a look at part of the interface of the Illustrator Layers panel. Look at the lower-right corner of the Illustrator window. There's a button called Create New Layer:

Creating a new layer in Illustrator

Illustrator new layer

Click on the Create New Layer button. This is how you create a new layer in Illustrator.

Once you've created a layer in Illustrator, you need to drag the element you want into that layer. If you double-click on that layer, you can rename it:

Creating a new layer in Illustrator

Dragging to a new layer

Now that you know how to create separate layers for your illustrations. Take a few moments to drag each element to its own layer. We are going to animate these elements in After Effects later:

Creating a new layer in Illustrator

Separate layers

You can edit your Illustrator file extensively. This is great for animation purposes.

The Eyedropper tool

One of my go-to editing tools for changing the color of an element is the Eyedropper tool, which can be used as follows:

  1. You use this tool by selecting the element you want to change.
  2. Go to the far-left of the Illustrator panel.
  3. Choose the Eyedropper Tool (I) or the fill icon:
    The Eyedropper tool

    Eyedropper

  4. Once you have selected either one of these, you can change the color of the element:
    The Eyedropper tool

    Changing the color of an element

    Changing the color of text is done just as it is in After Effects. You can use the Eyedropper tool to choose a color onscreen to change your element to.

  5. To save your file, go up to the upper-left corner of the screen and, under the File tab, choose Save As...:
The Eyedropper tool

Save

This is where you can save your file in a variety of different formats. For our purposes, we want our illustrations saved as Illustrator files. Choose the Adobe Illustrator *AI file format.

Now jump back to After Effects. Once you import your Illustrator file into After Effects, you can jump back into Illustrator, modify the existing layers, save them, and they will automatically update in After Effects. However, any new layers created in the Illustrator file will not import into After Effects. If you need to add a new layer to an Illustrator file, I recommend you save a new Illustrator file. Import the new Illustrator file and incorporate that new layer into the After Effects project. Now we are ready to import our Illustrator files into After Effect and start animating them! I love this process because Illustrator files are so beautiful and easy to work with. So, the way we import our Illustrator files correctly is by choosing the following options:

  1. Import As: Composition - Retain Layer Sizes
  2. Import

Click on Create a composition.

Now that you have imported your Illustrator files, you should see a composition automatically appear in the project panel. Move it into your precomp folder:

The Eyedropper tool

Importing an Illustrator file

This will also import a folder with the individual layers. Move this folder into the IMAGES folder. I love this—it's so organized if you set it up correctly in Illustrator! Take a look at the size of these IMAGES in the folder. This is important because bigger layers increase the render time. Smaller-sized layers are easier to animate. Since these are Illustrator files, they can be scaled up and not lose their quality:

  1. Navigate to the Illustrator precomp.
  2. Duplicate this so that you have a backup copy in After Effects.
  3. Double-click on one of these PRECOMPS. You will see your laptop's individual elements set up exactly how we created them in Illustrator.
  4. When you import Illustrator files, be sure to turn on continuously rasterize:
    The Eyedropper tool

    Continuously rasterize

Continuously rasterize is a way to make your layers render in full resolution. Since these are Illustrator files, they will look crisp no matter how much they are scaled up. Now we are going to parent all of our elements to our monitor:

The Eyedropper tool

Parent elements

Copy all of these elements and paste them into the composition with your type composition, then do the following:

  1. Name this composition ONLINE LEARNING
  2. Select the monitor layer you parented everything to
  3. Scale this layer down to fit in the scene

When you move this layer, all your elements will move with it, because you parented them to it:

The Eyedropper tool

Monitor resize

Let's take a look at what we have created so far and be proud of ourselves! We now have our first logo element set up and ready to be animated. Great job!

Animation principles

At this point, I am going to slow things down and talk about animation principles. We are about to animate our logo and I want you to have a greater understanding of how to move your elements in convincing dynamic ways. Walt Disney—one of the great pioneers of animation—created 12 animation principles that we still use today:

  • Timing
  • Ease in and out (or slow in and slow out)
  • Arcs
  • Anticipation
  • Exaggeration
  • Squash and stretch
  • Secondary action
  • Follow through and overlapping action
  • Straight ahead action and pose-to-pose action
  • Staging
  • Appeal
  • Personality

The ones I want to pay special attention to are timing, ease in and out, secondary action, and personality. Timing is everything in animation. I will repeat this many times in this book. A rule I almost always use is the rule of 10 key frames. It takes the eye about 10 key frames to visually register anything. Make sure you have at least 10 frames between each action. You may need more frames if you have a lot of information on the screen, but this is a good starting point. Take special care in deciding how long something should be onscreen. You do not want the viewer to be bored, so do not let your animations lag. This is something you will get the hang of the more you animate.

The next thing to pay attention to is ease in and out. This is one of the most important things in animating a convincing, elegant action. In the real world, objects need time to accelerate and slow down, like the human body does; most objects move in this way. There's always a gradual easing at the start and end of a movement. To accomplish this in After Effects, we use the Easy Ease key frame assistant. Adding this immediately makes your animation look better.

Secondary actions also add some personality and realism to your animation. Secondary actions are when your objects move into their positions and have a secondary movement after they land there. It isn't necessary to always use secondary movements, but it can add weight and believability to your movements. It also makes your animations imperfect, which generates interest and creates personality. We will go over these principles a lot more in this book.

Animating a monitor

Now let's get to animating our computer monitor:

  • Move 10–20 key frames down the timeline after our text appears on the screen
  • Move the anchor point of the monitor to the bottom edge of your monitor

To move your anchor point, choose the pan behind tool (Y) and move the anchor point. Now this object will animate around the anchor point. It's important to set this up before animating your object:

Animating a monitor

Monitor anchor point

At this point, we need to lock our parameters where they are. We do that by creating blank key frames:

  • Set scale and rotate key frames at this point
  • Move back in the timeline (to the left) 10 key frames
  • Scale down the monitor to 0
  • Turn on motion blur for everything

Now we are going to create a fake camera move. This will be used as a transition element for our infographic video. We create camera nulls by parenting everything but the background of the null object:

  • Go to the point in the timeline after the monitor has been animated.
  • Create a null object. Select everything except the background.
  • Parent everything selected to the null object.
  • Easy ease all of these key frames.
  • Turn on motion blur for everything except the background. Remember, motion blur must be turned on in two locations:
    Animating a monitor

    Motion blur to icons

Easy Ease will soften your movements and will make them look more organic. Select the key frames for the monitor and the null. Go to Animation | Keyframe Assistance | Easy Ease:

Animating a monitor

Easy Ease

Now let's animate our fake camera push on our monitor. Here are the steps:

  1. Stay at the point where the monitor has been animated.
  2. Create a key frame for the scale and position of the null object.
  3. Jump down (to the right) 10 key frames.
  4. Adjust the Position parameter and scale so that the monitor fills the screen:
    Animating a monitor

    Monitor full screen

Now we are going to animate all of our element pieces. The following are the steps to do that:

  1. Go to the point in the timeline where the monitor fills the screen and select all your elements to your monitor.
  2. Parent them to your monitor.
  3. For each of these elements, position the anchor points at the end of the line.

This will ensure our elements are animating from the correct spot:

Animating a monitor

Anchor point element

Now that your anchor points and your elements are parented correctly to the monitor, we can start animating them. Here's how we can do that:

  1. Select the first element and make a key frame for scale
  2. Jump down the timeline 10 key frames (to the right) and set key frames for scale
  3. Jump back to the previous scale key frame and scale that element down to 0

Great! Let's preview what we have so far! You should see your animated text on the screen. The next thing you should see is the monitor. Next, you should see your fake camera push in and one of your elements scaling up from the background. (All your elements should be in the background.)

The next step is to create a secondary scale movement. Go to the last key frame position, go 10 key frames to the right, then create a blank key frame.

This is how you create a blank key frame. This is helpful for holding a key frame. Also, you can use these triangles to jump between key frames:

  • Jump backward to the keyframe (to the left).
  • Scale that key frame up to 120:
    Animating a monitor

    Adding a blank key frame

Next, you need to Easy Ease these scale key frames:

Animating a monitor

Easy Ease elements

Excellent! Let's look at what we've accomplished. On previewing your work, you should have your monitor element animating on with secondary movement, with motion blur turned on. If turning motion blur on makes your computer run too slowly, you can turn motion blur off temporarily. You will need to remember to turn it back on before you render your project. Repeat the steps to animate the rest of your elements on for your monitor.

At this point, you have all the powerful tools for animating a text with text presets. You also know how to use a camera null. You are grooving along! The next thing we are going to do is animate more type using the same tools we used for the online learning introduction. Be certain that you have time to see the monitor animate on fully with all its pieces and the camera push in. Timing is everything. If you start your text animation too soon, it won't be a pretty sight. Let it rest for a bit, then start animating on the next message. Take a while to animate the text (today's schools are under pressure to do more with less). Be sure to pause in between the lines of text—this will give the viewer time to read it. We are going to add an adjustment layer in between the text and the monitor elements:

  1. Go to the Layer tab.
  2. Then go to Adjustment Layer.
  3. This will add an adjustment layer to your timeline:
    Animating a monitor

    Adjustment layer

Adjustment layers are similar to null objects. They are like a blank layer that you can add effects to and will affect everything underneath them. I'm dropping some important knowledge here; be sure to pick it up and remember it! Effects on an adjustment layer affect everything underneath it in the stacking order. We don't want it to affect the new animated type, so put the adjustment layer under the new type.

Now that we've added our adjustment layer, we can add an effect to it. Here's how we can do that:

Go to the point in the timeline where your monitor and all the elements are completely animated on

  1. Go to your effects and add a Fast Box Blur
  2. While the box radius is at 0, hit the stopwatch in the effects panel
  3. Move down the timeline 10 key frames
  4. Increase the box radius to 60
  5. Turn on Repeat Edge Pixels

After turning on these settings, your screen should look similar to this:

Animating a monitor

Fast box blur

Great! Let's take a look at what we are working with here. As the fake camera moves in and out on the monitor, all the elements animated on the screen blur as the next message is animating on. I just taught you another transition effect. This is a rack focus transition. You have a lot of tools under your belt so far. Take a breather to be proud of what you have accomplished so far. Next, we are moving on to character animation—my favorite subject.

The Eyedropper tool

One of my go-to editing tools for changing the color of an element is the Eyedropper tool, which can be used as follows:

  1. You use this tool by selecting the element you want to change.
  2. Go to the far-left of the Illustrator panel.
  3. Choose the Eyedropper Tool (I) or the fill icon:
    The Eyedropper tool

    Eyedropper

  4. Once you have selected either one of these, you can change the color of the element:
    The Eyedropper tool

    Changing the color of an element

    Changing the color of text is done just as it is in After Effects. You can use the Eyedropper tool to choose a color onscreen to change your element to.

  5. To save your file, go up to the upper-left corner of the screen and, under the File tab, choose Save As...:
The Eyedropper tool

Save

This is where you can save your file in a variety of different formats. For our purposes, we want our illustrations saved as Illustrator files. Choose the Adobe Illustrator *AI file format.

Now jump back to After Effects. Once you import your Illustrator file into After Effects, you can jump back into Illustrator, modify the existing layers, save them, and they will automatically update in After Effects. However, any new layers created in the Illustrator file will not import into After Effects. If you need to add a new layer to an Illustrator file, I recommend you save a new Illustrator file. Import the new Illustrator file and incorporate that new layer into the After Effects project. Now we are ready to import our Illustrator files into After Effect and start animating them! I love this process because Illustrator files are so beautiful and easy to work with. So, the way we import our Illustrator files correctly is by choosing the following options:

  1. Import As: Composition - Retain Layer Sizes
  2. Import

Click on Create a composition.

Now that you have imported your Illustrator files, you should see a composition automatically appear in the project panel. Move it into your precomp folder:

The Eyedropper tool

Importing an Illustrator file

This will also import a folder with the individual layers. Move this folder into the IMAGES folder. I love this—it's so organized if you set it up correctly in Illustrator! Take a look at the size of these IMAGES in the folder. This is important because bigger layers increase the render time. Smaller-sized layers are easier to animate. Since these are Illustrator files, they can be scaled up and not lose their quality:

  1. Navigate to the Illustrator precomp.
  2. Duplicate this so that you have a backup copy in After Effects.
  3. Double-click on one of these PRECOMPS. You will see your laptop's individual elements set up exactly how we created them in Illustrator.
  4. When you import Illustrator files, be sure to turn on continuously rasterize:
    The Eyedropper tool

    Continuously rasterize

Continuously rasterize is a way to make your layers render in full resolution. Since these are Illustrator files, they will look crisp no matter how much they are scaled up. Now we are going to parent all of our elements to our monitor:

The Eyedropper tool

Parent elements

Copy all of these elements and paste them into the composition with your type composition, then do the following:

  1. Name this composition ONLINE LEARNING
  2. Select the monitor layer you parented everything to
  3. Scale this layer down to fit in the scene

When you move this layer, all your elements will move with it, because you parented them to it:

The Eyedropper tool

Monitor resize

Let's take a look at what we have created so far and be proud of ourselves! We now have our first logo element set up and ready to be animated. Great job!

Animation principles

At this point, I am going to slow things down and talk about animation principles. We are about to animate our logo and I want you to have a greater understanding of how to move your elements in convincing dynamic ways. Walt Disney—one of the great pioneers of animation—created 12 animation principles that we still use today:

  • Timing
  • Ease in and out (or slow in and slow out)
  • Arcs
  • Anticipation
  • Exaggeration
  • Squash and stretch
  • Secondary action
  • Follow through and overlapping action
  • Straight ahead action and pose-to-pose action
  • Staging
  • Appeal
  • Personality

The ones I want to pay special attention to are timing, ease in and out, secondary action, and personality. Timing is everything in animation. I will repeat this many times in this book. A rule I almost always use is the rule of 10 key frames. It takes the eye about 10 key frames to visually register anything. Make sure you have at least 10 frames between each action. You may need more frames if you have a lot of information on the screen, but this is a good starting point. Take special care in deciding how long something should be onscreen. You do not want the viewer to be bored, so do not let your animations lag. This is something you will get the hang of the more you animate.

The next thing to pay attention to is ease in and out. This is one of the most important things in animating a convincing, elegant action. In the real world, objects need time to accelerate and slow down, like the human body does; most objects move in this way. There's always a gradual easing at the start and end of a movement. To accomplish this in After Effects, we use the Easy Ease key frame assistant. Adding this immediately makes your animation look better.

Secondary actions also add some personality and realism to your animation. Secondary actions are when your objects move into their positions and have a secondary movement after they land there. It isn't necessary to always use secondary movements, but it can add weight and believability to your movements. It also makes your animations imperfect, which generates interest and creates personality. We will go over these principles a lot more in this book.

Animating a monitor

Now let's get to animating our computer monitor:

  • Move 10–20 key frames down the timeline after our text appears on the screen
  • Move the anchor point of the monitor to the bottom edge of your monitor

To move your anchor point, choose the pan behind tool (Y) and move the anchor point. Now this object will animate around the anchor point. It's important to set this up before animating your object:

Animating a monitor

Monitor anchor point

At this point, we need to lock our parameters where they are. We do that by creating blank key frames:

  • Set scale and rotate key frames at this point
  • Move back in the timeline (to the left) 10 key frames
  • Scale down the monitor to 0
  • Turn on motion blur for everything

Now we are going to create a fake camera move. This will be used as a transition element for our infographic video. We create camera nulls by parenting everything but the background of the null object:

  • Go to the point in the timeline after the monitor has been animated.
  • Create a null object. Select everything except the background.
  • Parent everything selected to the null object.
  • Easy ease all of these key frames.
  • Turn on motion blur for everything except the background. Remember, motion blur must be turned on in two locations:
    Animating a monitor

    Motion blur to icons

Easy Ease will soften your movements and will make them look more organic. Select the key frames for the monitor and the null. Go to Animation | Keyframe Assistance | Easy Ease:

Animating a monitor

Easy Ease

Now let's animate our fake camera push on our monitor. Here are the steps:

  1. Stay at the point where the monitor has been animated.
  2. Create a key frame for the scale and position of the null object.
  3. Jump down (to the right) 10 key frames.
  4. Adjust the Position parameter and scale so that the monitor fills the screen:
    Animating a monitor

    Monitor full screen

Now we are going to animate all of our element pieces. The following are the steps to do that:

  1. Go to the point in the timeline where the monitor fills the screen and select all your elements to your monitor.
  2. Parent them to your monitor.
  3. For each of these elements, position the anchor points at the end of the line.

This will ensure our elements are animating from the correct spot:

Animating a monitor

Anchor point element

Now that your anchor points and your elements are parented correctly to the monitor, we can start animating them. Here's how we can do that:

  1. Select the first element and make a key frame for scale
  2. Jump down the timeline 10 key frames (to the right) and set key frames for scale
  3. Jump back to the previous scale key frame and scale that element down to 0

Great! Let's preview what we have so far! You should see your animated text on the screen. The next thing you should see is the monitor. Next, you should see your fake camera push in and one of your elements scaling up from the background. (All your elements should be in the background.)

The next step is to create a secondary scale movement. Go to the last key frame position, go 10 key frames to the right, then create a blank key frame.

This is how you create a blank key frame. This is helpful for holding a key frame. Also, you can use these triangles to jump between key frames:

  • Jump backward to the keyframe (to the left).
  • Scale that key frame up to 120:
    Animating a monitor

    Adding a blank key frame

Next, you need to Easy Ease these scale key frames:

Animating a monitor

Easy Ease elements

Excellent! Let's look at what we've accomplished. On previewing your work, you should have your monitor element animating on with secondary movement, with motion blur turned on. If turning motion blur on makes your computer run too slowly, you can turn motion blur off temporarily. You will need to remember to turn it back on before you render your project. Repeat the steps to animate the rest of your elements on for your monitor.

At this point, you have all the powerful tools for animating a text with text presets. You also know how to use a camera null. You are grooving along! The next thing we are going to do is animate more type using the same tools we used for the online learning introduction. Be certain that you have time to see the monitor animate on fully with all its pieces and the camera push in. Timing is everything. If you start your text animation too soon, it won't be a pretty sight. Let it rest for a bit, then start animating on the next message. Take a while to animate the text (today's schools are under pressure to do more with less). Be sure to pause in between the lines of text—this will give the viewer time to read it. We are going to add an adjustment layer in between the text and the monitor elements:

  1. Go to the Layer tab.
  2. Then go to Adjustment Layer.
  3. This will add an adjustment layer to your timeline:
    Animating a monitor

    Adjustment layer

Adjustment layers are similar to null objects. They are like a blank layer that you can add effects to and will affect everything underneath them. I'm dropping some important knowledge here; be sure to pick it up and remember it! Effects on an adjustment layer affect everything underneath it in the stacking order. We don't want it to affect the new animated type, so put the adjustment layer under the new type.

Now that we've added our adjustment layer, we can add an effect to it. Here's how we can do that:

Go to the point in the timeline where your monitor and all the elements are completely animated on

  1. Go to your effects and add a Fast Box Blur
  2. While the box radius is at 0, hit the stopwatch in the effects panel
  3. Move down the timeline 10 key frames
  4. Increase the box radius to 60
  5. Turn on Repeat Edge Pixels

After turning on these settings, your screen should look similar to this:

Animating a monitor

Fast box blur

Great! Let's take a look at what we are working with here. As the fake camera moves in and out on the monitor, all the elements animated on the screen blur as the next message is animating on. I just taught you another transition effect. This is a rack focus transition. You have a lot of tools under your belt so far. Take a breather to be proud of what you have accomplished so far. Next, we are moving on to character animation—my favorite subject.

Animation principles

At this point, I am going to slow things down and talk about animation principles. We are about to animate our logo and I want you to have a greater understanding of how to move your elements in convincing dynamic ways. Walt Disney—one of the great pioneers of animation—created 12 animation principles that we still use today:

  • Timing
  • Ease in and out (or slow in and slow out)
  • Arcs
  • Anticipation
  • Exaggeration
  • Squash and stretch
  • Secondary action
  • Follow through and overlapping action
  • Straight ahead action and pose-to-pose action
  • Staging
  • Appeal
  • Personality

The ones I want to pay special attention to are timing, ease in and out, secondary action, and personality. Timing is everything in animation. I will repeat this many times in this book. A rule I almost always use is the rule of 10 key frames. It takes the eye about 10 key frames to visually register anything. Make sure you have at least 10 frames between each action. You may need more frames if you have a lot of information on the screen, but this is a good starting point. Take special care in deciding how long something should be onscreen. You do not want the viewer to be bored, so do not let your animations lag. This is something you will get the hang of the more you animate.

The next thing to pay attention to is ease in and out. This is one of the most important things in animating a convincing, elegant action. In the real world, objects need time to accelerate and slow down, like the human body does; most objects move in this way. There's always a gradual easing at the start and end of a movement. To accomplish this in After Effects, we use the Easy Ease key frame assistant. Adding this immediately makes your animation look better.

Secondary actions also add some personality and realism to your animation. Secondary actions are when your objects move into their positions and have a secondary movement after they land there. It isn't necessary to always use secondary movements, but it can add weight and believability to your movements. It also makes your animations imperfect, which generates interest and creates personality. We will go over these principles a lot more in this book.

Animating a monitor

Now let's get to animating our computer monitor:

  • Move 10–20 key frames down the timeline after our text appears on the screen
  • Move the anchor point of the monitor to the bottom edge of your monitor

To move your anchor point, choose the pan behind tool (Y) and move the anchor point. Now this object will animate around the anchor point. It's important to set this up before animating your object:

Animating a monitor

Monitor anchor point

At this point, we need to lock our parameters where they are. We do that by creating blank key frames:

  • Set scale and rotate key frames at this point
  • Move back in the timeline (to the left) 10 key frames
  • Scale down the monitor to 0
  • Turn on motion blur for everything

Now we are going to create a fake camera move. This will be used as a transition element for our infographic video. We create camera nulls by parenting everything but the background of the null object:

  • Go to the point in the timeline after the monitor has been animated.
  • Create a null object. Select everything except the background.
  • Parent everything selected to the null object.
  • Easy ease all of these key frames.
  • Turn on motion blur for everything except the background. Remember, motion blur must be turned on in two locations:
    Animating a monitor

    Motion blur to icons

Easy Ease will soften your movements and will make them look more organic. Select the key frames for the monitor and the null. Go to Animation | Keyframe Assistance | Easy Ease:

Animating a monitor

Easy Ease

Now let's animate our fake camera push on our monitor. Here are the steps:

  1. Stay at the point where the monitor has been animated.
  2. Create a key frame for the scale and position of the null object.
  3. Jump down (to the right) 10 key frames.
  4. Adjust the Position parameter and scale so that the monitor fills the screen:
    Animating a monitor

    Monitor full screen

Now we are going to animate all of our element pieces. The following are the steps to do that:

  1. Go to the point in the timeline where the monitor fills the screen and select all your elements to your monitor.
  2. Parent them to your monitor.
  3. For each of these elements, position the anchor points at the end of the line.

This will ensure our elements are animating from the correct spot:

Animating a monitor

Anchor point element

Now that your anchor points and your elements are parented correctly to the monitor, we can start animating them. Here's how we can do that:

  1. Select the first element and make a key frame for scale
  2. Jump down the timeline 10 key frames (to the right) and set key frames for scale
  3. Jump back to the previous scale key frame and scale that element down to 0

Great! Let's preview what we have so far! You should see your animated text on the screen. The next thing you should see is the monitor. Next, you should see your fake camera push in and one of your elements scaling up from the background. (All your elements should be in the background.)

The next step is to create a secondary scale movement. Go to the last key frame position, go 10 key frames to the right, then create a blank key frame.

This is how you create a blank key frame. This is helpful for holding a key frame. Also, you can use these triangles to jump between key frames:

  • Jump backward to the keyframe (to the left).
  • Scale that key frame up to 120:
    Animating a monitor

    Adding a blank key frame

Next, you need to Easy Ease these scale key frames:

Animating a monitor

Easy Ease elements

Excellent! Let's look at what we've accomplished. On previewing your work, you should have your monitor element animating on with secondary movement, with motion blur turned on. If turning motion blur on makes your computer run too slowly, you can turn motion blur off temporarily. You will need to remember to turn it back on before you render your project. Repeat the steps to animate the rest of your elements on for your monitor.

At this point, you have all the powerful tools for animating a text with text presets. You also know how to use a camera null. You are grooving along! The next thing we are going to do is animate more type using the same tools we used for the online learning introduction. Be certain that you have time to see the monitor animate on fully with all its pieces and the camera push in. Timing is everything. If you start your text animation too soon, it won't be a pretty sight. Let it rest for a bit, then start animating on the next message. Take a while to animate the text (today's schools are under pressure to do more with less). Be sure to pause in between the lines of text—this will give the viewer time to read it. We are going to add an adjustment layer in between the text and the monitor elements:

  1. Go to the Layer tab.
  2. Then go to Adjustment Layer.
  3. This will add an adjustment layer to your timeline:
    Animating a monitor

    Adjustment layer

Adjustment layers are similar to null objects. They are like a blank layer that you can add effects to and will affect everything underneath them. I'm dropping some important knowledge here; be sure to pick it up and remember it! Effects on an adjustment layer affect everything underneath it in the stacking order. We don't want it to affect the new animated type, so put the adjustment layer under the new type.

Now that we've added our adjustment layer, we can add an effect to it. Here's how we can do that:

Go to the point in the timeline where your monitor and all the elements are completely animated on

  1. Go to your effects and add a Fast Box Blur
  2. While the box radius is at 0, hit the stopwatch in the effects panel
  3. Move down the timeline 10 key frames
  4. Increase the box radius to 60
  5. Turn on Repeat Edge Pixels

After turning on these settings, your screen should look similar to this:

Animating a monitor

Fast box blur

Great! Let's take a look at what we are working with here. As the fake camera moves in and out on the monitor, all the elements animated on the screen blur as the next message is animating on. I just taught you another transition effect. This is a rack focus transition. You have a lot of tools under your belt so far. Take a breather to be proud of what you have accomplished so far. Next, we are moving on to character animation—my favorite subject.

Animating a monitor

Now let's get to animating our computer monitor:

  • Move 10–20 key frames down the timeline after our text appears on the screen
  • Move the anchor point of the monitor to the bottom edge of your monitor

To move your anchor point, choose the pan behind tool (Y) and move the anchor point. Now this object will animate around the anchor point. It's important to set this up before animating your object:

Animating a monitor

Monitor anchor point

At this point, we need to lock our parameters where they are. We do that by creating blank key frames:

  • Set scale and rotate key frames at this point
  • Move back in the timeline (to the left) 10 key frames
  • Scale down the monitor to 0
  • Turn on motion blur for everything

Now we are going to create a fake camera move. This will be used as a transition element for our infographic video. We create camera nulls by parenting everything but the background of the null object:

  • Go to the point in the timeline after the monitor has been animated.
  • Create a null object. Select everything except the background.
  • Parent everything selected to the null object.
  • Easy ease all of these key frames.
  • Turn on motion blur for everything except the background. Remember, motion blur must be turned on in two locations:
    Animating a monitor

    Motion blur to icons

Easy Ease will soften your movements and will make them look more organic. Select the key frames for the monitor and the null. Go to Animation | Keyframe Assistance | Easy Ease:

Animating a monitor

Easy Ease

Now let's animate our fake camera push on our monitor. Here are the steps:

  1. Stay at the point where the monitor has been animated.
  2. Create a key frame for the scale and position of the null object.
  3. Jump down (to the right) 10 key frames.
  4. Adjust the Position parameter and scale so that the monitor fills the screen:
    Animating a monitor

    Monitor full screen

Now we are going to animate all of our element pieces. The following are the steps to do that:

  1. Go to the point in the timeline where the monitor fills the screen and select all your elements to your monitor.
  2. Parent them to your monitor.
  3. For each of these elements, position the anchor points at the end of the line.

This will ensure our elements are animating from the correct spot:

Animating a monitor

Anchor point element

Now that your anchor points and your elements are parented correctly to the monitor, we can start animating them. Here's how we can do that:

  1. Select the first element and make a key frame for scale
  2. Jump down the timeline 10 key frames (to the right) and set key frames for scale
  3. Jump back to the previous scale key frame and scale that element down to 0

Great! Let's preview what we have so far! You should see your animated text on the screen. The next thing you should see is the monitor. Next, you should see your fake camera push in and one of your elements scaling up from the background. (All your elements should be in the background.)

The next step is to create a secondary scale movement. Go to the last key frame position, go 10 key frames to the right, then create a blank key frame.

This is how you create a blank key frame. This is helpful for holding a key frame. Also, you can use these triangles to jump between key frames:

  • Jump backward to the keyframe (to the left).
  • Scale that key frame up to 120:
    Animating a monitor

    Adding a blank key frame

Next, you need to Easy Ease these scale key frames:

Animating a monitor

Easy Ease elements

Excellent! Let's look at what we've accomplished. On previewing your work, you should have your monitor element animating on with secondary movement, with motion blur turned on. If turning motion blur on makes your computer run too slowly, you can turn motion blur off temporarily. You will need to remember to turn it back on before you render your project. Repeat the steps to animate the rest of your elements on for your monitor.

At this point, you have all the powerful tools for animating a text with text presets. You also know how to use a camera null. You are grooving along! The next thing we are going to do is animate more type using the same tools we used for the online learning introduction. Be certain that you have time to see the monitor animate on fully with all its pieces and the camera push in. Timing is everything. If you start your text animation too soon, it won't be a pretty sight. Let it rest for a bit, then start animating on the next message. Take a while to animate the text (today's schools are under pressure to do more with less). Be sure to pause in between the lines of text—this will give the viewer time to read it. We are going to add an adjustment layer in between the text and the monitor elements:

  1. Go to the Layer tab.
  2. Then go to Adjustment Layer.
  3. This will add an adjustment layer to your timeline:
    Animating a monitor

    Adjustment layer

Adjustment layers are similar to null objects. They are like a blank layer that you can add effects to and will affect everything underneath them. I'm dropping some important knowledge here; be sure to pick it up and remember it! Effects on an adjustment layer affect everything underneath it in the stacking order. We don't want it to affect the new animated type, so put the adjustment layer under the new type.

Now that we've added our adjustment layer, we can add an effect to it. Here's how we can do that:

Go to the point in the timeline where your monitor and all the elements are completely animated on

  1. Go to your effects and add a Fast Box Blur
  2. While the box radius is at 0, hit the stopwatch in the effects panel
  3. Move down the timeline 10 key frames
  4. Increase the box radius to 60
  5. Turn on Repeat Edge Pixels

After turning on these settings, your screen should look similar to this:

Animating a monitor

Fast box blur

Great! Let's take a look at what we are working with here. As the fake camera moves in and out on the monitor, all the elements animated on the screen blur as the next message is animating on. I just taught you another transition effect. This is a rack focus transition. You have a lot of tools under your belt so far. Take a breather to be proud of what you have accomplished so far. Next, we are moving on to character animation—my favorite subject.

Character animation types

Character animation is a deep rabbit hole where you can spend years and years learning. Thankfully, you can learn a few simple tricks to get you up and running fast! These tricks will change your life, because character animation will empower you to use characters to express yourself!

Puppet Warp animation

Puppet Warp is one of the most basic character animation tools. You can start using this right now and get immediate results:

  1. Import the male puppet
  2. Be sure to import the Illustrator file with Retain layer sizes and Create a comp checked
  3. Duplicate this composition and put both in the PRECOMPS folder
  4. Move the folders with the Illustrator images into the IMAGES folder
  5. Open one of the male puppet precompositions
  6. Turn on Continuous rasterize
  7. Select everything except the torso and parent all the pieces to the torso
  8. Copy all the pieces and paste them into the online learning composition
  9. Add three pins to the arm, as shown in the following screenshot

Puppet Warp is located up in the tool panel, on the far-right end:

Puppet Warp animation

Puppet Warp

In order to animate this, twirl down the Effects tab of the arm you added the pins to. Now you can see that key frames have already been added to the layer. Go 30 frames to the right and move the arm to the position, as shown here:

Puppet Warp animation

Puppet Warp key frames

As you can see, as you move the pin it creates key frames in the timeline. Preview this to see what we are working with here. Voila! You've got some warpy character animation. If it looks strange, don't worry—you can always tweak it more to your liking. Subtlety is the key to this effect. This effect works best with subtle minor movements.

Jointed animation

This next animation style is called jointed animation. It's very versatile and can work well for more realistic movements. You have greater control with jointed animation. With this technique, you need to rig your character just right. Let's duplicate our male puppet composition again and set it up as we did before by turning on continuous rasterized for all layers.

Now that you have created a Puppet Warp animation, we can create a jointed animation. Here's how we can do that:

  1. Parent your arms, legs, and head to the torso.
  2. Move the arm anchor points to the joints nearest to the torso.
  3. Do this for the legs and the head:
    Jointed animation

    Puppet anchor points

Did you notice how all the anchor points touch the torso? These limbs are rotating around that point.

Follow these instructions to animate your jointed character:

  1. Choose an arm and select the Rotation parameter
  2. Hit a rotation key frame and move down the timeline to the right by 10 key frames
  3. Rotate your character arm so it's pointing out to the left
  4. Ease those key frames

This is very basic, but imagine all the possibilities! If you had a character with biceps, triceps, thighs, calves, hands, and feet layers, you could parent them correctly and have a fully rigged character that animates! The possibilities are endless.

Adobe Character Animator

Character Animator is by far the most amazing character animation program in After Effects. Install Photoshop and Adobe Character Animator on your machine this very second. With this software, you can create characters that lip synch to your voice. You must have a webcam to create and stream live motion-captured animation online.

First things first, you need to install Adobe Character Animator. When you open Character Animator, you're presented with the Start menu. This has free puppets you can start using without editing them. You also have access to interactive tutorials. If you click the right arrow, you can see more free characters to use:

Adobe Character Animator

Start menu

Let's click on the Chloe character. Choose the Illustator version. You could also use the Photoshop version, but for this lesson we will use the illustrator file. This opens the Chloe character in Illustrator. You can choose to edit the character here, but do not rename anything. Just for fun, let's change the color of her shirt to yellow. Look on the far-left of your Illustrator tool panel and choose the direct selection tool.

Altering Illustrator files

Now that you know how to open your characters, we can start altering our illustrator files. Here's how we do that:

Altering Illustrator files

Direct selection tool

Hover the direct selection tool over the different parts of the t-shirt. Click on each piece while holding the Shift key:

Altering Illustrator files

Select the shirt

Now that the t-shirt is selected, navigate to the left of the tool panel and choose Fill (X) to change the color to yellow:

Altering Illustrator files

Change color

I am also going to select the t-shirt logo and turn it off. You need to save your Illustrator file, then jump back into Character Animator.

Now you should see the Record interface. This is where you animate your character. Let's save this project:

Altering Illustrator files

Record interface

Go up to the File tab and Save Project As.... Give your project a unique name:

Altering Illustrator files

Save as

Character Animator has an autosave feature built into it. I find it useful to save different versions of my projects as I progress. That way, if a project gets corrupted, you will have a backup.

Character Animator interface

The interface is similar to After Effects, except it doesn't have as many tools and panels. To the far left, you will see a Project panel window. This is where you can create new scenes and new folders, and organize your project. This is where you import items into the program:

Character Animator interface

Image folders and new scenes

To the left, at the top of the interface, there are four tabs: Start/Rig/Record/Stream. We already looked at the Start tab. Let's look at the Rig tab. This is where the puppet is rigged. This allows us to take a behind-the-scenes look at our character. As you get more advanced, you will need to edit the rig of your character here:

Character Animator interface

Rig

The Record tab is the animation panel; this is where all the animation and performance takes place.

The Stream tab is used for streaming your performance live around the world:

Character Animator interface

Stream

Next, let's look at the scene Properties.

Make sure your scene is selected, then look to the far-right—you will see a variety of project settings you can adjust, such as Frame Rate:

Character Animator interface

Scene settings

The Scene window is where your character is. This is where all the action takes place. Take a look at the play buttons under the character. This allows you to go backward or forward in the timeline. The red button is how you record your animations. To the right of the Record button is the speed. You can control how quickly or slowly your recording happens:

Character Animator interface

Record button and speed

Next, let's look at the camera and mic panel.

This is where you handle your webcam setup and your voice recording. Let's turn on our webcam. Click this camera input tab at the top-left corner of the interface. If you have a working webcam, you should see the box in the panel show your image in it. This will enable facial tracking. The red dots are track points on your face:

Character Animator interface

Image webcam

Let's make sure our face is properly synced. Make sure you have a strong light source. Also, wearing glasses can interfere with syncing your face to the web camera. Next, select the webcam button. Click the (Set Rest Pose). This will sync your face to the character's face. It's similar to what happened in Avatar when Sully gets synced to his avatar. Now you are synced to your character:

Character Animator interface

Set Rest Pose

Now you can spend some time playing with your character—when you speak, it speaks. It only syncs to your head; as its head will move with yours, its eyes will also follow yours. It will also speak when you speak. I'll show you how to move its limbs later.

Animation timeline

Let's look at the animation timeline. This is where you can see your layers and is similar to After Effects. You can edit your performances here:

Animation timeline

Timeline

Next, we will look at the character properties. Select your Chloe character layer in the timeline. To the far right, you have properties for her eyes, face, lips, and so on:

Animation timeline

Puppet properties

Recording your performance

These are all the properties you can adjust for your character.

Now that we know where everything is located, let's begin our animation and our performance:

  1. Click on the red record button. You will hear a few beeps before the recording button is active:
    Recording your performance

    Record button

  2. Select Chloe's hand and drag it.
  3. Let go of her hand.
  4. Press the record button again to stop recording.

Adjusting character properties

It may take your computer a couple of seconds to render the recording. When it's done, you will have a recording layer. This is called a take in Character Animator. You can adjust your Dragger setting like this:

  1. Select the character in the timeline and to the right in the Properties.
  2. Twirl down the Dragger properties:
    Adjusting character properties

    Dragger properties

Across from the After Move property, you can choose to hold your limbs in place or return to rest. Let's choose Return to rest. This will enable our limbs to return to their original resting pose after moving them:

Adjusting character properties

Return to rest

You can also adjust Eye Gaze to control the strength or the extent to which the eyes will move:

Adjusting character properties

Eye Gaze

Let's look at our Face controls. These are located on the far-right of your screen. We won't go over all these parameters here, but you can change your Eyebrow Strength to 40. This will give you control of eyebrow movements. If you need to adjust anything on the face, this is where you find it:

Adjusting character properties

Face controls

We are almost ready to start the animation. Look in the far-right corner of the screen—there is a small camera-control icon. Click on this icon to begin to activate your camera. Hit the record button to activate live recording:

Adjusting character properties

Camera control

If you move your head around, you should see your puppet moving. Let's adjust the gravity for her hair:

Adjusting character properties

Gravity Strength

You will need to zoom into the timeline to look at the bottom corner of the panel, just under the timeline. You will see an icon similar to that in After Effects. Click on this to zoom into the timeline:

Adjusting character properties

Zoom into the timeline

Blending takes

After you're done with your performance, press the record button again. You will see the recordings on your timeline. You can edit these by sliding them, or you may want to blend or ease your performances. This is similar to easing a movement in After Effects. These layers are called takes and are similar to an acting performance in a movie. An actor has a series of takes in a movie scene:

  1. Select the end of your take layer.
  2. You will see a double-arrow icon.
  3. Drag this icon to the left. You will see a sloped curve icon. This means you can blend or smooth the end of your take layer:
    Blending takes

    Blend take

Starting recording

Next, let's make Chloe talk! Look at the icon next to the camera. This is the audio recording button:

  1. Click on the audio button.
  2. Click the record button.
  3. Begin speaking.
  4. Click the record button again to stop recording:
    Starting recording

    Turn on the audio button

This will add additional Audio layers in the timeline. Take a look at the new layers or takes in the timeline here:

Starting recording

Camera and audio input layers

Now that we've created a cool animation, let's play it to preview our work. Press the play button:

Starting recording

Play button

Project settings

Now that you know how to animate your character and record audio, let's adjust our project settings. The following steps will show you how to do that:

  1. Select the Scene.
  2. Look at the far-right and you will see the Scene info.
  3. Adjust the scene Duration so that it's only the length of your project:
    Project settings

    Adjust scene duration

Next, we are going to adjust our Frame Rate so that it matches our frame rate in After Effects. Change this to 29.97 fps:

Project settings

Adjust scene duration frame rate

Exporting your animation

Now let's export our project. Your project will export with a transparent background unless you put an image in the background.

The following are the steps to export your project:

  1. Click on File.
  2. Click on Export.
  3. Select PNG Sequence and WAV...:
    Exporting your animation

    Export PNG sequence

Importing PNG sequences

We are ready to import our PNG sequences. Here are the steps to do that:

  1. Jump back over to After Effects. Import the .png file.
  2. Select the first .png file with 00 at the end.
  3. After Effects will import all the remaining files in a .png sequence.
  4. Ensure that you check the sequence:
    Importing PNG sequences

    Import PNG

You can also import any audio recorded in your character animation. When you render out your PNG sequence, it will save a WAV file with it. If you need to import your audio file, here are the steps:

  1. Go to the folder with the PNG sequence.
  2. Navigate to the bottom of the PNG sequence.
  3. Import the WAV file to After Effects:
    Importing PNG sequences

    Import WAV

Adding the character to an infographic project

Now we are going to bring Chloe into the main composition and we are going to create a camera move to the right. We will animate our null object to do this. We need to be on the correct part of the timeline and we need the correct things parented to the null.

To be sure we are at the correct point on the timeline, follow these steps:

  1. Move to the point on the timeline after the last bit of text that has been animated on.
  2. Move the Chloe layer on to the timeline so that the layer starts at that point.
  3. Turn on motion blur for Chloe. See the placement of everything here:
    Adding the character to an infographic project

    Camera pan start point

We need to parent the Chloe layer to the null layer at this point. Also parent the text to the null layer:

Adding the character to an infographic project

Parent character to null

To create a hold key frame for the position parameter of our null object, follow these steps:

  1. Navigate to the far-right of the timeline.
  2. Locate the diamond icon in the position of the null object.
  3. Click on the diamond:
    Adding the character to an infographic project

    Blank key frame

Let's animate our move to the right. Select the position parameter and scrub it so that the camera is moving to the right:

Adding the character to an infographic project

Pan to Chloe

Completing your infographic

You now have all the tools to create a dynamic infographic video. Spend some time adding more text to help communicate your concept.

Puppet Warp animation

Puppet Warp is one of the most basic character animation tools. You can start using this right now and get immediate results:

  1. Import the male puppet
  2. Be sure to import the Illustrator file with Retain layer sizes and Create a comp checked
  3. Duplicate this composition and put both in the PRECOMPS folder
  4. Move the folders with the Illustrator images into the IMAGES folder
  5. Open one of the male puppet precompositions
  6. Turn on Continuous rasterize
  7. Select everything except the torso and parent all the pieces to the torso
  8. Copy all the pieces and paste them into the online learning composition
  9. Add three pins to the arm, as shown in the following screenshot

Puppet Warp is located up in the tool panel, on the far-right end:

Puppet Warp animation

Puppet Warp

In order to animate this, twirl down the Effects tab of the arm you added the pins to. Now you can see that key frames have already been added to the layer. Go 30 frames to the right and move the arm to the position, as shown here:

Puppet Warp animation

Puppet Warp key frames

As you can see, as you move the pin it creates key frames in the timeline. Preview this to see what we are working with here. Voila! You've got some warpy character animation. If it looks strange, don't worry—you can always tweak it more to your liking. Subtlety is the key to this effect. This effect works best with subtle minor movements.

Jointed animation

This next animation style is called jointed animation. It's very versatile and can work well for more realistic movements. You have greater control with jointed animation. With this technique, you need to rig your character just right. Let's duplicate our male puppet composition again and set it up as we did before by turning on continuous rasterized for all layers.

Now that you have created a Puppet Warp animation, we can create a jointed animation. Here's how we can do that:

  1. Parent your arms, legs, and head to the torso.
  2. Move the arm anchor points to the joints nearest to the torso.
  3. Do this for the legs and the head:
    Jointed animation

    Puppet anchor points

Did you notice how all the anchor points touch the torso? These limbs are rotating around that point.

Follow these instructions to animate your jointed character:

  1. Choose an arm and select the Rotation parameter
  2. Hit a rotation key frame and move down the timeline to the right by 10 key frames
  3. Rotate your character arm so it's pointing out to the left
  4. Ease those key frames

This is very basic, but imagine all the possibilities! If you had a character with biceps, triceps, thighs, calves, hands, and feet layers, you could parent them correctly and have a fully rigged character that animates! The possibilities are endless.

Adobe Character Animator

Character Animator is by far the most amazing character animation program in After Effects. Install Photoshop and Adobe Character Animator on your machine this very second. With this software, you can create characters that lip synch to your voice. You must have a webcam to create and stream live motion-captured animation online.

First things first, you need to install Adobe Character Animator. When you open Character Animator, you're presented with the Start menu. This has free puppets you can start using without editing them. You also have access to interactive tutorials. If you click the right arrow, you can see more free characters to use:

Adobe Character Animator

Start menu

Let's click on the Chloe character. Choose the Illustator version. You could also use the Photoshop version, but for this lesson we will use the illustrator file. This opens the Chloe character in Illustrator. You can choose to edit the character here, but do not rename anything. Just for fun, let's change the color of her shirt to yellow. Look on the far-left of your Illustrator tool panel and choose the direct selection tool.

Altering Illustrator files

Now that you know how to open your characters, we can start altering our illustrator files. Here's how we do that:

Altering Illustrator files

Direct selection tool

Hover the direct selection tool over the different parts of the t-shirt. Click on each piece while holding the Shift key:

Altering Illustrator files

Select the shirt

Now that the t-shirt is selected, navigate to the left of the tool panel and choose Fill (X) to change the color to yellow:

Altering Illustrator files

Change color

I am also going to select the t-shirt logo and turn it off. You need to save your Illustrator file, then jump back into Character Animator.

Now you should see the Record interface. This is where you animate your character. Let's save this project:

Altering Illustrator files

Record interface

Go up to the File tab and Save Project As.... Give your project a unique name:

Altering Illustrator files

Save as

Character Animator has an autosave feature built into it. I find it useful to save different versions of my projects as I progress. That way, if a project gets corrupted, you will have a backup.

Character Animator interface

The interface is similar to After Effects, except it doesn't have as many tools and panels. To the far left, you will see a Project panel window. This is where you can create new scenes and new folders, and organize your project. This is where you import items into the program:

Character Animator interface

Image folders and new scenes

To the left, at the top of the interface, there are four tabs: Start/Rig/Record/Stream. We already looked at the Start tab. Let's look at the Rig tab. This is where the puppet is rigged. This allows us to take a behind-the-scenes look at our character. As you get more advanced, you will need to edit the rig of your character here:

Character Animator interface

Rig

The Record tab is the animation panel; this is where all the animation and performance takes place.

The Stream tab is used for streaming your performance live around the world:

Character Animator interface

Stream

Next, let's look at the scene Properties.

Make sure your scene is selected, then look to the far-right—you will see a variety of project settings you can adjust, such as Frame Rate:

Character Animator interface

Scene settings

The Scene window is where your character is. This is where all the action takes place. Take a look at the play buttons under the character. This allows you to go backward or forward in the timeline. The red button is how you record your animations. To the right of the Record button is the speed. You can control how quickly or slowly your recording happens:

Character Animator interface

Record button and speed

Next, let's look at the camera and mic panel.

This is where you handle your webcam setup and your voice recording. Let's turn on our webcam. Click this camera input tab at the top-left corner of the interface. If you have a working webcam, you should see the box in the panel show your image in it. This will enable facial tracking. The red dots are track points on your face:

Character Animator interface

Image webcam

Let's make sure our face is properly synced. Make sure you have a strong light source. Also, wearing glasses can interfere with syncing your face to the web camera. Next, select the webcam button. Click the (Set Rest Pose). This will sync your face to the character's face. It's similar to what happened in Avatar when Sully gets synced to his avatar. Now you are synced to your character:

Character Animator interface

Set Rest Pose

Now you can spend some time playing with your character—when you speak, it speaks. It only syncs to your head; as its head will move with yours, its eyes will also follow yours. It will also speak when you speak. I'll show you how to move its limbs later.

Animation timeline

Let's look at the animation timeline. This is where you can see your layers and is similar to After Effects. You can edit your performances here:

Animation timeline

Timeline

Next, we will look at the character properties. Select your Chloe character layer in the timeline. To the far right, you have properties for her eyes, face, lips, and so on:

Animation timeline

Puppet properties

Recording your performance

These are all the properties you can adjust for your character.

Now that we know where everything is located, let's begin our animation and our performance:

  1. Click on the red record button. You will hear a few beeps before the recording button is active:
    Recording your performance

    Record button

  2. Select Chloe's hand and drag it.
  3. Let go of her hand.
  4. Press the record button again to stop recording.

Adjusting character properties

It may take your computer a couple of seconds to render the recording. When it's done, you will have a recording layer. This is called a take in Character Animator. You can adjust your Dragger setting like this:

  1. Select the character in the timeline and to the right in the Properties.
  2. Twirl down the Dragger properties:
    Adjusting character properties

    Dragger properties

Across from the After Move property, you can choose to hold your limbs in place or return to rest. Let's choose Return to rest. This will enable our limbs to return to their original resting pose after moving them:

Adjusting character properties

Return to rest

You can also adjust Eye Gaze to control the strength or the extent to which the eyes will move:

Adjusting character properties

Eye Gaze

Let's look at our Face controls. These are located on the far-right of your screen. We won't go over all these parameters here, but you can change your Eyebrow Strength to 40. This will give you control of eyebrow movements. If you need to adjust anything on the face, this is where you find it:

Adjusting character properties

Face controls

We are almost ready to start the animation. Look in the far-right corner of the screen—there is a small camera-control icon. Click on this icon to begin to activate your camera. Hit the record button to activate live recording:

Adjusting character properties

Camera control

If you move your head around, you should see your puppet moving. Let's adjust the gravity for her hair:

Adjusting character properties

Gravity Strength

You will need to zoom into the timeline to look at the bottom corner of the panel, just under the timeline. You will see an icon similar to that in After Effects. Click on this to zoom into the timeline:

Adjusting character properties

Zoom into the timeline

Blending takes

After you're done with your performance, press the record button again. You will see the recordings on your timeline. You can edit these by sliding them, or you may want to blend or ease your performances. This is similar to easing a movement in After Effects. These layers are called takes and are similar to an acting performance in a movie. An actor has a series of takes in a movie scene:

  1. Select the end of your take layer.
  2. You will see a double-arrow icon.
  3. Drag this icon to the left. You will see a sloped curve icon. This means you can blend or smooth the end of your take layer:
    Blending takes

    Blend take

Starting recording

Next, let's make Chloe talk! Look at the icon next to the camera. This is the audio recording button:

  1. Click on the audio button.
  2. Click the record button.
  3. Begin speaking.
  4. Click the record button again to stop recording:
    Starting recording

    Turn on the audio button

This will add additional Audio layers in the timeline. Take a look at the new layers or takes in the timeline here:

Starting recording

Camera and audio input layers

Now that we've created a cool animation, let's play it to preview our work. Press the play button:

Starting recording

Play button

Project settings

Now that you know how to animate your character and record audio, let's adjust our project settings. The following steps will show you how to do that:

  1. Select the Scene.
  2. Look at the far-right and you will see the Scene info.
  3. Adjust the scene Duration so that it's only the length of your project:
    Project settings

    Adjust scene duration

Next, we are going to adjust our Frame Rate so that it matches our frame rate in After Effects. Change this to 29.97 fps:

Project settings

Adjust scene duration frame rate

Exporting your animation

Now let's export our project. Your project will export with a transparent background unless you put an image in the background.

The following are the steps to export your project:

  1. Click on File.
  2. Click on Export.
  3. Select PNG Sequence and WAV...:
    Exporting your animation

    Export PNG sequence

Importing PNG sequences

We are ready to import our PNG sequences. Here are the steps to do that:

  1. Jump back over to After Effects. Import the .png file.
  2. Select the first .png file with 00 at the end.
  3. After Effects will import all the remaining files in a .png sequence.
  4. Ensure that you check the sequence:
    Importing PNG sequences

    Import PNG

You can also import any audio recorded in your character animation. When you render out your PNG sequence, it will save a WAV file with it. If you need to import your audio file, here are the steps:

  1. Go to the folder with the PNG sequence.
  2. Navigate to the bottom of the PNG sequence.
  3. Import the WAV file to After Effects:
    Importing PNG sequences

    Import WAV

Adding the character to an infographic project

Now we are going to bring Chloe into the main composition and we are going to create a camera move to the right. We will animate our null object to do this. We need to be on the correct part of the timeline and we need the correct things parented to the null.

To be sure we are at the correct point on the timeline, follow these steps:

  1. Move to the point on the timeline after the last bit of text that has been animated on.
  2. Move the Chloe layer on to the timeline so that the layer starts at that point.
  3. Turn on motion blur for Chloe. See the placement of everything here:
    Adding the character to an infographic project

    Camera pan start point

We need to parent the Chloe layer to the null layer at this point. Also parent the text to the null layer:

Adding the character to an infographic project

Parent character to null

To create a hold key frame for the position parameter of our null object, follow these steps:

  1. Navigate to the far-right of the timeline.
  2. Locate the diamond icon in the position of the null object.
  3. Click on the diamond:
    Adding the character to an infographic project

    Blank key frame

Let's animate our move to the right. Select the position parameter and scrub it so that the camera is moving to the right:

Adding the character to an infographic project

Pan to Chloe

Completing your infographic

You now have all the tools to create a dynamic infographic video. Spend some time adding more text to help communicate your concept.

Jointed animation

This next animation style is called jointed animation. It's very versatile and can work well for more realistic movements. You have greater control with jointed animation. With this technique, you need to rig your character just right. Let's duplicate our male puppet composition again and set it up as we did before by turning on continuous rasterized for all layers.

Now that you have created a Puppet Warp animation, we can create a jointed animation. Here's how we can do that:

  1. Parent your arms, legs, and head to the torso.
  2. Move the arm anchor points to the joints nearest to the torso.
  3. Do this for the legs and the head:
    Jointed animation

    Puppet anchor points

Did you notice how all the anchor points touch the torso? These limbs are rotating around that point.

Follow these instructions to animate your jointed character:

  1. Choose an arm and select the Rotation parameter
  2. Hit a rotation key frame and move down the timeline to the right by 10 key frames
  3. Rotate your character arm so it's pointing out to the left
  4. Ease those key frames

This is very basic, but imagine all the possibilities! If you had a character with biceps, triceps, thighs, calves, hands, and feet layers, you could parent them correctly and have a fully rigged character that animates! The possibilities are endless.

Adobe Character Animator

Character Animator is by far the most amazing character animation program in After Effects. Install Photoshop and Adobe Character Animator on your machine this very second. With this software, you can create characters that lip synch to your voice. You must have a webcam to create and stream live motion-captured animation online.

First things first, you need to install Adobe Character Animator. When you open Character Animator, you're presented with the Start menu. This has free puppets you can start using without editing them. You also have access to interactive tutorials. If you click the right arrow, you can see more free characters to use:

Adobe Character Animator

Start menu

Let's click on the Chloe character. Choose the Illustator version. You could also use the Photoshop version, but for this lesson we will use the illustrator file. This opens the Chloe character in Illustrator. You can choose to edit the character here, but do not rename anything. Just for fun, let's change the color of her shirt to yellow. Look on the far-left of your Illustrator tool panel and choose the direct selection tool.

Altering Illustrator files

Now that you know how to open your characters, we can start altering our illustrator files. Here's how we do that:

Altering Illustrator files

Direct selection tool

Hover the direct selection tool over the different parts of the t-shirt. Click on each piece while holding the Shift key:

Altering Illustrator files

Select the shirt

Now that the t-shirt is selected, navigate to the left of the tool panel and choose Fill (X) to change the color to yellow:

Altering Illustrator files

Change color

I am also going to select the t-shirt logo and turn it off. You need to save your Illustrator file, then jump back into Character Animator.

Now you should see the Record interface. This is where you animate your character. Let's save this project:

Altering Illustrator files

Record interface

Go up to the File tab and Save Project As.... Give your project a unique name:

Altering Illustrator files

Save as

Character Animator has an autosave feature built into it. I find it useful to save different versions of my projects as I progress. That way, if a project gets corrupted, you will have a backup.

Character Animator interface

The interface is similar to After Effects, except it doesn't have as many tools and panels. To the far left, you will see a Project panel window. This is where you can create new scenes and new folders, and organize your project. This is where you import items into the program:

Character Animator interface

Image folders and new scenes

To the left, at the top of the interface, there are four tabs: Start/Rig/Record/Stream. We already looked at the Start tab. Let's look at the Rig tab. This is where the puppet is rigged. This allows us to take a behind-the-scenes look at our character. As you get more advanced, you will need to edit the rig of your character here:

Character Animator interface

Rig

The Record tab is the animation panel; this is where all the animation and performance takes place.

The Stream tab is used for streaming your performance live around the world:

Character Animator interface

Stream

Next, let's look at the scene Properties.

Make sure your scene is selected, then look to the far-right—you will see a variety of project settings you can adjust, such as Frame Rate:

Character Animator interface

Scene settings

The Scene window is where your character is. This is where all the action takes place. Take a look at the play buttons under the character. This allows you to go backward or forward in the timeline. The red button is how you record your animations. To the right of the Record button is the speed. You can control how quickly or slowly your recording happens:

Character Animator interface

Record button and speed

Next, let's look at the camera and mic panel.

This is where you handle your webcam setup and your voice recording. Let's turn on our webcam. Click this camera input tab at the top-left corner of the interface. If you have a working webcam, you should see the box in the panel show your image in it. This will enable facial tracking. The red dots are track points on your face:

Character Animator interface

Image webcam

Let's make sure our face is properly synced. Make sure you have a strong light source. Also, wearing glasses can interfere with syncing your face to the web camera. Next, select the webcam button. Click the (Set Rest Pose). This will sync your face to the character's face. It's similar to what happened in Avatar when Sully gets synced to his avatar. Now you are synced to your character:

Character Animator interface

Set Rest Pose

Now you can spend some time playing with your character—when you speak, it speaks. It only syncs to your head; as its head will move with yours, its eyes will also follow yours. It will also speak when you speak. I'll show you how to move its limbs later.

Animation timeline

Let's look at the animation timeline. This is where you can see your layers and is similar to After Effects. You can edit your performances here:

Animation timeline

Timeline

Next, we will look at the character properties. Select your Chloe character layer in the timeline. To the far right, you have properties for her eyes, face, lips, and so on:

Animation timeline

Puppet properties

Recording your performance

These are all the properties you can adjust for your character.

Now that we know where everything is located, let's begin our animation and our performance:

  1. Click on the red record button. You will hear a few beeps before the recording button is active:
    Recording your performance

    Record button

  2. Select Chloe's hand and drag it.
  3. Let go of her hand.
  4. Press the record button again to stop recording.

Adjusting character properties

It may take your computer a couple of seconds to render the recording. When it's done, you will have a recording layer. This is called a take in Character Animator. You can adjust your Dragger setting like this:

  1. Select the character in the timeline and to the right in the Properties.
  2. Twirl down the Dragger properties:
    Adjusting character properties

    Dragger properties

Across from the After Move property, you can choose to hold your limbs in place or return to rest. Let's choose Return to rest. This will enable our limbs to return to their original resting pose after moving them:

Adjusting character properties

Return to rest

You can also adjust Eye Gaze to control the strength or the extent to which the eyes will move:

Adjusting character properties

Eye Gaze

Let's look at our Face controls. These are located on the far-right of your screen. We won't go over all these parameters here, but you can change your Eyebrow Strength to 40. This will give you control of eyebrow movements. If you need to adjust anything on the face, this is where you find it:

Adjusting character properties

Face controls

We are almost ready to start the animation. Look in the far-right corner of the screen—there is a small camera-control icon. Click on this icon to begin to activate your camera. Hit the record button to activate live recording:

Adjusting character properties

Camera control

If you move your head around, you should see your puppet moving. Let's adjust the gravity for her hair:

Adjusting character properties

Gravity Strength

You will need to zoom into the timeline to look at the bottom corner of the panel, just under the timeline. You will see an icon similar to that in After Effects. Click on this to zoom into the timeline:

Adjusting character properties

Zoom into the timeline

Blending takes

After you're done with your performance, press the record button again. You will see the recordings on your timeline. You can edit these by sliding them, or you may want to blend or ease your performances. This is similar to easing a movement in After Effects. These layers are called takes and are similar to an acting performance in a movie. An actor has a series of takes in a movie scene:

  1. Select the end of your take layer.
  2. You will see a double-arrow icon.
  3. Drag this icon to the left. You will see a sloped curve icon. This means you can blend or smooth the end of your take layer:
    Blending takes

    Blend take

Starting recording

Next, let's make Chloe talk! Look at the icon next to the camera. This is the audio recording button:

  1. Click on the audio button.
  2. Click the record button.
  3. Begin speaking.
  4. Click the record button again to stop recording:
    Starting recording

    Turn on the audio button

This will add additional Audio layers in the timeline. Take a look at the new layers or takes in the timeline here:

Starting recording

Camera and audio input layers

Now that we've created a cool animation, let's play it to preview our work. Press the play button:

Starting recording

Play button

Project settings

Now that you know how to animate your character and record audio, let's adjust our project settings. The following steps will show you how to do that:

  1. Select the Scene.
  2. Look at the far-right and you will see the Scene info.
  3. Adjust the scene Duration so that it's only the length of your project:
    Project settings

    Adjust scene duration

Next, we are going to adjust our Frame Rate so that it matches our frame rate in After Effects. Change this to 29.97 fps:

Project settings

Adjust scene duration frame rate

Exporting your animation

Now let's export our project. Your project will export with a transparent background unless you put an image in the background.

The following are the steps to export your project:

  1. Click on File.
  2. Click on Export.
  3. Select PNG Sequence and WAV...:
    Exporting your animation

    Export PNG sequence

Importing PNG sequences

We are ready to import our PNG sequences. Here are the steps to do that:

  1. Jump back over to After Effects. Import the .png file.
  2. Select the first .png file with 00 at the end.
  3. After Effects will import all the remaining files in a .png sequence.
  4. Ensure that you check the sequence:
    Importing PNG sequences

    Import PNG

You can also import any audio recorded in your character animation. When you render out your PNG sequence, it will save a WAV file with it. If you need to import your audio file, here are the steps:

  1. Go to the folder with the PNG sequence.
  2. Navigate to the bottom of the PNG sequence.
  3. Import the WAV file to After Effects:
    Importing PNG sequences

    Import WAV

Adding the character to an infographic project

Now we are going to bring Chloe into the main composition and we are going to create a camera move to the right. We will animate our null object to do this. We need to be on the correct part of the timeline and we need the correct things parented to the null.

To be sure we are at the correct point on the timeline, follow these steps:

  1. Move to the point on the timeline after the last bit of text that has been animated on.
  2. Move the Chloe layer on to the timeline so that the layer starts at that point.
  3. Turn on motion blur for Chloe. See the placement of everything here:
    Adding the character to an infographic project

    Camera pan start point

We need to parent the Chloe layer to the null layer at this point. Also parent the text to the null layer:

Adding the character to an infographic project

Parent character to null

To create a hold key frame for the position parameter of our null object, follow these steps:

  1. Navigate to the far-right of the timeline.
  2. Locate the diamond icon in the position of the null object.
  3. Click on the diamond:
    Adding the character to an infographic project

    Blank key frame

Let's animate our move to the right. Select the position parameter and scrub it so that the camera is moving to the right:

Adding the character to an infographic project

Pan to Chloe

Completing your infographic

You now have all the tools to create a dynamic infographic video. Spend some time adding more text to help communicate your concept.

Adobe Character Animator

Character Animator is by far the most amazing character animation program in After Effects. Install Photoshop and Adobe Character Animator on your machine this very second. With this software, you can create characters that lip synch to your voice. You must have a webcam to create and stream live motion-captured animation online.

First things first, you need to install Adobe Character Animator. When you open Character Animator, you're presented with the Start menu. This has free puppets you can start using without editing them. You also have access to interactive tutorials. If you click the right arrow, you can see more free characters to use:

Adobe Character Animator

Start menu

Let's click on the Chloe character. Choose the Illustator version. You could also use the Photoshop version, but for this lesson we will use the illustrator file. This opens the Chloe character in Illustrator. You can choose to edit the character here, but do not rename anything. Just for fun, let's change the color of her shirt to yellow. Look on the far-left of your Illustrator tool panel and choose the direct selection tool.

Altering Illustrator files

Now that you know how to open your characters, we can start altering our illustrator files. Here's how we do that:

Altering Illustrator files

Direct selection tool

Hover the direct selection tool over the different parts of the t-shirt. Click on each piece while holding the Shift key:

Altering Illustrator files

Select the shirt

Now that the t-shirt is selected, navigate to the left of the tool panel and choose Fill (X) to change the color to yellow:

Altering Illustrator files

Change color

I am also going to select the t-shirt logo and turn it off. You need to save your Illustrator file, then jump back into Character Animator.

Now you should see the Record interface. This is where you animate your character. Let's save this project:

Altering Illustrator files

Record interface

Go up to the File tab and Save Project As.... Give your project a unique name:

Altering Illustrator files

Save as

Character Animator has an autosave feature built into it. I find it useful to save different versions of my projects as I progress. That way, if a project gets corrupted, you will have a backup.

Character Animator interface

The interface is similar to After Effects, except it doesn't have as many tools and panels. To the far left, you will see a Project panel window. This is where you can create new scenes and new folders, and organize your project. This is where you import items into the program:

Character Animator interface

Image folders and new scenes

To the left, at the top of the interface, there are four tabs: Start/Rig/Record/Stream. We already looked at the Start tab. Let's look at the Rig tab. This is where the puppet is rigged. This allows us to take a behind-the-scenes look at our character. As you get more advanced, you will need to edit the rig of your character here:

Character Animator interface

Rig

The Record tab is the animation panel; this is where all the animation and performance takes place.

The Stream tab is used for streaming your performance live around the world:

Character Animator interface

Stream

Next, let's look at the scene Properties.

Make sure your scene is selected, then look to the far-right—you will see a variety of project settings you can adjust, such as Frame Rate:

Character Animator interface

Scene settings

The Scene window is where your character is. This is where all the action takes place. Take a look at the play buttons under the character. This allows you to go backward or forward in the timeline. The red button is how you record your animations. To the right of the Record button is the speed. You can control how quickly or slowly your recording happens:

Character Animator interface

Record button and speed

Next, let's look at the camera and mic panel.

This is where you handle your webcam setup and your voice recording. Let's turn on our webcam. Click this camera input tab at the top-left corner of the interface. If you have a working webcam, you should see the box in the panel show your image in it. This will enable facial tracking. The red dots are track points on your face:

Character Animator interface

Image webcam

Let's make sure our face is properly synced. Make sure you have a strong light source. Also, wearing glasses can interfere with syncing your face to the web camera. Next, select the webcam button. Click the (Set Rest Pose). This will sync your face to the character's face. It's similar to what happened in Avatar when Sully gets synced to his avatar. Now you are synced to your character:

Character Animator interface

Set Rest Pose

Now you can spend some time playing with your character—when you speak, it speaks. It only syncs to your head; as its head will move with yours, its eyes will also follow yours. It will also speak when you speak. I'll show you how to move its limbs later.

Animation timeline

Let's look at the animation timeline. This is where you can see your layers and is similar to After Effects. You can edit your performances here:

Animation timeline

Timeline

Next, we will look at the character properties. Select your Chloe character layer in the timeline. To the far right, you have properties for her eyes, face, lips, and so on:

Animation timeline

Puppet properties

Recording your performance

These are all the properties you can adjust for your character.

Now that we know where everything is located, let's begin our animation and our performance:

  1. Click on the red record button. You will hear a few beeps before the recording button is active:
    Recording your performance

    Record button

  2. Select Chloe's hand and drag it.
  3. Let go of her hand.
  4. Press the record button again to stop recording.

Adjusting character properties

It may take your computer a couple of seconds to render the recording. When it's done, you will have a recording layer. This is called a take in Character Animator. You can adjust your Dragger setting like this:

  1. Select the character in the timeline and to the right in the Properties.
  2. Twirl down the Dragger properties:
    Adjusting character properties

    Dragger properties

Across from the After Move property, you can choose to hold your limbs in place or return to rest. Let's choose Return to rest. This will enable our limbs to return to their original resting pose after moving them:

Adjusting character properties

Return to rest

You can also adjust Eye Gaze to control the strength or the extent to which the eyes will move:

Adjusting character properties

Eye Gaze

Let's look at our Face controls. These are located on the far-right of your screen. We won't go over all these parameters here, but you can change your Eyebrow Strength to 40. This will give you control of eyebrow movements. If you need to adjust anything on the face, this is where you find it:

Adjusting character properties

Face controls

We are almost ready to start the animation. Look in the far-right corner of the screen—there is a small camera-control icon. Click on this icon to begin to activate your camera. Hit the record button to activate live recording:

Adjusting character properties

Camera control

If you move your head around, you should see your puppet moving. Let's adjust the gravity for her hair:

Adjusting character properties

Gravity Strength

You will need to zoom into the timeline to look at the bottom corner of the panel, just under the timeline. You will see an icon similar to that in After Effects. Click on this to zoom into the timeline:

Adjusting character properties

Zoom into the timeline

Blending takes

After you're done with your performance, press the record button again. You will see the recordings on your timeline. You can edit these by sliding them, or you may want to blend or ease your performances. This is similar to easing a movement in After Effects. These layers are called takes and are similar to an acting performance in a movie. An actor has a series of takes in a movie scene:

  1. Select the end of your take layer.
  2. You will see a double-arrow icon.
  3. Drag this icon to the left. You will see a sloped curve icon. This means you can blend or smooth the end of your take layer:
    Blending takes

    Blend take

Starting recording

Next, let's make Chloe talk! Look at the icon next to the camera. This is the audio recording button:

  1. Click on the audio button.
  2. Click the record button.
  3. Begin speaking.
  4. Click the record button again to stop recording:
    Starting recording

    Turn on the audio button

This will add additional Audio layers in the timeline. Take a look at the new layers or takes in the timeline here:

Starting recording

Camera and audio input layers

Now that we've created a cool animation, let's play it to preview our work. Press the play button:

Starting recording

Play button

Project settings

Now that you know how to animate your character and record audio, let's adjust our project settings. The following steps will show you how to do that:

  1. Select the Scene.
  2. Look at the far-right and you will see the Scene info.
  3. Adjust the scene Duration so that it's only the length of your project:
    Project settings

    Adjust scene duration

Next, we are going to adjust our Frame Rate so that it matches our frame rate in After Effects. Change this to 29.97 fps:

Project settings

Adjust scene duration frame rate

Exporting your animation

Now let's export our project. Your project will export with a transparent background unless you put an image in the background.

The following are the steps to export your project:

  1. Click on File.
  2. Click on Export.
  3. Select PNG Sequence and WAV...:
    Exporting your animation

    Export PNG sequence

Importing PNG sequences

We are ready to import our PNG sequences. Here are the steps to do that:

  1. Jump back over to After Effects. Import the .png file.
  2. Select the first .png file with 00 at the end.
  3. After Effects will import all the remaining files in a .png sequence.
  4. Ensure that you check the sequence:
    Importing PNG sequences

    Import PNG

You can also import any audio recorded in your character animation. When you render out your PNG sequence, it will save a WAV file with it. If you need to import your audio file, here are the steps:

  1. Go to the folder with the PNG sequence.
  2. Navigate to the bottom of the PNG sequence.
  3. Import the WAV file to After Effects:
    Importing PNG sequences

    Import WAV

Adding the character to an infographic project

Now we are going to bring Chloe into the main composition and we are going to create a camera move to the right. We will animate our null object to do this. We need to be on the correct part of the timeline and we need the correct things parented to the null.

To be sure we are at the correct point on the timeline, follow these steps:

  1. Move to the point on the timeline after the last bit of text that has been animated on.
  2. Move the Chloe layer on to the timeline so that the layer starts at that point.
  3. Turn on motion blur for Chloe. See the placement of everything here:
    Adding the character to an infographic project

    Camera pan start point

We need to parent the Chloe layer to the null layer at this point. Also parent the text to the null layer:

Adding the character to an infographic project

Parent character to null

To create a hold key frame for the position parameter of our null object, follow these steps:

  1. Navigate to the far-right of the timeline.
  2. Locate the diamond icon in the position of the null object.
  3. Click on the diamond:
    Adding the character to an infographic project

    Blank key frame

Let's animate our move to the right. Select the position parameter and scrub it so that the camera is moving to the right:

Adding the character to an infographic project

Pan to Chloe

Completing your infographic

You now have all the tools to create a dynamic infographic video. Spend some time adding more text to help communicate your concept.

Altering Illustrator files

Now that you know how to open your characters, we can start altering our illustrator files. Here's how we do that:

Altering Illustrator files

Direct selection tool

Hover the direct selection tool over the different parts of the t-shirt. Click on each piece while holding the Shift key:

Altering Illustrator files

Select the shirt

Now that the t-shirt is selected, navigate to the left of the tool panel and choose Fill (X) to change the color to yellow:

Altering Illustrator files

Change color

I am also going to select the t-shirt logo and turn it off. You need to save your Illustrator file, then jump back into Character Animator.

Now you should see the Record interface. This is where you animate your character. Let's save this project:

Altering Illustrator files

Record interface

Go up to the File tab and Save Project As.... Give your project a unique name:

Altering Illustrator files

Save as

Character Animator has an autosave feature built into it. I find it useful to save different versions of my projects as I progress. That way, if a project gets corrupted, you will have a backup.

Character Animator interface

The interface is similar to After Effects, except it doesn't have as many tools and panels. To the far left, you will see a Project panel window. This is where you can create new scenes and new folders, and organize your project. This is where you import items into the program:

Character Animator interface

Image folders and new scenes

To the left, at the top of the interface, there are four tabs: Start/Rig/Record/Stream. We already looked at the Start tab. Let's look at the Rig tab. This is where the puppet is rigged. This allows us to take a behind-the-scenes look at our character. As you get more advanced, you will need to edit the rig of your character here:

Character Animator interface

Rig

The Record tab is the animation panel; this is where all the animation and performance takes place.

The Stream tab is used for streaming your performance live around the world:

Character Animator interface

Stream

Next, let's look at the scene Properties.

Make sure your scene is selected, then look to the far-right—you will see a variety of project settings you can adjust, such as Frame Rate:

Character Animator interface

Scene settings

The Scene window is where your character is. This is where all the action takes place. Take a look at the play buttons under the character. This allows you to go backward or forward in the timeline. The red button is how you record your animations. To the right of the Record button is the speed. You can control how quickly or slowly your recording happens:

Character Animator interface

Record button and speed

Next, let's look at the camera and mic panel.

This is where you handle your webcam setup and your voice recording. Let's turn on our webcam. Click this camera input tab at the top-left corner of the interface. If you have a working webcam, you should see the box in the panel show your image in it. This will enable facial tracking. The red dots are track points on your face:

Character Animator interface

Image webcam

Let's make sure our face is properly synced. Make sure you have a strong light source. Also, wearing glasses can interfere with syncing your face to the web camera. Next, select the webcam button. Click the (Set Rest Pose). This will sync your face to the character's face. It's similar to what happened in Avatar when Sully gets synced to his avatar. Now you are synced to your character:

Character Animator interface

Set Rest Pose

Now you can spend some time playing with your character—when you speak, it speaks. It only syncs to your head; as its head will move with yours, its eyes will also follow yours. It will also speak when you speak. I'll show you how to move its limbs later.

Animation timeline

Let's look at the animation timeline. This is where you can see your layers and is similar to After Effects. You can edit your performances here:

Animation timeline

Timeline

Next, we will look at the character properties. Select your Chloe character layer in the timeline. To the far right, you have properties for her eyes, face, lips, and so on:

Animation timeline

Puppet properties

Recording your performance

These are all the properties you can adjust for your character.

Now that we know where everything is located, let's begin our animation and our performance:

  1. Click on the red record button. You will hear a few beeps before the recording button is active:
    Recording your performance

    Record button

  2. Select Chloe's hand and drag it.
  3. Let go of her hand.
  4. Press the record button again to stop recording.

Adjusting character properties

It may take your computer a couple of seconds to render the recording. When it's done, you will have a recording layer. This is called a take in Character Animator. You can adjust your Dragger setting like this:

  1. Select the character in the timeline and to the right in the Properties.
  2. Twirl down the Dragger properties:
    Adjusting character properties

    Dragger properties

Across from the After Move property, you can choose to hold your limbs in place or return to rest. Let's choose Return to rest. This will enable our limbs to return to their original resting pose after moving them:

Adjusting character properties

Return to rest

You can also adjust Eye Gaze to control the strength or the extent to which the eyes will move:

Adjusting character properties

Eye Gaze

Let's look at our Face controls. These are located on the far-right of your screen. We won't go over all these parameters here, but you can change your Eyebrow Strength to 40. This will give you control of eyebrow movements. If you need to adjust anything on the face, this is where you find it:

Adjusting character properties

Face controls

We are almost ready to start the animation. Look in the far-right corner of the screen—there is a small camera-control icon. Click on this icon to begin to activate your camera. Hit the record button to activate live recording:

Adjusting character properties

Camera control

If you move your head around, you should see your puppet moving. Let's adjust the gravity for her hair:

Adjusting character properties

Gravity Strength

You will need to zoom into the timeline to look at the bottom corner of the panel, just under the timeline. You will see an icon similar to that in After Effects. Click on this to zoom into the timeline:

Adjusting character properties

Zoom into the timeline

Blending takes

After you're done with your performance, press the record button again. You will see the recordings on your timeline. You can edit these by sliding them, or you may want to blend or ease your performances. This is similar to easing a movement in After Effects. These layers are called takes and are similar to an acting performance in a movie. An actor has a series of takes in a movie scene:

  1. Select the end of your take layer.
  2. You will see a double-arrow icon.
  3. Drag this icon to the left. You will see a sloped curve icon. This means you can blend or smooth the end of your take layer:
    Blending takes

    Blend take

Starting recording

Next, let's make Chloe talk! Look at the icon next to the camera. This is the audio recording button:

  1. Click on the audio button.
  2. Click the record button.
  3. Begin speaking.
  4. Click the record button again to stop recording:
    Starting recording

    Turn on the audio button

This will add additional Audio layers in the timeline. Take a look at the new layers or takes in the timeline here:

Starting recording

Camera and audio input layers

Now that we've created a cool animation, let's play it to preview our work. Press the play button:

Starting recording

Play button

Project settings

Now that you know how to animate your character and record audio, let's adjust our project settings. The following steps will show you how to do that:

  1. Select the Scene.
  2. Look at the far-right and you will see the Scene info.
  3. Adjust the scene Duration so that it's only the length of your project:
    Project settings

    Adjust scene duration

Next, we are going to adjust our Frame Rate so that it matches our frame rate in After Effects. Change this to 29.97 fps:

Project settings

Adjust scene duration frame rate

Exporting your animation

Now let's export our project. Your project will export with a transparent background unless you put an image in the background.

The following are the steps to export your project:

  1. Click on File.
  2. Click on Export.
  3. Select PNG Sequence and WAV...:
    Exporting your animation

    Export PNG sequence

Importing PNG sequences

We are ready to import our PNG sequences. Here are the steps to do that:

  1. Jump back over to After Effects. Import the .png file.
  2. Select the first .png file with 00 at the end.
  3. After Effects will import all the remaining files in a .png sequence.
  4. Ensure that you check the sequence:
    Importing PNG sequences

    Import PNG

You can also import any audio recorded in your character animation. When you render out your PNG sequence, it will save a WAV file with it. If you need to import your audio file, here are the steps:

  1. Go to the folder with the PNG sequence.
  2. Navigate to the bottom of the PNG sequence.
  3. Import the WAV file to After Effects:
    Importing PNG sequences

    Import WAV

Adding the character to an infographic project

Now we are going to bring Chloe into the main composition and we are going to create a camera move to the right. We will animate our null object to do this. We need to be on the correct part of the timeline and we need the correct things parented to the null.

To be sure we are at the correct point on the timeline, follow these steps:

  1. Move to the point on the timeline after the last bit of text that has been animated on.
  2. Move the Chloe layer on to the timeline so that the layer starts at that point.
  3. Turn on motion blur for Chloe. See the placement of everything here:
    Adding the character to an infographic project

    Camera pan start point

We need to parent the Chloe layer to the null layer at this point. Also parent the text to the null layer:

Adding the character to an infographic project

Parent character to null

To create a hold key frame for the position parameter of our null object, follow these steps:

  1. Navigate to the far-right of the timeline.
  2. Locate the diamond icon in the position of the null object.
  3. Click on the diamond:
    Adding the character to an infographic project

    Blank key frame

Let's animate our move to the right. Select the position parameter and scrub it so that the camera is moving to the right:

Adding the character to an infographic project

Pan to Chloe

Completing your infographic

You now have all the tools to create a dynamic infographic video. Spend some time adding more text to help communicate your concept.

Character Animator interface

The interface is similar to After Effects, except it doesn't have as many tools and panels. To the far left, you will see a Project panel window. This is where you can create new scenes and new folders, and organize your project. This is where you import items into the program:

Character Animator interface

Image folders and new scenes

To the left, at the top of the interface, there are four tabs: Start/Rig/Record/Stream. We already looked at the Start tab. Let's look at the Rig tab. This is where the puppet is rigged. This allows us to take a behind-the-scenes look at our character. As you get more advanced, you will need to edit the rig of your character here:

Character Animator interface

Rig

The Record tab is the animation panel; this is where all the animation and performance takes place.

The Stream tab is used for streaming your performance live around the world:

Character Animator interface

Stream

Next, let's look at the scene Properties.

Make sure your scene is selected, then look to the far-right—you will see a variety of project settings you can adjust, such as Frame Rate:

Character Animator interface

Scene settings

The Scene window is where your character is. This is where all the action takes place. Take a look at the play buttons under the character. This allows you to go backward or forward in the timeline. The red button is how you record your animations. To the right of the Record button is the speed. You can control how quickly or slowly your recording happens:

Character Animator interface

Record button and speed

Next, let's look at the camera and mic panel.

This is where you handle your webcam setup and your voice recording. Let's turn on our webcam. Click this camera input tab at the top-left corner of the interface. If you have a working webcam, you should see the box in the panel show your image in it. This will enable facial tracking. The red dots are track points on your face:

Character Animator interface

Image webcam

Let's make sure our face is properly synced. Make sure you have a strong light source. Also, wearing glasses can interfere with syncing your face to the web camera. Next, select the webcam button. Click the (Set Rest Pose). This will sync your face to the character's face. It's similar to what happened in Avatar when Sully gets synced to his avatar. Now you are synced to your character:

Character Animator interface

Set Rest Pose

Now you can spend some time playing with your character—when you speak, it speaks. It only syncs to your head; as its head will move with yours, its eyes will also follow yours. It will also speak when you speak. I'll show you how to move its limbs later.

Animation timeline

Let's look at the animation timeline. This is where you can see your layers and is similar to After Effects. You can edit your performances here:

Animation timeline

Timeline

Next, we will look at the character properties. Select your Chloe character layer in the timeline. To the far right, you have properties for her eyes, face, lips, and so on:

Animation timeline

Puppet properties

Recording your performance

These are all the properties you can adjust for your character.

Now that we know where everything is located, let's begin our animation and our performance:

  1. Click on the red record button. You will hear a few beeps before the recording button is active:
    Recording your performance

    Record button

  2. Select Chloe's hand and drag it.
  3. Let go of her hand.
  4. Press the record button again to stop recording.

Adjusting character properties

It may take your computer a couple of seconds to render the recording. When it's done, you will have a recording layer. This is called a take in Character Animator. You can adjust your Dragger setting like this:

  1. Select the character in the timeline and to the right in the Properties.
  2. Twirl down the Dragger properties:
    Adjusting character properties

    Dragger properties

Across from the After Move property, you can choose to hold your limbs in place or return to rest. Let's choose Return to rest. This will enable our limbs to return to their original resting pose after moving them:

Adjusting character properties

Return to rest

You can also adjust Eye Gaze to control the strength or the extent to which the eyes will move:

Adjusting character properties

Eye Gaze

Let's look at our Face controls. These are located on the far-right of your screen. We won't go over all these parameters here, but you can change your Eyebrow Strength to 40. This will give you control of eyebrow movements. If you need to adjust anything on the face, this is where you find it:

Adjusting character properties

Face controls

We are almost ready to start the animation. Look in the far-right corner of the screen—there is a small camera-control icon. Click on this icon to begin to activate your camera. Hit the record button to activate live recording:

Adjusting character properties

Camera control

If you move your head around, you should see your puppet moving. Let's adjust the gravity for her hair:

Adjusting character properties

Gravity Strength

You will need to zoom into the timeline to look at the bottom corner of the panel, just under the timeline. You will see an icon similar to that in After Effects. Click on this to zoom into the timeline:

Adjusting character properties

Zoom into the timeline

Blending takes

After you're done with your performance, press the record button again. You will see the recordings on your timeline. You can edit these by sliding them, or you may want to blend or ease your performances. This is similar to easing a movement in After Effects. These layers are called takes and are similar to an acting performance in a movie. An actor has a series of takes in a movie scene:

  1. Select the end of your take layer.
  2. You will see a double-arrow icon.
  3. Drag this icon to the left. You will see a sloped curve icon. This means you can blend or smooth the end of your take layer:
    Blending takes

    Blend take

Starting recording

Next, let's make Chloe talk! Look at the icon next to the camera. This is the audio recording button:

  1. Click on the audio button.
  2. Click the record button.
  3. Begin speaking.
  4. Click the record button again to stop recording:
    Starting recording

    Turn on the audio button

This will add additional Audio layers in the timeline. Take a look at the new layers or takes in the timeline here:

Starting recording

Camera and audio input layers

Now that we've created a cool animation, let's play it to preview our work. Press the play button:

Starting recording

Play button

Project settings

Now that you know how to animate your character and record audio, let's adjust our project settings. The following steps will show you how to do that:

  1. Select the Scene.
  2. Look at the far-right and you will see the Scene info.
  3. Adjust the scene Duration so that it's only the length of your project:
    Project settings

    Adjust scene duration

Next, we are going to adjust our Frame Rate so that it matches our frame rate in After Effects. Change this to 29.97 fps:

Project settings

Adjust scene duration frame rate

Exporting your animation

Now let's export our project. Your project will export with a transparent background unless you put an image in the background.

The following are the steps to export your project:

  1. Click on File.
  2. Click on Export.
  3. Select PNG Sequence and WAV...:
    Exporting your animation

    Export PNG sequence

Importing PNG sequences

We are ready to import our PNG sequences. Here are the steps to do that:

  1. Jump back over to After Effects. Import the .png file.
  2. Select the first .png file with 00 at the end.
  3. After Effects will import all the remaining files in a .png sequence.
  4. Ensure that you check the sequence:
    Importing PNG sequences

    Import PNG

You can also import any audio recorded in your character animation. When you render out your PNG sequence, it will save a WAV file with it. If you need to import your audio file, here are the steps:

  1. Go to the folder with the PNG sequence.
  2. Navigate to the bottom of the PNG sequence.
  3. Import the WAV file to After Effects:
    Importing PNG sequences

    Import WAV

Adding the character to an infographic project

Now we are going to bring Chloe into the main composition and we are going to create a camera move to the right. We will animate our null object to do this. We need to be on the correct part of the timeline and we need the correct things parented to the null.

To be sure we are at the correct point on the timeline, follow these steps:

  1. Move to the point on the timeline after the last bit of text that has been animated on.
  2. Move the Chloe layer on to the timeline so that the layer starts at that point.
  3. Turn on motion blur for Chloe. See the placement of everything here:
    Adding the character to an infographic project

    Camera pan start point

We need to parent the Chloe layer to the null layer at this point. Also parent the text to the null layer:

Adding the character to an infographic project

Parent character to null

To create a hold key frame for the position parameter of our null object, follow these steps:

  1. Navigate to the far-right of the timeline.
  2. Locate the diamond icon in the position of the null object.
  3. Click on the diamond:
    Adding the character to an infographic project

    Blank key frame

Let's animate our move to the right. Select the position parameter and scrub it so that the camera is moving to the right:

Adding the character to an infographic project

Pan to Chloe

Completing your infographic

You now have all the tools to create a dynamic infographic video. Spend some time adding more text to help communicate your concept.

Animation timeline

Let's look at the animation timeline. This is where you can see your layers and is similar to After Effects. You can edit your performances here:

Animation timeline

Timeline

Next, we will look at the character properties. Select your Chloe character layer in the timeline. To the far right, you have properties for her eyes, face, lips, and so on:

Animation timeline

Puppet properties

Recording your performance

These are all the properties you can adjust for your character.

Now that we know where everything is located, let's begin our animation and our performance:

  1. Click on the red record button. You will hear a few beeps before the recording button is active:
    Recording your performance

    Record button

  2. Select Chloe's hand and drag it.
  3. Let go of her hand.
  4. Press the record button again to stop recording.

Adjusting character properties

It may take your computer a couple of seconds to render the recording. When it's done, you will have a recording layer. This is called a take in Character Animator. You can adjust your Dragger setting like this:

  1. Select the character in the timeline and to the right in the Properties.
  2. Twirl down the Dragger properties:
    Adjusting character properties

    Dragger properties

Across from the After Move property, you can choose to hold your limbs in place or return to rest. Let's choose Return to rest. This will enable our limbs to return to their original resting pose after moving them:

Adjusting character properties

Return to rest

You can also adjust Eye Gaze to control the strength or the extent to which the eyes will move:

Adjusting character properties

Eye Gaze

Let's look at our Face controls. These are located on the far-right of your screen. We won't go over all these parameters here, but you can change your Eyebrow Strength to 40. This will give you control of eyebrow movements. If you need to adjust anything on the face, this is where you find it:

Adjusting character properties

Face controls

We are almost ready to start the animation. Look in the far-right corner of the screen—there is a small camera-control icon. Click on this icon to begin to activate your camera. Hit the record button to activate live recording:

Adjusting character properties

Camera control

If you move your head around, you should see your puppet moving. Let's adjust the gravity for her hair:

Adjusting character properties

Gravity Strength

You will need to zoom into the timeline to look at the bottom corner of the panel, just under the timeline. You will see an icon similar to that in After Effects. Click on this to zoom into the timeline:

Adjusting character properties

Zoom into the timeline

Blending takes

After you're done with your performance, press the record button again. You will see the recordings on your timeline. You can edit these by sliding them, or you may want to blend or ease your performances. This is similar to easing a movement in After Effects. These layers are called takes and are similar to an acting performance in a movie. An actor has a series of takes in a movie scene:

  1. Select the end of your take layer.
  2. You will see a double-arrow icon.
  3. Drag this icon to the left. You will see a sloped curve icon. This means you can blend or smooth the end of your take layer:
    Blending takes

    Blend take

Starting recording

Next, let's make Chloe talk! Look at the icon next to the camera. This is the audio recording button:

  1. Click on the audio button.
  2. Click the record button.
  3. Begin speaking.
  4. Click the record button again to stop recording:
    Starting recording

    Turn on the audio button

This will add additional Audio layers in the timeline. Take a look at the new layers or takes in the timeline here:

Starting recording

Camera and audio input layers

Now that we've created a cool animation, let's play it to preview our work. Press the play button:

Starting recording

Play button

Project settings

Now that you know how to animate your character and record audio, let's adjust our project settings. The following steps will show you how to do that:

  1. Select the Scene.
  2. Look at the far-right and you will see the Scene info.
  3. Adjust the scene Duration so that it's only the length of your project:
    Project settings

    Adjust scene duration

Next, we are going to adjust our Frame Rate so that it matches our frame rate in After Effects. Change this to 29.97 fps:

Project settings

Adjust scene duration frame rate

Exporting your animation

Now let's export our project. Your project will export with a transparent background unless you put an image in the background.

The following are the steps to export your project:

  1. Click on File.
  2. Click on Export.
  3. Select PNG Sequence and WAV...:
    Exporting your animation

    Export PNG sequence

Importing PNG sequences

We are ready to import our PNG sequences. Here are the steps to do that:

  1. Jump back over to After Effects. Import the .png file.
  2. Select the first .png file with 00 at the end.
  3. After Effects will import all the remaining files in a .png sequence.
  4. Ensure that you check the sequence:
    Importing PNG sequences

    Import PNG

You can also import any audio recorded in your character animation. When you render out your PNG sequence, it will save a WAV file with it. If you need to import your audio file, here are the steps:

  1. Go to the folder with the PNG sequence.
  2. Navigate to the bottom of the PNG sequence.
  3. Import the WAV file to After Effects:
    Importing PNG sequences

    Import WAV

Adding the character to an infographic project

Now we are going to bring Chloe into the main composition and we are going to create a camera move to the right. We will animate our null object to do this. We need to be on the correct part of the timeline and we need the correct things parented to the null.

To be sure we are at the correct point on the timeline, follow these steps:

  1. Move to the point on the timeline after the last bit of text that has been animated on.
  2. Move the Chloe layer on to the timeline so that the layer starts at that point.
  3. Turn on motion blur for Chloe. See the placement of everything here:
    Adding the character to an infographic project

    Camera pan start point

We need to parent the Chloe layer to the null layer at this point. Also parent the text to the null layer:

Adding the character to an infographic project

Parent character to null

To create a hold key frame for the position parameter of our null object, follow these steps:

  1. Navigate to the far-right of the timeline.
  2. Locate the diamond icon in the position of the null object.
  3. Click on the diamond:
    Adding the character to an infographic project

    Blank key frame

Let's animate our move to the right. Select the position parameter and scrub it so that the camera is moving to the right:

Adding the character to an infographic project

Pan to Chloe

Completing your infographic

You now have all the tools to create a dynamic infographic video. Spend some time adding more text to help communicate your concept.

Recording your performance

These are all the properties you can adjust for your character.

Now that we know where everything is located, let's begin our animation and our performance:

  1. Click on the red record button. You will hear a few beeps before the recording button is active:
    Recording your performance

    Record button

  2. Select Chloe's hand and drag it.
  3. Let go of her hand.
  4. Press the record button again to stop recording.

Adjusting character properties

It may take your computer a couple of seconds to render the recording. When it's done, you will have a recording layer. This is called a take in Character Animator. You can adjust your Dragger setting like this:

  1. Select the character in the timeline and to the right in the Properties.
  2. Twirl down the Dragger properties:
    Adjusting character properties

    Dragger properties

Across from the After Move property, you can choose to hold your limbs in place or return to rest. Let's choose Return to rest. This will enable our limbs to return to their original resting pose after moving them:

Adjusting character properties

Return to rest

You can also adjust Eye Gaze to control the strength or the extent to which the eyes will move:

Adjusting character properties

Eye Gaze

Let's look at our Face controls. These are located on the far-right of your screen. We won't go over all these parameters here, but you can change your Eyebrow Strength to 40. This will give you control of eyebrow movements. If you need to adjust anything on the face, this is where you find it:

Adjusting character properties

Face controls

We are almost ready to start the animation. Look in the far-right corner of the screen—there is a small camera-control icon. Click on this icon to begin to activate your camera. Hit the record button to activate live recording:

Adjusting character properties

Camera control

If you move your head around, you should see your puppet moving. Let's adjust the gravity for her hair:

Adjusting character properties

Gravity Strength

You will need to zoom into the timeline to look at the bottom corner of the panel, just under the timeline. You will see an icon similar to that in After Effects. Click on this to zoom into the timeline:

Adjusting character properties

Zoom into the timeline

Blending takes

After you're done with your performance, press the record button again. You will see the recordings on your timeline. You can edit these by sliding them, or you may want to blend or ease your performances. This is similar to easing a movement in After Effects. These layers are called takes and are similar to an acting performance in a movie. An actor has a series of takes in a movie scene:

  1. Select the end of your take layer.
  2. You will see a double-arrow icon.
  3. Drag this icon to the left. You will see a sloped curve icon. This means you can blend or smooth the end of your take layer:
    Blending takes

    Blend take

Starting recording

Next, let's make Chloe talk! Look at the icon next to the camera. This is the audio recording button:

  1. Click on the audio button.
  2. Click the record button.
  3. Begin speaking.
  4. Click the record button again to stop recording:
    Starting recording

    Turn on the audio button

This will add additional Audio layers in the timeline. Take a look at the new layers or takes in the timeline here:

Starting recording

Camera and audio input layers

Now that we've created a cool animation, let's play it to preview our work. Press the play button:

Starting recording

Play button

Project settings

Now that you know how to animate your character and record audio, let's adjust our project settings. The following steps will show you how to do that:

  1. Select the Scene.
  2. Look at the far-right and you will see the Scene info.
  3. Adjust the scene Duration so that it's only the length of your project:
    Project settings

    Adjust scene duration

Next, we are going to adjust our Frame Rate so that it matches our frame rate in After Effects. Change this to 29.97 fps:

Project settings

Adjust scene duration frame rate

Exporting your animation

Now let's export our project. Your project will export with a transparent background unless you put an image in the background.

The following are the steps to export your project:

  1. Click on File.
  2. Click on Export.
  3. Select PNG Sequence and WAV...:
    Exporting your animation

    Export PNG sequence

Importing PNG sequences

We are ready to import our PNG sequences. Here are the steps to do that:

  1. Jump back over to After Effects. Import the .png file.
  2. Select the first .png file with 00 at the end.
  3. After Effects will import all the remaining files in a .png sequence.
  4. Ensure that you check the sequence:
    Importing PNG sequences

    Import PNG

You can also import any audio recorded in your character animation. When you render out your PNG sequence, it will save a WAV file with it. If you need to import your audio file, here are the steps:

  1. Go to the folder with the PNG sequence.
  2. Navigate to the bottom of the PNG sequence.
  3. Import the WAV file to After Effects:
    Importing PNG sequences

    Import WAV

Adding the character to an infographic project

Now we are going to bring Chloe into the main composition and we are going to create a camera move to the right. We will animate our null object to do this. We need to be on the correct part of the timeline and we need the correct things parented to the null.

To be sure we are at the correct point on the timeline, follow these steps:

  1. Move to the point on the timeline after the last bit of text that has been animated on.
  2. Move the Chloe layer on to the timeline so that the layer starts at that point.
  3. Turn on motion blur for Chloe. See the placement of everything here:
    Adding the character to an infographic project

    Camera pan start point

We need to parent the Chloe layer to the null layer at this point. Also parent the text to the null layer:

Adding the character to an infographic project

Parent character to null

To create a hold key frame for the position parameter of our null object, follow these steps:

  1. Navigate to the far-right of the timeline.
  2. Locate the diamond icon in the position of the null object.
  3. Click on the diamond:
    Adding the character to an infographic project

    Blank key frame

Let's animate our move to the right. Select the position parameter and scrub it so that the camera is moving to the right:

Adding the character to an infographic project

Pan to Chloe

Completing your infographic

You now have all the tools to create a dynamic infographic video. Spend some time adding more text to help communicate your concept.

Adjusting character properties

It may take your computer a couple of seconds to render the recording. When it's done, you will have a recording layer. This is called a take in Character Animator. You can adjust your Dragger setting like this:

  1. Select the character in the timeline and to the right in the Properties.
  2. Twirl down the Dragger properties:
    Adjusting character properties

    Dragger properties

Across from the After Move property, you can choose to hold your limbs in place or return to rest. Let's choose Return to rest. This will enable our limbs to return to their original resting pose after moving them:

Adjusting character properties

Return to rest

You can also adjust Eye Gaze to control the strength or the extent to which the eyes will move:

Adjusting character properties

Eye Gaze

Let's look at our Face controls. These are located on the far-right of your screen. We won't go over all these parameters here, but you can change your Eyebrow Strength to 40. This will give you control of eyebrow movements. If you need to adjust anything on the face, this is where you find it:

Adjusting character properties

Face controls

We are almost ready to start the animation. Look in the far-right corner of the screen—there is a small camera-control icon. Click on this icon to begin to activate your camera. Hit the record button to activate live recording:

Adjusting character properties

Camera control

If you move your head around, you should see your puppet moving. Let's adjust the gravity for her hair:

Adjusting character properties

Gravity Strength

You will need to zoom into the timeline to look at the bottom corner of the panel, just under the timeline. You will see an icon similar to that in After Effects. Click on this to zoom into the timeline:

Adjusting character properties

Zoom into the timeline

Blending takes

After you're done with your performance, press the record button again. You will see the recordings on your timeline. You can edit these by sliding them, or you may want to blend or ease your performances. This is similar to easing a movement in After Effects. These layers are called takes and are similar to an acting performance in a movie. An actor has a series of takes in a movie scene:

  1. Select the end of your take layer.
  2. You will see a double-arrow icon.
  3. Drag this icon to the left. You will see a sloped curve icon. This means you can blend or smooth the end of your take layer:
    Blending takes

    Blend take

Starting recording

Next, let's make Chloe talk! Look at the icon next to the camera. This is the audio recording button:

  1. Click on the audio button.
  2. Click the record button.
  3. Begin speaking.
  4. Click the record button again to stop recording:
    Starting recording

    Turn on the audio button

This will add additional Audio layers in the timeline. Take a look at the new layers or takes in the timeline here:

Starting recording

Camera and audio input layers

Now that we've created a cool animation, let's play it to preview our work. Press the play button:

Starting recording

Play button

Project settings

Now that you know how to animate your character and record audio, let's adjust our project settings. The following steps will show you how to do that:

  1. Select the Scene.
  2. Look at the far-right and you will see the Scene info.
  3. Adjust the scene Duration so that it's only the length of your project:
    Project settings

    Adjust scene duration

Next, we are going to adjust our Frame Rate so that it matches our frame rate in After Effects. Change this to 29.97 fps:

Project settings

Adjust scene duration frame rate

Exporting your animation

Now let's export our project. Your project will export with a transparent background unless you put an image in the background.

The following are the steps to export your project:

  1. Click on File.
  2. Click on Export.
  3. Select PNG Sequence and WAV...:
    Exporting your animation

    Export PNG sequence

Importing PNG sequences

We are ready to import our PNG sequences. Here are the steps to do that:

  1. Jump back over to After Effects. Import the .png file.
  2. Select the first .png file with 00 at the end.
  3. After Effects will import all the remaining files in a .png sequence.
  4. Ensure that you check the sequence:
    Importing PNG sequences

    Import PNG

You can also import any audio recorded in your character animation. When you render out your PNG sequence, it will save a WAV file with it. If you need to import your audio file, here are the steps:

  1. Go to the folder with the PNG sequence.
  2. Navigate to the bottom of the PNG sequence.
  3. Import the WAV file to After Effects:
    Importing PNG sequences

    Import WAV

Adding the character to an infographic project

Now we are going to bring Chloe into the main composition and we are going to create a camera move to the right. We will animate our null object to do this. We need to be on the correct part of the timeline and we need the correct things parented to the null.

To be sure we are at the correct point on the timeline, follow these steps:

  1. Move to the point on the timeline after the last bit of text that has been animated on.
  2. Move the Chloe layer on to the timeline so that the layer starts at that point.
  3. Turn on motion blur for Chloe. See the placement of everything here:
    Adding the character to an infographic project

    Camera pan start point

We need to parent the Chloe layer to the null layer at this point. Also parent the text to the null layer:

Adding the character to an infographic project

Parent character to null

To create a hold key frame for the position parameter of our null object, follow these steps:

  1. Navigate to the far-right of the timeline.
  2. Locate the diamond icon in the position of the null object.
  3. Click on the diamond:
    Adding the character to an infographic project

    Blank key frame

Let's animate our move to the right. Select the position parameter and scrub it so that the camera is moving to the right:

Adding the character to an infographic project

Pan to Chloe

Completing your infographic

You now have all the tools to create a dynamic infographic video. Spend some time adding more text to help communicate your concept.

Blending takes

After you're done with your performance, press the record button again. You will see the recordings on your timeline. You can edit these by sliding them, or you may want to blend or ease your performances. This is similar to easing a movement in After Effects. These layers are called takes and are similar to an acting performance in a movie. An actor has a series of takes in a movie scene:

  1. Select the end of your take layer.
  2. You will see a double-arrow icon.
  3. Drag this icon to the left. You will see a sloped curve icon. This means you can blend or smooth the end of your take layer:
    Blending takes

    Blend take

Starting recording

Next, let's make Chloe talk! Look at the icon next to the camera. This is the audio recording button:

  1. Click on the audio button.
  2. Click the record button.
  3. Begin speaking.
  4. Click the record button again to stop recording:
    Starting recording

    Turn on the audio button

This will add additional Audio layers in the timeline. Take a look at the new layers or takes in the timeline here:

Starting recording

Camera and audio input layers

Now that we've created a cool animation, let's play it to preview our work. Press the play button:

Starting recording

Play button

Project settings

Now that you know how to animate your character and record audio, let's adjust our project settings. The following steps will show you how to do that:

  1. Select the Scene.
  2. Look at the far-right and you will see the Scene info.
  3. Adjust the scene Duration so that it's only the length of your project:
    Project settings

    Adjust scene duration

Next, we are going to adjust our Frame Rate so that it matches our frame rate in After Effects. Change this to 29.97 fps:

Project settings

Adjust scene duration frame rate

Exporting your animation

Now let's export our project. Your project will export with a transparent background unless you put an image in the background.

The following are the steps to export your project:

  1. Click on File.
  2. Click on Export.
  3. Select PNG Sequence and WAV...:
    Exporting your animation

    Export PNG sequence

Importing PNG sequences

We are ready to import our PNG sequences. Here are the steps to do that:

  1. Jump back over to After Effects. Import the .png file.
  2. Select the first .png file with 00 at the end.
  3. After Effects will import all the remaining files in a .png sequence.
  4. Ensure that you check the sequence:
    Importing PNG sequences

    Import PNG

You can also import any audio recorded in your character animation. When you render out your PNG sequence, it will save a WAV file with it. If you need to import your audio file, here are the steps:

  1. Go to the folder with the PNG sequence.
  2. Navigate to the bottom of the PNG sequence.
  3. Import the WAV file to After Effects:
    Importing PNG sequences

    Import WAV

Adding the character to an infographic project

Now we are going to bring Chloe into the main composition and we are going to create a camera move to the right. We will animate our null object to do this. We need to be on the correct part of the timeline and we need the correct things parented to the null.

To be sure we are at the correct point on the timeline, follow these steps:

  1. Move to the point on the timeline after the last bit of text that has been animated on.
  2. Move the Chloe layer on to the timeline so that the layer starts at that point.
  3. Turn on motion blur for Chloe. See the placement of everything here:
    Adding the character to an infographic project

    Camera pan start point

We need to parent the Chloe layer to the null layer at this point. Also parent the text to the null layer:

Adding the character to an infographic project

Parent character to null

To create a hold key frame for the position parameter of our null object, follow these steps:

  1. Navigate to the far-right of the timeline.
  2. Locate the diamond icon in the position of the null object.
  3. Click on the diamond:
    Adding the character to an infographic project

    Blank key frame

Let's animate our move to the right. Select the position parameter and scrub it so that the camera is moving to the right:

Adding the character to an infographic project

Pan to Chloe

Completing your infographic

You now have all the tools to create a dynamic infographic video. Spend some time adding more text to help communicate your concept.

Starting recording

Next, let's make Chloe talk! Look at the icon next to the camera. This is the audio recording button:

  1. Click on the audio button.
  2. Click the record button.
  3. Begin speaking.
  4. Click the record button again to stop recording:
    Starting recording

    Turn on the audio button

This will add additional Audio layers in the timeline. Take a look at the new layers or takes in the timeline here:

Starting recording

Camera and audio input layers

Now that we've created a cool animation, let's play it to preview our work. Press the play button:

Starting recording

Play button

Project settings

Now that you know how to animate your character and record audio, let's adjust our project settings. The following steps will show you how to do that:

  1. Select the Scene.
  2. Look at the far-right and you will see the Scene info.
  3. Adjust the scene Duration so that it's only the length of your project:
    Project settings

    Adjust scene duration

Next, we are going to adjust our Frame Rate so that it matches our frame rate in After Effects. Change this to 29.97 fps:

Project settings

Adjust scene duration frame rate

Exporting your animation

Now let's export our project. Your project will export with a transparent background unless you put an image in the background.

The following are the steps to export your project:

  1. Click on File.
  2. Click on Export.
  3. Select PNG Sequence and WAV...:
    Exporting your animation

    Export PNG sequence

Importing PNG sequences

We are ready to import our PNG sequences. Here are the steps to do that:

  1. Jump back over to After Effects. Import the .png file.
  2. Select the first .png file with 00 at the end.
  3. After Effects will import all the remaining files in a .png sequence.
  4. Ensure that you check the sequence:
    Importing PNG sequences

    Import PNG

You can also import any audio recorded in your character animation. When you render out your PNG sequence, it will save a WAV file with it. If you need to import your audio file, here are the steps:

  1. Go to the folder with the PNG sequence.
  2. Navigate to the bottom of the PNG sequence.
  3. Import the WAV file to After Effects:
    Importing PNG sequences

    Import WAV

Adding the character to an infographic project

Now we are going to bring Chloe into the main composition and we are going to create a camera move to the right. We will animate our null object to do this. We need to be on the correct part of the timeline and we need the correct things parented to the null.

To be sure we are at the correct point on the timeline, follow these steps:

  1. Move to the point on the timeline after the last bit of text that has been animated on.
  2. Move the Chloe layer on to the timeline so that the layer starts at that point.
  3. Turn on motion blur for Chloe. See the placement of everything here:
    Adding the character to an infographic project

    Camera pan start point

We need to parent the Chloe layer to the null layer at this point. Also parent the text to the null layer:

Adding the character to an infographic project

Parent character to null

To create a hold key frame for the position parameter of our null object, follow these steps:

  1. Navigate to the far-right of the timeline.
  2. Locate the diamond icon in the position of the null object.
  3. Click on the diamond:
    Adding the character to an infographic project

    Blank key frame

Let's animate our move to the right. Select the position parameter and scrub it so that the camera is moving to the right:

Adding the character to an infographic project

Pan to Chloe

Completing your infographic

You now have all the tools to create a dynamic infographic video. Spend some time adding more text to help communicate your concept.

Project settings

Now that you know how to animate your character and record audio, let's adjust our project settings. The following steps will show you how to do that:

  1. Select the Scene.
  2. Look at the far-right and you will see the Scene info.
  3. Adjust the scene Duration so that it's only the length of your project:
    Project settings

    Adjust scene duration

Next, we are going to adjust our Frame Rate so that it matches our frame rate in After Effects. Change this to 29.97 fps:

Project settings

Adjust scene duration frame rate

Exporting your animation

Now let's export our project. Your project will export with a transparent background unless you put an image in the background.

The following are the steps to export your project:

  1. Click on File.
  2. Click on Export.
  3. Select PNG Sequence and WAV...:
    Exporting your animation

    Export PNG sequence

Importing PNG sequences

We are ready to import our PNG sequences. Here are the steps to do that:

  1. Jump back over to After Effects. Import the .png file.
  2. Select the first .png file with 00 at the end.
  3. After Effects will import all the remaining files in a .png sequence.
  4. Ensure that you check the sequence:
    Importing PNG sequences

    Import PNG

You can also import any audio recorded in your character animation. When you render out your PNG sequence, it will save a WAV file with it. If you need to import your audio file, here are the steps:

  1. Go to the folder with the PNG sequence.
  2. Navigate to the bottom of the PNG sequence.
  3. Import the WAV file to After Effects:
    Importing PNG sequences

    Import WAV

Adding the character to an infographic project

Now we are going to bring Chloe into the main composition and we are going to create a camera move to the right. We will animate our null object to do this. We need to be on the correct part of the timeline and we need the correct things parented to the null.

To be sure we are at the correct point on the timeline, follow these steps:

  1. Move to the point on the timeline after the last bit of text that has been animated on.
  2. Move the Chloe layer on to the timeline so that the layer starts at that point.
  3. Turn on motion blur for Chloe. See the placement of everything here:
    Adding the character to an infographic project

    Camera pan start point

We need to parent the Chloe layer to the null layer at this point. Also parent the text to the null layer:

Adding the character to an infographic project

Parent character to null

To create a hold key frame for the position parameter of our null object, follow these steps:

  1. Navigate to the far-right of the timeline.
  2. Locate the diamond icon in the position of the null object.
  3. Click on the diamond:
    Adding the character to an infographic project

    Blank key frame

Let's animate our move to the right. Select the position parameter and scrub it so that the camera is moving to the right:

Adding the character to an infographic project

Pan to Chloe

Completing your infographic

You now have all the tools to create a dynamic infographic video. Spend some time adding more text to help communicate your concept.

Exporting your animation

Now let's export our project. Your project will export with a transparent background unless you put an image in the background.

The following are the steps to export your project:

  1. Click on File.
  2. Click on Export.
  3. Select PNG Sequence and WAV...:
    Exporting your animation

    Export PNG sequence

Importing PNG sequences

We are ready to import our PNG sequences. Here are the steps to do that:

  1. Jump back over to After Effects. Import the .png file.
  2. Select the first .png file with 00 at the end.
  3. After Effects will import all the remaining files in a .png sequence.
  4. Ensure that you check the sequence:
    Importing PNG sequences

    Import PNG

You can also import any audio recorded in your character animation. When you render out your PNG sequence, it will save a WAV file with it. If you need to import your audio file, here are the steps:

  1. Go to the folder with the PNG sequence.
  2. Navigate to the bottom of the PNG sequence.
  3. Import the WAV file to After Effects:
    Importing PNG sequences

    Import WAV

Adding the character to an infographic project

Now we are going to bring Chloe into the main composition and we are going to create a camera move to the right. We will animate our null object to do this. We need to be on the correct part of the timeline and we need the correct things parented to the null.

To be sure we are at the correct point on the timeline, follow these steps:

  1. Move to the point on the timeline after the last bit of text that has been animated on.
  2. Move the Chloe layer on to the timeline so that the layer starts at that point.
  3. Turn on motion blur for Chloe. See the placement of everything here:
    Adding the character to an infographic project

    Camera pan start point

We need to parent the Chloe layer to the null layer at this point. Also parent the text to the null layer:

Adding the character to an infographic project

Parent character to null

To create a hold key frame for the position parameter of our null object, follow these steps:

  1. Navigate to the far-right of the timeline.
  2. Locate the diamond icon in the position of the null object.
  3. Click on the diamond:
    Adding the character to an infographic project

    Blank key frame

Let's animate our move to the right. Select the position parameter and scrub it so that the camera is moving to the right:

Adding the character to an infographic project

Pan to Chloe

Completing your infographic

You now have all the tools to create a dynamic infographic video. Spend some time adding more text to help communicate your concept.

Importing PNG sequences

We are ready to import our PNG sequences. Here are the steps to do that:

  1. Jump back over to After Effects. Import the .png file.
  2. Select the first .png file with 00 at the end.
  3. After Effects will import all the remaining files in a .png sequence.
  4. Ensure that you check the sequence:
    Importing PNG sequences

    Import PNG

You can also import any audio recorded in your character animation. When you render out your PNG sequence, it will save a WAV file with it. If you need to import your audio file, here are the steps:

  1. Go to the folder with the PNG sequence.
  2. Navigate to the bottom of the PNG sequence.
  3. Import the WAV file to After Effects:
    Importing PNG sequences

    Import WAV

Adding the character to an infographic project

Now we are going to bring Chloe into the main composition and we are going to create a camera move to the right. We will animate our null object to do this. We need to be on the correct part of the timeline and we need the correct things parented to the null.

To be sure we are at the correct point on the timeline, follow these steps:

  1. Move to the point on the timeline after the last bit of text that has been animated on.
  2. Move the Chloe layer on to the timeline so that the layer starts at that point.
  3. Turn on motion blur for Chloe. See the placement of everything here:
    Adding the character to an infographic project

    Camera pan start point

We need to parent the Chloe layer to the null layer at this point. Also parent the text to the null layer:

Adding the character to an infographic project

Parent character to null

To create a hold key frame for the position parameter of our null object, follow these steps:

  1. Navigate to the far-right of the timeline.
  2. Locate the diamond icon in the position of the null object.
  3. Click on the diamond:
    Adding the character to an infographic project

    Blank key frame

Let's animate our move to the right. Select the position parameter and scrub it so that the camera is moving to the right:

Adding the character to an infographic project

Pan to Chloe

Completing your infographic

You now have all the tools to create a dynamic infographic video. Spend some time adding more text to help communicate your concept.

Adding the character to an infographic project

Now we are going to bring Chloe into the main composition and we are going to create a camera move to the right. We will animate our null object to do this. We need to be on the correct part of the timeline and we need the correct things parented to the null.

To be sure we are at the correct point on the timeline, follow these steps:

  1. Move to the point on the timeline after the last bit of text that has been animated on.
  2. Move the Chloe layer on to the timeline so that the layer starts at that point.
  3. Turn on motion blur for Chloe. See the placement of everything here:
    Adding the character to an infographic project

    Camera pan start point

We need to parent the Chloe layer to the null layer at this point. Also parent the text to the null layer:

Adding the character to an infographic project

Parent character to null

To create a hold key frame for the position parameter of our null object, follow these steps:

  1. Navigate to the far-right of the timeline.
  2. Locate the diamond icon in the position of the null object.
  3. Click on the diamond:
    Adding the character to an infographic project

    Blank key frame

Let's animate our move to the right. Select the position parameter and scrub it so that the camera is moving to the right:

Adding the character to an infographic project

Pan to Chloe

Completing your infographic

You now have all the tools to create a dynamic infographic video. Spend some time adding more text to help communicate your concept.

Completing your infographic

You now have all the tools to create a dynamic infographic video. Spend some time adding more text to help communicate your concept.

Summary

In this chapter, we have learned how to create infographics. These types of videos can be used to communicate information, explain products, or as a way to express stories. You have learned many skills and tools. You can create kinetic typography and edit it. You can also animate icons in dynamic, realistic ways, as demonstrated with this project. The biggest thing you learned was how to animate characters. You learned three different ways to bring characters to life. Experiment with these character animation tools.

I have provided additional links for further reading. Character animation is a valuable skill to have in your toolbox. It allows you to add humor and emotion to your projects, and is a unique way to engage your viewers! We also covered different camera moves such as a camera push in and a left-to-right pan. These camera moves are a great way to transition in and out of scenes. We also covered using adjustment layers to simulate a rack focus. You now have a variety of character animation tools at your disposal. I strongly recommend you experiment with all of these character animation tools. Use these characters to help tell your story!

In the next chapter, we will create a film title. This will build on your knowledge of text animation and effects.

Questions

  1. What is tracking used for?
  2. What should Illustrator files should be imported as?
  3. Why is it important to turn on continuously rasterize for Illustrator layers?
  4. Why is it important to turn on Easy Ease for your key frames?
  5. In Adobe Character Animator, how do you turn on facial tracking and lip-synch recording?
  6. How do you export your Adobe Character Animator project?
  7. How many locations does motion blur need to be turned on at?

Further reading

Adobe Character Animator is a deep program. Take some time to read more about animation principles and this amazing program, and what you can do with it:

Chapter 5. Producing a Film Title Project Using Text Animator

In this chapter, we will learn how to create a film title. Film titles are shown at the beginning of a movie. These short sequences not only provide the name of the movie, but also set the tone for the film. Contemporary film titles were created by Saul Bass. His films, such as Psycho and the Man with the Golden Arm, revolutionized film titles. He elevated film titles to an art form.

In this chapter, we will learn the following:

  • How to create a mood with exciting type!
  • Special 3D effects for our type to give it depth
  • How to use trackmates to add texture

Creating a film title

Imagine this: you are in a movie theater and the film starts; then you see a dramatic title on the screen. This title not only provides the name of the film, but it puts you in the mood for the movie you're about to watch. Any seasoned After Effects artist knows how to create film titles. In this chapter, we will build on our tools and skills from previous lessons, such as type design. But we will also dive into new skills, such as using more effects and using After Effects lights. Let's get started!

Setting up your project

The first thing we're going to do is create a 1,920 x 1,080 comp in After Effects. Let's set this up by going through the following steps:

  1. Make this comp five seconds long.
  2. Name it NIGHT KINGDOM (or the name of your film title).
  3. Make it 29.97.
  4. Create five folders. Name them Precomp, Main, and Images.

Now that you have your project set up, we are going to add a solid background to our composition. Make this background solid black, by selecting the option shown in the following screenshot. This background will be at the bottom of our layers:

Setting up your project

New solid

Now we are going to create a text layer by selecting the option shown in the following screenshot:

Setting up your project

Text layer

When you add a text layer, it will come into your composition centered, but completely blank. It's up to you to add text to it. You can do this by going through the following steps:

  1. Type NIGHT on the first line
  2. Type KINGDOM on the second line
  3. Change your font to Constantia or to any sans serif font
  4. Parent the KINGDOM line of type with the NIGHT line of type

When creating titles, you will need to make sure your text is lined up and conforms to title-safe guidelines. Take a look at where these guidelines are located. Turn on the Title/Action Safe option, as shown in the following screenshot. Familiarize yourself with these guides and add them to your arsenal of tools when creating any type in After Effects:

Setting up your project

Title safe

Adjust the scale of the NIGHT type so the entire title fits into the title-safe guideline, as shown in the following screenshot:

Setting up your project

We are going for a stylized fantasy look for our title sequence. To achieve this, we will scale up the first letter of each line by going through the following steps:

  1. Select your text tool.
  2. Select the first letter of each line of type.
  3. Go over to the text-sizing parameter in the upper-left corner of the character panel.
  4. Drag the sizing parameter up so your first letter is scaled up, as shown in the following screenshot:
    Setting up your project

    Scale text

Repeat this process for the K in KINGDOM.

Creating 3D-looking text with bevel emboss

We want to further stylize this text by creating a 3D-looking effect for the title. Let's use the bevel emboss layer style. Layer styles are a great way to add additional features to your layers. To begin with, we need to precompose both of our type layers and then name this precomp type. Go through the following steps to add a bevel emboss style to your text:

  1. Go to your text precomp.
  2. Select the NIGHT text layer.
  3. Go to Layer and navigate to Layer Styles.
  4. Click on Bevel and Emboss to apply this to your text, as shown in the following screenshot:
    Creating 3D-looking text with bevel emboss

    Bevel emboss

Next, we are going to tweak our bevel settings. To adjust the settings, simply scroll down our text settings and reveal the layer styles. Look at the settings in the following screenshot and adjust your settings as I have. The main change to make is to switching your technique to Chisel Hard, as shown in the following screenshot:

Creating 3D-looking text with bevel emboss

Bevel emboss settings

Now that you have your emboss settings configured, you can copy your layer style and paste it on to you KINGDOM text, as shown in the following screenshot:

Creating 3D-looking text with bevel emboss

Layer style paste

We want to give our text more dramatic lighting, so we are going to add an effect called CC Glass by going through the following steps:

  1. Go back to your main title comp.
  2. Go to the Effects panel.
  3. Add the effect called CC Glass to your text precomp, as shown in the following screenshot:
    Creating 3D-looking text with bevel emboss

    CC Glass

You may notice that you get a bit of shiny lighting effect to your type. Let's go on a little adventure and explore the settings for CC Glass. This effect is used to give things a shiny glass-like look. However, we are going to use it to give our text light effects. The first setting to adjust is the light settings. We want to add a light to our scene by going through the following steps:

  1. Go to Layer.
  2. Navigate through the New tab.
  3. Choose Light..., as shown in the following screenshot:
    Creating 3D-looking text with bevel emboss

    Add light

Take a look at these Light Settings. We are creating a point light with the color white. Ensure that you check Casts Shadows, as shown in the following screenshot:

Creating 3D-looking text with bevel emboss

Light setting

We will go into lights in much more detail in future lessons. For now, it's enough to know that this light mimic is an actual light in your composition. Objects will respond as if it's an actual light. Let's make some adjustments to our light by going through the following steps:

  1. Create a null object
  2. Parent your light with it

This will allow you to move your light easily. When you want to move your light, simply move the null object by going through the following steps:

  1. Select your text precomp.
  2. Go to the CC Glass parameters.
  3. Scroll down the Light settings.
  4. Choose Using | AE Lights, as shown in the following steps:
    Creating 3D-looking text with bevel emboss

    CC Glass settings

Move your null object around. You should see that the light follows it. You're there—real light glints on your text! How awesome is this? You are ready to rock and roll with CC Glass settings to further improve your sexy text! I am going to leave the tweaking of these settings up to you; I set my softness at 45 percent—this soothes out the glass effect. You can copy my settings if you want; they are all in the preceding screenshot.

Take a few moments here to adjust your Light settings. I'll provide you an image with my settings, but you can adjust yours more or less as you see fit. You can find your Light settings by scrolling down the light layer and selecting the Light Options setting, as shown in the following screenshot:

Creating 3D-looking text with bevel emboss

Light setting

As you can see, I increased the intensity to 287. We may change this later, but as you can see, this is how you increase the light amount.

Next, we are going to tweak our glass setting further and add a level effect. The levels are found in the effects. Double-click on this to add this effect to your text precomp. We will tweak these setting to get a sharper contrast for our text, as shown in the following screenshot:

Creating 3D-looking text with bevel emboss

Levels

Adjust your Levels settings (the histogram) so that you can crush your blacks and whites. This will give your text more contrast. Let's set this up by going through the following steps:

  1. Change your CC Glass height setting to 40
  2. Change your CC Glass softness to 25

Let's take a moment and take stock of what we have so far. We have some 3D text that's lit well with a light. Next, we need to give it more drama and atmosphere. We are going to animate our light and add some atmospheric smoke to the scene. This is a fantasy movie, so we want our environment to look and feel mysterious and otherworldly.

Light animation

Let's animate our light in this scene by animating the null object that the light is parented with. We can set this up by going through the following steps:

  1. Select your null object.
  2. Press P for Position.
  3. Start at the beginning of the timeline and animate to the 2 second mark in the timeline, as shown in the following screenshot.
  4. Animate your light so that it moves from left to right over your text:
    Light animation

    Light animation

Next, let's scroll down our light options to reveal the Color options for our light. Change the Color of your light to a light blue, as shown in the following screenshot:

Light animation

Color adjustment

Using track mattes

This is looking good so far. Let's improve our titles by giving them some texture. Choose the Grunge texture. We will use this as the texture for our type.

Go into your text precomp and select both lines of text, as shown in the following screenshot:

Using track mattes

Text selection

Next, precompose these text layers. We can now put a texture on both of these at the same time. Find the Grunge layer and bring the Grunge image into the text layer with the precomped text. Put the Grunge layer under the text layer, as shown in the following screenshot:

Using track mattes

Grunge layer 1

Nice! Now we can add a track matte to our texture. Track mattes allow you to use a layer or mask as a matte. The program will use the text as a stencil for the texture.

Choose the texture and select the Alpha track matte by going through the following steps:

  1. Select your Grunge layer.
  2. Look the right-hand side of the Track Matte tab.
  3. Scroll down the Track Matte tab.
  4. Choose the Alpha Matte "[text2]", as shown in the following screenshot:
    Using track mattes

    Alpha track matte

Track matte is a fierce tool. You can fill anything with the texture of your choice. This empowers you to use a variety of images and create interesting realistic objects. I encourage you to dive deep into using track mattes. Experiment and have fun with all the possibilities.

But there's a problem: we've lost our 3D effect. When you add a track matte to a layer, it will fill your layer with that image, flattening your text. Here's a simple solution:

  1. Duplicate your text layer.
  2. Make sure it's turned on.
  3. To the right, you will find the blend modes.
  4. Select Overlay, as shown in the following screenshot:
    Using track mattes

    Overlay blend modes

Blend modes is a helpful set of tools to have to hand. Blend modes are like Photoshop modes, where you can determine how the layers blend with each other. Now that you have the overlay blend mode on, you can see that the text layer is overlaying its visual properties on top of the Grunge layer.

If you're at all like me, you like to tweak your settings until they are perfect. Let's tweak our levels to ensure that most of the texture is coming through on our text, as shown in the following screenshot:

Using track mattes

Level adjustment

This is looking good! Let's add some atmosphere to our title by going through the following steps:

  1. Add an adjustment layer
  2. Add a Fog lights effects to the adjustment layer
  3. Name your adjustment layer Fog light

This is a great effect that will work for you without further adjustments. It will give you a fog-like background with animation. If you look at the fog-light layer, you will notice that this effect comes with its own keyframes. You're free to move these keyframes to make the fog move faster or slower, as shown in the following screenshot:

Using track mattes

Fog lights effect

Let's add some additional color to our background by going through the following steps:

  1. Select the Fog lights layer.
  2. Add the Hue/Saturation effect.
  3. Check the Color option in the Hue/Saturation effect panel.
  4. Adjust the hue until the color turns blue.
  5. Adjust the lightness to make the background a bit darker, as shown in the following screenshot:
    Using track mattes

    Hue/Saturation

Lens flares

As we head our discussion to Lens Flares, it is imperative to know that it is an art form of its own. Through this feature you can create unique effects that is bound to evoke the drama your project needs. Let's create a custom lens flare effect by going through the following steps:

  1. We are going to create a new comp for a lens flare.
  2. Create a new composition that is 500 x 500.
  3. Name this flare, as shown in the following screenshot:
    Lens flares

    New comp

  4. Create an adjustment.
  5. Create a new black solid.
  6. Add a lens flare effect to the adjustment, as shown in the following screenshot:
    Lens flares

    Flare

  7. Next, let's mask our flare.
  8. Select the ellipse mask tool and mask around our flare.
  9. Mask your flare.
  10. Feather out your mask, as shown in the following screenshot:
    Lens flares

    Mask and feather

  11. Now bring this flare precomp into our title composition.
  12. Switch the blending mode to Add.
  13. Add the Hue/Saturation effect.
  14. Check the color box.
  15. Adjust the color to yellow.
  16. Scale this flare down, as shown in the following screenshot:
    Lens flares

    Hue/Saturation

You're doing great work here. Let's animate the opacity of the light on. Make sure your flare doesn't have a square border; feather your mask in the precomp to achieve this. The final step is to render the title. This is a five-second movie, so make your composition for this project render only five seconds in length.

Summary

Title design is an essential skill set that you need as a motion designer. For this project, we put into practice the lessons that we previously learned about type design, and we learned about 3D bevel effects. We also learned how to work with texture using track mattes. You should master this and keep practicing with track mattes. This will help you tremendously in your growth as a motion graphic animator. We also learned how to create a lens flare effect and we started working with lights.

In the next chapter, we will work with sports graphics. We will use more text-related skills, learn about motion tracking, and much more.

Questions

  1. What is a track matte?
  2. How do you add a light?
  3. What is a bevel effect?
  4. What is a hue/saturate effect?
  5. What is a lens flare?
  6. What are levels?
  7. What does title-safe mean?
Left arrow icon Right arrow icon
Download code icon Download Code

Key benefits

  • Design, animate, and sequence a complete motion graphics project
  • Work with compositions and pre-compositions to create animations speedily
  • Maximize your motion graphics and visual effects skills

Description

If you’re thinking seriously about making and publishing your videos with professional editing and animation, look no further! Adobe After Effects is a popular tool among video editors and YouTubers to enhance their videos and bring them to life by implementing visual effects and motion graphics. This book will take you right from the basics through to the advanced techniques in Adobe After Effects CC 2018. You will start by setting up your editing environment to learn and improve techniques to sharpen your video editing skills. Furthermore, you will work with basic and advanced special effects to create, modify, and optimize motion graphics in your videos. Lastly, you will not only learn how to create 2.5D animations, but also get to grips with using Cinema 4D Lite to build and animate complete 3D scenes. By the end of the book, you’ll have learned how to package a video efficiently with the help of the projects covered.

Who is this book for?

If you’re a student, professional, YouTuber, or anyone who is interested in video editing, animation, and motion graphics, this book is for you. You’ll also find this resource useful if you’re an Illustrator looking to put your creations in motion.

What you will learn

  • Create a lower third project for a TV show with complex layers
  • Work with shape layer animation to create an animated lyrics video
  • Explore different tools to animate characters
  • Apply text animation to create a dynamic film-opening title
  • Use professional visual effects to create a VFX project
  • Model, light, and composite your 3D project in After Effects

Product Details

Country selected
Publication date, Length, Edition, Language, ISBN-13
Publication date : Apr 27, 2019
Length: 318 pages
Edition : 1st
Language : English
ISBN-13 : 9781789343526
Vendor :
Adobe

What do you get with eBook?

Product feature icon Instant access to your Digital eBook purchase
Product feature icon Download this book in EPUB and PDF formats
Product feature icon Access this title in our online reader with advanced features
Product feature icon DRM FREE - Read whenever, wherever and however you want
Product feature icon AI Assistant (beta) to help accelerate your learning
OR
Modal Close icon
Payment Processing...
tick Completed

Billing Address

Product Details

Publication date : Apr 27, 2019
Length: 318 pages
Edition : 1st
Language : English
ISBN-13 : 9781789343526
Vendor :
Adobe

Packt Subscriptions

See our plans and pricing
Modal Close icon
$19.99 billed monthly
Feature tick icon Unlimited access to Packt's library of 7,000+ practical books and videos
Feature tick icon Constantly refreshed with 50+ new titles a month
Feature tick icon Exclusive Early access to books as they're written
Feature tick icon Solve problems while you work with advanced search and reference features
Feature tick icon Offline reading on the mobile app
Feature tick icon Simple pricing, no contract
$199.99 billed annually
Feature tick icon Unlimited access to Packt's library of 7,000+ practical books and videos
Feature tick icon Constantly refreshed with 50+ new titles a month
Feature tick icon Exclusive Early access to books as they're written
Feature tick icon Solve problems while you work with advanced search and reference features
Feature tick icon Offline reading on the mobile app
Feature tick icon Choose a DRM-free eBook or Video every month to keep
Feature tick icon PLUS own as many other DRM-free eBooks or Videos as you like for just $5 each
Feature tick icon Exclusive print discounts
$279.99 billed in 18 months
Feature tick icon Unlimited access to Packt's library of 7,000+ practical books and videos
Feature tick icon Constantly refreshed with 50+ new titles a month
Feature tick icon Exclusive Early access to books as they're written
Feature tick icon Solve problems while you work with advanced search and reference features
Feature tick icon Offline reading on the mobile app
Feature tick icon Choose a DRM-free eBook or Video every month to keep
Feature tick icon PLUS own as many other DRM-free eBooks or Videos as you like for just $5 each
Feature tick icon Exclusive print discounts

Frequently bought together


Stars icon
Total $ 241.97
Hands-On Adobe Premiere Pro 2020
$137.99
Hands-On Motion Graphics with Adobe After Effects CC
$48.99
Mastering Adobe Captivate 2019
$54.99
Total $ 241.97 Stars icon
Banner background image

Table of Contents

5 Chapters
I. Section 1: Text, Layers, Characters, Animation Chevron down icon Chevron up icon
II. Section 2: Video, Visual Effects, Compositing Chevron down icon Chevron up icon
III. Section 3: Working with 2.5D, 3D Chevron down icon Chevron up icon
Other Book You May Enjoy Chevron down icon Chevron up icon
Index Chevron down icon Chevron up icon

Customer reviews

Top Reviews
Rating distribution
Full star icon Full star icon Full star icon Full star icon Half star icon 4.2
(17 Ratings)
5 star 76.5%
4 star 0%
3 star 5.9%
2 star 0%
1 star 17.6%
Filter icon Filter
Top Reviews

Filter reviews by




Daniel Ongko Jun 30, 2019
Full star icon Full star icon Full star icon Full star icon Full star icon 5
For years, I tried to learn After Effects from watching YouTube tutorials but I have to keep going back to the video again and again because I couldn't remember how to do certain effects. Then, I read this book which is very easy to read and illustrative, and the best thing is it doesn't only tell you how to do it, it's teaches you the functions of certain effects in After Effects.When I watched most YouTube tutorials, I can only learn one effect, but when I read David's book, I can do more effects by understanding the functions. I would totally recommend this book especially to beginners who wants to learn After Effects.
Amazon Verified review Amazon
Marina Antekelian Jun 15, 2019
Full star icon Full star icon Full star icon Full star icon Full star icon 5
I'm a student interested in learning After Effects and this book was just what I needed. I was able to clearly understand the concept of motion design, and I am now confident in my skills in After Effects. Thank you, David Dodds!
Amazon Verified review Amazon
Jonn Walterscheid Sep 13, 2019
Full star icon Full star icon Full star icon Full star icon Full star icon 5
This book is clearly written with lots of good screenshots. A great way to build a foundational knowledge of how to make motion graphics.
Amazon Verified review Amazon
Danielpour Jun 13, 2019
Full star icon Full star icon Full star icon Full star icon Full star icon 5
Dodds gives a clear step-by-step approach in learning the fundamentals of Adobe After Effects. Great for both complete beginners and those trying to brush up.
Amazon Verified review Amazon
Allen Goolsby Jul 03, 2019
Full star icon Full star icon Full star icon Full star icon Full star icon 5
I’m a video editor trying extend my range of skills. This book made it simple and approachable to learn motion graphics. I found myself creating projects I would have never done otherwise.
Amazon Verified review Amazon
Get free access to Packt library with over 7500+ books and video courses for 7 days!
Start Free Trial

FAQs

How do I buy and download an eBook? Chevron down icon Chevron up icon

Where there is an eBook version of a title available, you can buy it from the book details for that title. Add either the standalone eBook or the eBook and print book bundle to your shopping cart. Your eBook will show in your cart as a product on its own. After completing checkout and payment in the normal way, you will receive your receipt on the screen containing a link to a personalised PDF download file. This link will remain active for 30 days. You can download backup copies of the file by logging in to your account at any time.

If you already have Adobe reader installed, then clicking on the link will download and open the PDF file directly. If you don't, then save the PDF file on your machine and download the Reader to view it.

Please Note: Packt eBooks are non-returnable and non-refundable.

Packt eBook and Licensing When you buy an eBook from Packt Publishing, completing your purchase means you accept the terms of our licence agreement. Please read the full text of the agreement. In it we have tried to balance the need for the ebook to be usable for you the reader with our needs to protect the rights of us as Publishers and of our authors. In summary, the agreement says:

  • You may make copies of your eBook for your own use onto any machine
  • You may not pass copies of the eBook on to anyone else
How can I make a purchase on your website? Chevron down icon Chevron up icon

If you want to purchase a video course, eBook or Bundle (Print+eBook) please follow below steps:

  1. Register on our website using your email address and the password.
  2. Search for the title by name or ISBN using the search option.
  3. Select the title you want to purchase.
  4. Choose the format you wish to purchase the title in; if you order the Print Book, you get a free eBook copy of the same title. 
  5. Proceed with the checkout process (payment to be made using Credit Card, Debit Cart, or PayPal)
Where can I access support around an eBook? Chevron down icon Chevron up icon
  • If you experience a problem with using or installing Adobe Reader, the contact Adobe directly.
  • To view the errata for the book, see www.packtpub.com/support and view the pages for the title you have.
  • To view your account details or to download a new copy of the book go to www.packtpub.com/account
  • To contact us directly if a problem is not resolved, use www.packtpub.com/contact-us
What eBook formats do Packt support? Chevron down icon Chevron up icon

Our eBooks are currently available in a variety of formats such as PDF and ePubs. In the future, this may well change with trends and development in technology, but please note that our PDFs are not Adobe eBook Reader format, which has greater restrictions on security.

You will need to use Adobe Reader v9 or later in order to read Packt's PDF eBooks.

What are the benefits of eBooks? Chevron down icon Chevron up icon
  • You can get the information you need immediately
  • You can easily take them with you on a laptop
  • You can download them an unlimited number of times
  • You can print them out
  • They are copy-paste enabled
  • They are searchable
  • There is no password protection
  • They are lower price than print
  • They save resources and space
What is an eBook? Chevron down icon Chevron up icon

Packt eBooks are a complete electronic version of the print edition, available in PDF and ePub formats. Every piece of content down to the page numbering is the same. Because we save the costs of printing and shipping the book to you, we are able to offer eBooks at a lower cost than print editions.

When you have purchased an eBook, simply login to your account and click on the link in Your Download Area. We recommend you saving the file to your hard drive before opening it.

For optimal viewing of our eBooks, we recommend you download and install the free Adobe Reader version 9.